AllFusion® Endevor®

Change Manager
SCL Reference Guide
r7

F00182-1E
This documentation and related computer software program (hereinafter referred to as the
“Documentation”) is for the end user's informational purposes only and is subject to change or
withdrawal by Computer Associates International, Inc. (“CA”) at any time.

This documentation may not be copied, transferred, reproduced, disclosed or duplicated, in whole or
in part, without the prior written consent of CA. This documentation is proprietary information of CA
and protected by the copyright laws of the United States and international treaties.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, licensed users may print a reasonable number of copies of this
documentation for their own internal use, provided that all CA copyright notices and legends are
affixed to each reproduced copy. Only authorized employees, consultants, or agents of the user who
are bound by the confidentiality provisions of the license for the software are permitted to have access
to such copies.

This right to print copies is limited to the period during which the license for the product remains in
full force and effect. Should the license terminate for any reason, it shall be the user's responsibility to
return to CA the reproduced copies or to certify to CA that same have been destroyed.

To the extent permitted by applicable law, CA provides this documentation “as is” without warranty
of any kind, including without limitation, any implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a
particular purpose or noninfringement. In no event will CA be liable to the end user or any third
party for any loss or damage, direct or indirect, from the use of this documentation, including without
limitation, lost profits, business interruption, goodwill, or lost data, even if CA is expressly advised of
such loss or damage.

The use of any product referenced in this documentation and this documentation is governed by the
end user's applicable license agreement.

The manufacturer of this documentation is Computer Associates International, Inc.

Provided with “Restricted Rights” as set forth in 48 C.F.R. Section 12.212, 48 C.F.R. Sections
52.227-19(c)(1) and (2) or DFARS Section 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii) or applicable successor provisions.

First Edition February 2005

 2005 Computer Associates International, Inc. (CA)

All rights reserved.

All trademarks, trade names, service marks, and logos referenced herein belong to their respective
companies.
Contents

Chapter 1. What Is SCL? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 Type Sequence Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2 Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.2 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.3 Global Type Sequence Processing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.3 Documentation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.4 Name Masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.4.1 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.4.2 Masking Improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.5 Syntax Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.5.1 Sample Syntax Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.5.2 Syntax Diagram Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.5.3 General Coding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.5.3.1 Valid Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.5.3.2 Incompatible Commands and Clauses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.5.3.3 Ending A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.5.3.4 &&ACTION Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.5.3.5 SCL Parsing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.5.3.6 SCL Continuation Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.6 Syntax for Long File and Path Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1.6.1 HFSFile Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1.6.2 Path Name Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1.6.3 Element Name Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Chapter 2. About the SCL Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 SCL Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1 Set Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.2 Clear Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.3 EOF (EOJ) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.4 Element Action Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.5 Environment Definition Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.6 Package Action Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.2 Statements and Clauses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.2 Coding Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.3 Element Action Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.3.1 Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Contents iii
 2.3.2 Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.3.3 Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.3.4 Example 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Chapter 3. Set, Clear, and EOF Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Set Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1.1 Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1.2 Set Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.3 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.3.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.4 Set Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.1.5 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.1.5.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.1.6 Set From . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.1.7 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.1.7.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.1.8 Set Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.1.9 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.1.9.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.1.9.2 Actions and the Set Options Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.1.10 Set STOPRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.1.11 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.1.11.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.1.12 Set To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.1.13 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.1.13.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.1.14 Set Where . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.1.15 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.1.15.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.2 Clear Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.2.2 Clear Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.2.3 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.2.3.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.2.4 Clear To/From . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.2.5 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.2.5.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.2.6 Clear Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3.2.7 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3.2.7.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.2.8 Clear Where . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.2.9 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.2.9.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.3 EOF (EOJ) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.3.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.3.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 Coding Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 SCL Execution JCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

iv SCL Reference Guide

 4.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3 The &&ACTION Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.3.3 Example of &&ACTION SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.4 The Add Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.4.2 Add Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.4.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.4.3 Example of Add SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.5 The Archive Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.5.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.5.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.5.3 Example of Archive SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.6 The Copy Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.6.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.6.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.6.3 Example of Copy Action SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.7 The Delete Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.7.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.7.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.7.3 Example of Delete Action SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.8 The Generate Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.8.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.8.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.8.3 Example of Generate SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.9 The List Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.9.2 List from Endevor Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.9.3 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.9.3.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.9.4 List from Archive Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.9.5 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.9.5.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4.9.6 List Members (List from External Library) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.9.7 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.9.7.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.9.8 Example of List SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4.10 The Move Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4.10.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4.10.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4.10.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4.10.3 Example of Move SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4.11 The Print Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4.11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61

Contents v
 4.11.2 Printing from Endevor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4.11.3 Printing from an Output Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4.11.4 Print Element Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4.11.5 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4.11.5.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4.11.6 Print Member Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4.11.7 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4.11.7.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4.11.8 Example of Print SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
4.12 The Restore Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4.12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4.12.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4.12.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
4.12.3 Example of Restore SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4.13 The Retrieve Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4.13.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4.13.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4.13.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
4.13.3 Example of Retrieve SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4.14 The Signin Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4.14.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4.14.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4.14.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
4.14.3 Example of Signin SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
4.15 The Transfer Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4.15.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4.15.2 Transfer from Endevor to Endevor Statement . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4.15.3 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
4.15.3.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
4.15.4 Transfer from Endevor to Archive Data Set Statement . . . . . 4-97
4.15.5 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
4.15.5.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
4.15.6 Transfer from Archive Data Set or Unload Tape to Endevor
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
4.15.7 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
4.15.7.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
4.15.8 Example of Transfer SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
4.16 The Update Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
4.16.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
4.16.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
4.16.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
4.16.3 Example of Update SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 Batch Package Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.1.1 Summary of Batch Package Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.1.2 Batch Package Actions and Wildcarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2 Batch Package Facility Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2.2 Execution JCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2.3 Validating Input SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

vi SCL Reference Guide

 5.2.4 Return Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.3 Approve Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.3.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.3.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.3.3 Example of Approve Package SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.4 Archive Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4.3 Example of Archive Package SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.5 Backin Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.5.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.5.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.5.3 Example of Backin Package SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.6 Backout Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.6.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.6.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.6.3 Example of Backout Package SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.7 Cast Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.7.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.7.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.7.3 Example of Cast Package SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.8 Commit Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.8.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.8.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.8.3 Example of Commit Package SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.9 Define Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.9.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.9.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.9.3 Example of Define Package SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.10 Delete Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.10.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.10.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.10.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.10.3 Example of Delete Package SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.11 Deny Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.11.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.11.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.11.3 Example of Deny Package SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.12 Execute Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.12.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.12.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Contents vii
 5.12.3 Example of Execute Package SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.13 Export Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.13.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.13.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.13.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.13.3 Example of Export Package SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.14 Inspect Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.14.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.14.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.14.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.15 Reset Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.15.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.15.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.15.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.15.3 Example of Reset Package SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.16 Submit Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.16.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.16.2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.16.2.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.16.3 Example of Submit Package SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 Batch Environment Administration Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Batch Environment Administration Facility Execution . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.2 Execution JCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.3 DD Statement Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.2.4 Validating Input SCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.2.5 Return Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.2.6 Execution Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.3 Edit Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.3.2 Invoking Edit Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.3.3 Edit Command Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.4 The Build Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.4.2 Build SCL for Approver Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.4.3 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.4.3.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.4.4 Build SCL for Approver Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.4.5 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.4.5.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.4.6 Build SCL for Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.4.7 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.4.7.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.4.8 Build SCL for Processor Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.4.9 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.4.9.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.4.10 Build SCL for Processor Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.4.11 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.4.11.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

viii SCL Reference Guide

 6.4.12 Build SCL for Shipment Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.4.13 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.4.13.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.4.14 Build SCL for Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.4.15 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.4.15.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.4.16 Build SCL for System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.4.17 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.4.17.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.4.18 Build SCL for Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.4.19 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.4.19.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.4.20 Build SCL for Type Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.4.21 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.4.21.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.5 The Define Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6.5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6.5.2 Define Approver Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.5.3 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.5.3.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.5.4 Define Approver Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
6.5.5 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
6.5.5.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
6.5.6 Define Processor Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6.5.7 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6.5.7.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6.5.8 Define Processor Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6.5.9 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6.5.9.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6.5.10 Define Shipment Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
6.5.11 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
6.5.11.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
6.5.12 Define Shipment Mapping Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
6.5.13 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
6.5.13.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
6.5.14 Define Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
6.5.15 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
6.5.15.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
6.5.16 Define System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
6.5.17 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
6.5.17.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
6.5.18 Define Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
6.5.19 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
6.5.19.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
6.5.20 Define Type Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
6.5.21 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
6.5.21.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
6.6 The Delete Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
6.6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
6.6.2 Delete Approver Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73

Contents ix
 6.6.3 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
6.6.3.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
6.6.4 Delete Approver Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
6.6.5 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
6.6.5.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
6.6.6 Delete Processor Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
6.6.7 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
6.6.7.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
6.6.8 Delete Processor Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
6.6.9 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
6.6.9.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
6.6.10 Delete Shipment Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
6.6.11 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
6.6.11.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
6.6.12 Delete Shipment Mapping Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
6.6.13 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
6.6.13.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
6.6.14 Delete Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
6.6.15 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
6.6.15.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
6.6.16 Delete System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
6.6.17 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
6.6.17.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
6.6.18 Delete Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
6.6.19 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
6.6.19.1 Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84

Appendix A. SCL Reserved Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A.1 A Rule for Working with Reserved Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.2 The SCL Reserved Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

x SCL Reference Guide

Chapter 1. What Is SCL?

SCL—Software Control Language—is a freeform language, with English-like

statements, that allow you to manipulate elements, environment definitions,
and packages within AllFusion Endevor Change Manager (Endevor). SCL
is the language used for the non-interactive (batch) execution of Endevor. It is
a flexible and powerful tool, saving you time in two ways:
■ Using SCL allows you to work with as many (or as few) actions as are
required to complete a specific job at a particular time.
■ Using SCL eliminates much of the screen navigation that is required to
process large numbers of elements in an interactive mode.

Because of its consistent nature, SCL is easy to learn and use. For example,
you can establish global settings that can be used over and over. This
provides a concise and consistent set of options or location information which
can be applied to any number of actions, and you need code this information
only once in each job stream. Conversely, you can override any pre-
established settings by entering like information in a particular request.

There are many features and benefits to using SCL. The following list
emphasizes those aspects of SCL that both facilitate and enhance Endevor
processing.
■ SCL allows you to set up a single list or multiple lists of element actions
for further manipulation in Endevor.
■ SCL allows you to manipulate elements or members singly, on a
module-by-module level. SCL also allows you to manipulate several
library members or module elements at a time. You can tailor your coding
to meet your requirements at any time.
■ SCL is extremely flexible. You can establish global settings for element
action requests (using a SET statement), and override one or all of your
selections on a local level; that is, within each individual element action
request. In addition:
– You can define the files you want to manipulate either within the
language (for example, using a clause such as SET DSNAME...) or
external to the language (for example, using a clause such as SET
FILE...).

Chapter 1. What Is SCL? 1-1

 – You can delay the specification of actions to be run at a particular
time, by using the &&ACTION facility (see the description of
&&ACTION in Chapter 4, "Element Action Statements"). This
capability allows you to define a list of actions for future use and
re-use, so you can code only what you need when you need it.
■ SCL allows you to mix Endevor locations within the same execution. You
can change environment, system, subsystem, or type at any time.
■ SCL supports processing in type-sequence order, automatically sorting
elements according to the specifications determined by the Endevor
administrator in your organization.
■ SCL supports list processing. List processing enables you to:
– Generate a list, edit it as necessary, and break it up into multiple
executions instead of keying individual statements.
– Generate lists based on different selection criteria.
– Perform configuration management through the use of a special
WHERE COMPONENTS EQUAL option.
– Support a single scan facility that will run against AllFusion
CA-Panvalet, AllFusion CA-Librarian, a PDS, and Endevor, so
you do not need to use separate utilities to scan source code.
■ SCL serves as a problem-solving tool, by allowing you to quickly isolate
system errors. For example, you can use the WHERE GENERATE FAILED
option to generate a list of only those elements that were not successfully
processed at a specific time.
■ SCL supports vendor interfaces. You can execute SCL from a user-written
program, which allows you to write user-defined front-ends for use with
various proprietary or vendor-supplied programs.
■ SCL enables you to integrate Endevor into existing change
management/change administration job scheduling systems.
■ SCL supports release scheduling (job management). For example, moving
a group of elements from a test environment to a production environment
any given day.

1-2 SCL Reference Guide

 1.1 Type Sequence Processing

1.1 Type Sequence Processing

1.1.1 Overview
Element action SCL statements are processed in type sequence order. The type
specified in the FROM or TO clause determines the sequence in which element
action requests are processed.

An element's type is indicated in the FROM clause or TO clause (or both). The
exact type entry used to determine the processing sequence (that is, type as
defined in the FROM clause or the TO clause) depends upon the element
action requested.

Action Determines Type Sequence from the . . .

Add TO clause
Archive FROM clause
Delete FROM clause
Generate FROM clause
List FROM clause
Move FROM clause
Print FROM clause
Retrieve FROM clause
Signin FROM clause
Transfer TO clause
Update TO clause

Chapter 1. What Is SCL? 1-3

1.1 Type Sequence Processing

When Global Type Sequencing IS NOT in Effect: Actions are put into the
appropriate sequence and executed within each system. In the following
example, actions have been requested for twsystems: System A and System B .
Assume that the system administrator has established the following type
processing sequences:
■ For System A: COPYBOOK, then COBOL
■ For System B: MACRO, then ASSEMBLER

Given the element type definitions shown for each action, processing would
occur in the following sequence.
1. SYSTEM A: ADD ELEMENTS...TYPE COPYBOOK
2. SYSTEM A: GENERATE ELEMENTS...TYPE COPYBOOK...
3. SYSTEM A: ADD ELEMENTS...TYPE COBOL...
4. SYSTEM B: RETRIEVE ELEMENTS...TYPE MACRO
5. SYSTEM B: ADD ELEMENTS...TYPE ASSEM...
Note: The element type must have been previously defined by your
administrator, and placed in the appropriate sequence using the Type
Processing Sequence panel. For details, refer to the discussion about defining
type sequence processing in the Administrator Guide.

When Global Type Sequencing IS in Effect Actions are put into the
appropriate type sequence and executed as defined by your administrator. For
example, assume that the system administrator has established the following
type sequence:
1. COPYBOOK
2. MACRO
3. COBOL
4. ASSEMBLER

1-4 SCL Reference Guide

 1.1 Type Sequence Processing

Given the element type sequencing definition, processing would occur in the
following sequence.
1. ADD ELEMENTS...TYPE COPYBOOK
2. GENERATE ELEMENTS...TYPE MACRO
3. RETRIEVE ELEMENTS...TYPE MACRO
4. ADD ELEMENTS...TYPE COBOL
5. ADD ELEMENTS...TYPE ASSEMBLER

Chapter 1. What Is SCL? 1-5

1.2 Process Flow

1.2 Process Flow

1.2.1 Overview
When you submit your SCL requests, Endevor follows a specific processing
flow to execute the actions.
Note: If the option Global Type Sequencing is enabled at your site, the
processing order is different. SCL element actions execute in type sequence
order defined at the site level by the Endevor administrator, regardless of the
action's inventory location. For details, see Global Type Sequence Processing
Order.

If Global Type Sequencing is not enabled at your site, the process flow is as
follows:
1. Endevor first parses, or validates, the SCL syntax, assigning a statement
number to each SCL statement coded.
A Syntax Report is produced, echoing the SCL statements entered and
flagging any syntax errors.
2. When all requests have been validated, Endevor checks for errors. If
errors exist within the syntax, processing is terminated.
If no errors exist, processing continues.
3. Endevor checks whether any statements have been entered with an archive
file designated as the FROM location. All such actions are performed first,
as they are encountered.
For example, assume you code both an ARCHIVE action and a RESTORE
action. If you want Endevor to perform the RESTORE action before the
ARCHIVE action, designate an archive file as the RESTORE action's FROM
location. If you want to perform the ARCHIVE action before the
RESTORE action, however, you need to execute SCL twice—first to
perform the ARCHIVE action and then to perform the RESTORE action.
For elements that are restored, transferred, copied, or listed from an archive
file, processing occurs as follows:
■ The element(s) is restored (or transferred, copied, or listed), but it is
not generated at this time.
■ Endevor continues processing the remaining actions, as described in
the following steps (beginning with Step 4, below).

1-6 SCL Reference Guide

 1.2 Process Flow

4. Endevor expands any name mask that may have been entered for system,
subsystem, stage, and type.
■ Beginning with the first SCL syntax request, Endevor checks for use of
the name mask with the system name.
If a name mask has not been used with the system name in the first
SCL syntax request, Endevor checks for the name mask in the next
syntax request. If no name mask is found and the system name is the
same, Endevor checks the system name of the third syntax request.
This procedure continues until a system name is found with a name
mask or a new system name is encountered, or until all syntax
requests have been searched.
When one of the three situations mentioned above occurs, Endevor
returns to the first syntax request and checks for a name mask with the
type name.
Again, if no name mask is found, the second syntax request is checked,
and so on until a type name is found with a name mask or a new type
name is encountered, or until all syntax requests have been checked.
This procedure is repeated for stage and subsystem.
Endevor examines each clause (SYSTEM and STAGE) in the syntax
request until a non-match is found. Once a difference is encountered,
Endevor executes the previous syntax requests—in type sequence
order (see Step 5). Processing then continues accordingly with the next
syntax request.
■ If a name mask has been used with the system name in the first syntax
request, Endevor expands the entries. Then, within each system of the
first syntax request, any remaining name masks are expanded (in the
appropriate order).
5. Endevor sorts the types based on type sequence order.
Processing involves syntax requests for stage within a particular system.
Type processing sequence conventions still apply, however. If a name
mask is not used with type, the syntax requests themselves are sorted in
type sequence order.
If a name mask is used with type, actions across all syntax requests are
executed in type sequence order. So, depending on the elements indicated
(see Step 6 below), it is not unusual to see an ADD from syntax #2,
followed by a GENERATE from syntax #3, followed by an ADD from
syntax #2. When all information has been generated for the first (set of
matching) syntax request(s), Endevor executes the next (set of) syntax
request(s).

Chapter 1. What Is SCL? 1-7

1.2 Process Flow

6. Once all types have been defined, Endevor checks the stage identifier
involved within the first type. If a name mask has been used with the
stage identifier, Endevor expands the entries.
Still within the first type, and within the first stage identified, Endevor
expands any subsystem name masks that have been coded.
7. Endevor expands the element name mask if it exists (element is the
element-name entered in the first [action] clause of the statement) and
executes each action within the system, including those actions previously
performed but not generated (because they were from an archive file).
Remember: all SCL statements are executed in type sequence order.
8. Endevor assigns each action an action number. As all actions are
processed, an Execution Report is produced. The Execution Report fully
expands the action request, providing the complete system name,
subsystem name, type, and stage for the element being processed. In
addition, the report lists all options in effect for the action. Endevor also
produces a Summary Report. This report provides one line of summary
information for each action performed.

1.2.2 Example

The example above displays a typical set of SCL requests. The type processing
sequence has been determined as COPYBOOK, COBOL, MACRO. Processing
takes place as follows:
1. Endevor first checks the system specification. No name mask is found, but
the system in request #4 —PERSONEL—differs from the system in the first
three requests—FINANCE.

1-8 SCL Reference Guide

 1.2 Process Flow

2. Endevor returns to the first request to check the type specification.

Remember: All actions within a particular system are executed at the same
time. When a different system name or use of the name mask is
encountered, Endevor returns to the first request in the "initial" system and
continues processing from that point.
3. The type is different for all three requests in system FINANCE. Because
type sequence processing conventions apply, the requests are executed in
the following order:
Statement #3
Statement #2
Statement #1
Before the requests are executed, Endevor checks whether name masks
have been used with stage. The field is the same for all three requests.
Therefore, the actions are executed in the appropriate order.
4. Endevor returns to request #4 and checks the system specification in the
remaining requests. Both request #4 and request #5 contain the same
system—PERSONEL. Request #6, however, contains a different system.
5. Endevor returns to request #4 and checks the type specification. Again,
the types are different, and the requests are executed in type sequence
order:
Statement #4
Statement #5
Endevor checks the stage and subsystem specifications for a name mask;
none is found. Consequently, Endevor continues processing by executing
the requests in the order shown above.
6. Request #6 is the last request, and contains a name mask in the system
specification. Endevor processes this request by expanding all name masks
encountered in the system, type, stage, and subsystem names and, finally,
executing the actions.

1.2.3 Global Type Sequence Processing Order

When the Global Type Sequencing option is enabled, SCL and API element
actions are executed in type sequence order defined at the site level in the
Type Sequence member.

Any types that are not included in the Type Sequence member are processed
after all the types in the Type Sequence member have completed processing.

Chapter 1. What Is SCL? 1-9

1.2 Process Flow

All actions are processed in the following order:

1. All actions that have Archive file as the source location. These are
executed first, in the element order found on the archive file. These actions
are: Copy, List from Archive, Restore, Transfer from Archive. The
execution of these elements is based on the element's placement within the
archive file. The order of their execution is not affected by the Global Type
Sequence option.
2. Non-Endevor actions. These include List Member, Print Member, and List
ACMQ, which are executed next, in their API/SCL action order.
A List ACMQ request is really a list element request with the following
attributes and restrictions:
■ the through element name cannot be used
■ the CCID, date, or processor where clauses cannot be used
■ restricted to ACM input or related input component clauses
■ the through component name option cannot be used
■ build with components and build level none must be specified
3. All other Endevor actions. These are executed in type sequence order
followed by the statement SCL order. The order of the type records in the
site's defined Type Sequence member determines the type sequence
processing order. The following table lists the actions with the Endevor
inventory side of each action where inventory expansion and type
sequencing is done.

Actions Endevor inventory

where inventory expansion
and type sequencing occurs
Add/Update Target
Generate Source
Retrieve Source
Delete Source
Move Source
Archive Source
Transfer to Archive Source
Transfer C1-C1 Target
Signin Source
Print C1 Source
List C1 Source

1-10 SCL Reference Guide

 1.2 Process Flow

The following special conditions apply:

■ When inventory errors are found during the API/SCL expansion
phase, these actions are reported as they occur. They always appear
before any dispatched Endevor action.
■ When a not found condition occurs for an element or member name,
they will be reported last, after all other actions have been processed.

Chapter 1. What Is SCL? 1-11

1.3 Documentation Overview

1.3 Documentation Overview

This manual is part of a comprehensive documentation set that fully describes
the features and functions of Endevor and explains how to perform everyday
tasks. For a complete list of Endevor manuals, see the PDF Table of Contents
file in the PDF directory, or the Bookmanager Bookshelf file in the Books
directory.

The following sections describe documentation and product conventions.

1-12 SCL Reference Guide

 1.4 Name Masking

1.4 Name Masking

A name mask allows you to specify all names, or all names beginning with a
particular string, to be considered when performing an action.

Name masks are valid on:

■ Element names
■ System, subsystem, and type names within FROM clauses.
■ RESTRICT and REMOVE RESTRICTION clauses of the DEFINE CCID and
DEFINE SECURITY CLASS statements
■ Report syntax
■ ISPF panels
■ API requests
■ Package IDs

Name masks are not valid on:

■ Environment names, except in the FROM ENVIRONMENT field of the
WHERE COMPONENTS EQUAL clause. Refer to the description of the
LIST action in Chapter 4, “Element Action Statements” for additional
information.
■ Element names in the following situations:
– When entering a LEVel in a statement
– When using the MEMber clause with a particular action
– When building a package

1.4.1 Usage
There are three ways to mask names: by using the wildcard character (*), by
using the placeholder character (%), and by using both together.

The wildcard (*) can be used in one of two ways to specify external file names:
■ When coded as the only character of a search string, Endevor returns all
members of the search field. For example, if you coded the statement
ADD ELEMENT *, all elements would be added.
■ When coded as the last character of a search string, Endevor returns all
members of the search field beginning with the characters in the search
string preceding the wildcard. For example:
– The statement ADD ELEMENT UPD* would add all elements
beginning with "UPD", such as UPDATED or UPDATE.
– PKG* would return all package IDs beginning with PKG.

Chapter 1. What Is SCL? 1-13

1.4 Name Masking

Note: You cannot use more than one wildcard in a string. The statement
ADD ELEMENT U*PD* would result in an error.

The placeholder (%), which represents any one character in a string, can also
be used in one of two ways:
■ When coded as the last character in a string, Endevor returns all members
of the search field, beginning with the characters in the search string
preceding the placeholder, but which have no more characters than were
coded in the search string.
– If you coded the statement ADD ELEMENT UPD%, only those
elements with four-character-long names beginning with "UPD" (UPD1
or UPDA, for example) would be added.
– PKG% returns PKGS, PKGB, PKGC, and so on.
■ It is also possible to use the placeholder multiple times in a single search
string. The statement ADD ELEMENT U%PD% would return all elements
with five-character-long names that have U as the first character, and PD
third and fourth.

The wildcard and the placeholder can be used together, provided that the
wildcard appears only at the end of the search string and is used only once.
For example:
■ The statement ADD ELEMENT U%D*, which uses both the wildcard and
the placeholder, would add elements with names of any length that have
U as the first character, any one character as the second character, and D
as the third character.
■ P%G* returns PKGABCD, POGS, PIGGY, PPG1234NDVR, and so on.

1.4.2 Masking Improvements

Endevor's name masking capabilities support the use of both the asterisk (*) as
a wildcard character and the percent sign (%) as a placeholder character. You
can use the name masks on ISPF panels, in SCL, report syntax, and API
requests.

Use the asterisk to specify all names, or all names beginning with a particular
character string. Enter the asterisk as the last or only character in any of the
eligible fields, including element name, system name, subsystem name, type
name, and stage. Multiple asterisks are not allowed.

Use the percent sign as a substitute for a single character in a name. For
example, if you typed COPY% as the element name, Endevor would locate all
elements with 5-character names beginning with COPY. You can use multiple
instances of the % character. You can also use the % and * characters together.

Refer to the appropriate Endevor document for more specific information on

using name masks and wildcards in SCL, reports, ISPF panels, and API calls.

1-14 SCL Reference Guide

 1.5 Syntax Conventions

1.5 Syntax Conventions

Endevor uses the IBM standard for representing syntax. The following table
explains the syntax conventions:

Syntax Explanation
────────────────────────────────── Represents the beginning of a
syntax statement.
────────────────────────────────── Represents the end of a syntax
statement.
─────────────────────────────────── Represents the continuation of a
syntax statement to the following
line.
─────────────────────────────────── Represents the continuation of a
syntax statement from the
preceding line.

──KEYword─────────────────────── Represents a required keyword.

Only the uppercase letters are
necessary.

──variable────────────────────── Represents a required user-defined

variable.

──┬─────────┬─────────────────── Represents an optional keyword.

└─KEYword─┘ Optional keywords appear below
the syntax line. If coded, only the
uppercase letters are necessary.

──┬──────────┬────────────────── Represents an optional

└─variable─┘ user-defined variable. Optional
variables appear below the syntax
line.

──┬─KEYword ONE───┬───────────── Represents a choice of required,

├─KEYword TWO───┤ mutually exclusive keywords. You
└─KEYword THRee─┘ must choose one and only one
keyword.

──┬─variable one───┬──────────── Represents a choice of required,

├─variable two───┤ mutually exclusive, user-defined
└─variable three─┘ variables. You must choose one
and only one variable.

──┬───────────────┬───────────── Represents a choice of optional,

├─KEYword ONE───┤ mutually exclusive keywords.
├─KEYword TWO───┤ Optional keywords appear below
└─KEYword THRee─┘ the syntax line.

Chapter 1. What Is SCL? 1-15

1.5 Syntax Conventions

Syntax Explanation

──┬────────────────┬──────────── Represents a choice of optional,

├─variable one───┤ mutually exclusive, user-defined
├─variable two───┤ variables. Optional variables
└─variable three─┘ appear below the syntax line.

──¤──┬───────────────┬──¤─────── Represents a choice of optional

├─KEYword ONE───┤ keywords. The stars (¤) indicate
├─KEYword TWO───┤ that the keywords are not
└─KEYword THRee─┘ mutually exclusive. Code no
keyword more than once.

──¤──┬────────────────┬──¤────── Represents a choice of optional

├─variable one───┤ user-defined variables. The stars
├─variable two───┤ (¤) indicate that the variables are
└─variable three─┘ not mutually exclusive. Code no
variable more than once.

┌─KEYword ONE───┐ Represents a choice of required,

──┼─KEYword TWO───┼───────────── mutually exclusive keywords, one
└─KEYword THRee─┘ of which is the default. In this
example, KEYword ONE is the
default keyword because it
appears above the syntax line.

┌─variable one───┐ Represents a choice of required,

──┼─variable two───┼──────────── mutually exclusive, user-defined
└─variable three─┘ variables, one of which is the
default. In this example, variable
one is the default variable because
it appears above the syntax line.

┌─KEYword ONE───┐ Represents a choice of optional,

──┼───────────────┼───────────── mutually exclusive keywords, one
├─KEYword TWO───┤ of which is the default. In this
└─KEYword THRee─┘ example, KEYword ONE is the
default keyword because it
appears above the syntax line.

┌─variable one───┐ Represents a choice of optional,

──┼────────────────┼──────────── mutually exclusive, user-defined
├─variable two───┤ variables, one of which is the
└─variable three─┘ default. In this example, variable
one is the default variable because
it appears above the syntax line.

┌─,────────┐ Represents a required variable that

─variable─┴──)────────────
──(─── can be repeated. Separate each
occurrence with a comma and
enclose any and all variables in a
single set of parenthesis.

1-16 SCL Reference Guide

 1.5 Syntax Conventions

Syntax Explanation

──┬────────────────────┬──────── Represents an optional variable

│ ┌─,────────┐ │ that can be repeated. Separate
─variable─┴──)─┘
└─(─── each occurrence with a comma and
enclose any and all variables in a
single set of parenthesis.

──(variable)──────────────────── Represents a variable which must

be enclosed by parenthesis.

──'variable'──────────────────── Represents a variable which must

be enclosed by single quotes.

──"variable"──────────────────── Represents a variable which must

be enclosed by double quotes.

──┤ FRAGMENT REFERENCE ├──────── Represents a reference to a syntax

fragment. Fragments are listed on
the lines immediately following
the required period at the end of
each syntax statement.

FRAGMENT: Represents a syntax fragment.

├──KEYword──variable───────────────┤
────────────────────────.──────── Represents the period required at
the end of all syntax statements.

Chapter 1. What Is SCL? 1-17

1.5 Syntax Conventions

1.5.1 Sample Syntax Diagram

──ARChive ELEment──element-name──┬───────────────────────────┬───────
└─┬─THRough─┬──element-name─┘
└─THRu────┘
──FROm──ENVironment──env-name──SYStem──sys-name───────────────────────
──SUBsystem──subsys-name──TYPe──type-name─────────────────────────────
──┬─STAge──stage-id────────┬──TO──┬─FILe───┬──dd-name─────────────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘ └─DDName─┘
──┬───────────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────────────
└─WHEre──¤──┬──────────┬──¤─┘
├─┤ CCID ├─┤
└─┤ PRO ├──┘
──┬─────────────────────────────────────────┬──.─────────────────────
└─OPTion──¤──┬───────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─CCId──ccid────────────┤
├─COMment──comment──────┤
├─OVErride SIGNOut──────┤
└─BYPass ELEment DELete─┘
CCID:
┌─EQual─┐ ┌─,────┐
─ccid─┴──)───────────────┤
├──CCId──┬──────────────────┬──┼───────┼──(───
│ ┌─CURrent──┐ │ └─=─────┘
└─OF──┼─ALL──────┼─┘
└─RETrieve─┘
PRO:
┌─,──────────┐
─group name─┴──)───────────────────────┤
├──PROcessor GROup──┬─EQ─┬──(───
└─=──┘

1.5.2 Syntax Diagram Explanation

Syntax Explanation
ARChive ELEment The keyword ARChive ELEment appears on the
element-name main line, indicating that it is required. The
variable element-name, also on the main line, must
be coded.
THRough / THRu The keywords THRough and THRu appear below
element-name the main line, indicating that they are optional.
They are also mutually exclusive.
FROm ENVironment ... Each keyword and variable in this segment appear
TYPe type-name on the main line, indicating that they are required.
STAge stage-id / STAge The keywords STAge and STAge NUMber appear
NUMber stage-no on and below the main line, indicating that they
are required, mutually exclusive keywords.

1-18 SCL Reference Guide

 1.5 Syntax Conventions

Syntax Explanation
TO ... dd-name The keyword TO appears on the main line,
indicating that it is required. The keywords FILe
and DDName appear on and below the main line,
indicating that they are required, mutually
exclusive keywords. The variable dd-name also
appears on the main line, indicating that it is
required.
WHEre clause This clause appears below the main line, indicating
that it is optional. The keyword WHEre appears
on the main line of the clause, indicating that it is
required. CCID and PRO are syntax fragments that
appear below the main line, indicating that they
are optional. The stars (¤) indicate that they are
not mutually exclusive. For details on the CCID
and PRO fragments, see the bottom of this table.
OPTion clause This clause appears below the main line, indicating
that it is optional. The keyword OPTion appears
on the main line of the clause, indicating that it is
required. The keywords CCId, COMment,
OVErride SIGNOut, and BYPass ELEment DELete
all appear below the main line, indicating that they
are optional. The stars (¤) indicate that they are
not mutually exclusive.
CCID fragment The keyword CCId appears on the main line,
indicating that it is required. The OF clause
appears below the main line, indicating that it is
optional. If you code this clause, you must code
the keyword OF, as it appears on the main line of
the clause. CURrent, ALL, and RETrieve appear
above, on, and below the main line of the clause,
indicating that they are required, mutually
exclusive keywords. CURrent appears above the
main line, indicating that it is the default. If you
code the keyword OF, you must choose one and
only one of the keywords.
The keywords EQual and = appear above and
below the main line, indicating that they are
optional, mutually exclusive keywords. EQual
appears above the main line, indicating that it is
the default. You can include only one. The
variable ccid appears on the main line, indicating
that it is required. The arrow indicates that you
can repeat this variable, separating each instance
with a comma. Enclose any and all variables in a
single set of parenthesis.

Chapter 1. What Is SCL? 1-19

1.5 Syntax Conventions

Syntax Explanation
PRO fragment The keyword PROcessor GROup appears on the
main line, indicating that it is required. The
keywords EQual and = appear on and below the
main line, indicating that they are required,
mutually exclusive keywords. You must include
one. The variable group name appears on the main
line, indicating that it is required. The arrow
indicates that you can repeat this variable,
separating each instance with a comma. Enclose
any and all variables in a single set of parenthesis.

1.5.3 General Coding Information

In coding syntax, you must adhere to certain rules and guidelines regarding
valid characters, incompatible commands and clauses, and ending statements.
In addition, knowing how the SCL parser processes syntax will help you
resolve errors and undesired results. The following sections outline these rules
and guidelines.

1.5.3.1 Valid Characters

The following characters are allowed when coding syntax:

■ Uppercase letters
■ Lowercase letters
■ Numbers
■ National characters
■ Hyphen (-)
■ Underscore (_)

The following characters are allowed when coding syntax, but must be
enclosed in either single (') or double (") quotation marks:
■ Space
■ Tab
■ New line
■ Carriage return
■ Comma (,)
■ Period (.)
■ Equal sign (=)
■ Greater than sign (>)

1-20 SCL Reference Guide

 1.5 Syntax Conventions

■ Less then sign (<)

■ Parenthesis ( )
■ Single quotation marks
■ Double quotation marks

A string containing single quotation marks must be enclosed in double

quotation marks. A string containing double quotation marks must be
enclosed in single quotation marks.

To remove information from an existing field in the database, enclose a blank

space in single or double quotation marks. For example, the following
statement removes the default CCID for user TCS:
DEFINE USER TCS
DEFAULT CCID " ".
Note: The characters "*" and "%" are reserved for name masking. See the
section “Name Masking” earlier in this chapter for more information.

1.5.3.2 Incompatible Commands and Clauses

The following commands and clauses are mutually exclusive:

■ THRough and MEMber clauses within any action except LIST
■ Endevor location information (environment, system, subsystem, type, and
stage) and data set names (DSName)
■ File names (DDName) and data set names (DSName)
■ The stage id (STAge / STAge ID) and the stage number (STAge NUMber)
■ The SET TO Endevor location information and the SET TO MEMber clause

1.5.3.3 Ending A Statement

You must enter a period at the end of each statement. If no period is found,
you receive an error message and the job terminates.

1.5.3.4 &&ACTION Statement

If you use the &&ACTION statement, you must have previously coded a SET
ACTION statement. Refer to the descriptions of SET ACTION in the Set
Action section of Chapter 3, “Set, Clear, and EOF Statements”, and the
description of &&ACTION in the &&ACTION Statement section of Chapter 4,
“Element Action Statements”, for complete coding information.

Chapter 1. What Is SCL? 1-21

1.5 Syntax Conventions

1.5.3.5 SCL Parsing Information

■ The SCL parser does not look for information in columns 73-80 of the
input. Therefore, be sure that all relevant information is coded in columns
1-72.
■ The SCL parser does not catch duplicate clauses coded for an SCL request.
If you code the same clause twice, SCL uses the Boolean "AND" to
combine the clauses. If the result is invalid, you receive an error message.
■ If you enter an asterisk (*) in column 1, the remainder of the line is
considered a comment by the SCL parser and is ignored during
processing.
■ Any value found to the right of the period terminating the SCL statement
is considered a comment by the SCL parser and is ignored during
processing.

1.5.3.6 SCL Continuation Syntax Rules

SCL keyword parameters cannot span multiple lines; however, the parameter
values can span multiple lines. All SCL parameter values that span multiple
lines must be enclosed in single or double quotes. The syntax required to span
a parameter value must start with a single or double quote at the beginning of
the specification and a trailing single or double quote at the end of the value.
Spaces at the beginning or end of the spanned lines, must be surrounded by
non-blank characters in order to be included in the text string. Example:
ADD ELEMENT 'Spanned
ElementName' CCID 'CC
ID1'

This would result in an element value of "SpannedElementName" and a CCID

value of "CCID001".

1-22 SCL Reference Guide

 1.6 Syntax for Long File and Path Names

1.6 Syntax for Long File and Path Names

The following considerations apply to the Path clause for ADD, UPDATE,
COPY and RETRIEVE statements:
■ The PATH clause is mutually exclusive with the FILE or Data Set clauses.
■ The HFSFile clause is mutually exclusive with a Member clause.
■ The PATH name must begin with a “/” and be terminated with a “/” and
cannot be followed by the file name.
■ The HFS file name can be up to 255 bytes in length.
■ The PATH name can be up to 768 bytes in length.

1.6.1 HFSFile Syntax Rules

A filename can be up to 255 characters long. To be portable, the filename
should use only the characters in the POSIX portable filename character set:
■ Uppercase or lowercase A to Z
■ Numbers 0 to 9
■ Period (.)
■ Underscore (_)
■ Hyphen (-)

Do not include any nulls or slash characters in a filename.

Doublebyte characters are not supported in a filename and are treated as

singlebyte data. Using doublebyte characters in a filename may cause problems. For
instance, if you use a doublebyte character in which one of the bytes is a .
(dot) or / (slash), the file system treats this as a special delimiter in the
pathname.

The shells are case-sensitive, and distinguish characters as either uppercase or

lowercase. Therefore, FILE1 is not the same as file1.

A filename can include a suffix, or extension, that indicates its file type. An
extension consists of a period (.) and several characters. For example, files that
are C code could have the extension .c, as in the filename dbmod3.c. Having
groups of files with identical suffixes makes it easier to run commands against
many files at once.

Chapter 1. What Is SCL? 1-23

1.6 Syntax for Long File and Path Names

1.6.2 Path Name Syntax Rules

The path name value can be up to 768 characters long. It can contain only the
following characters:
■ Uppercase letters
■ Lowercase letters
■ Numbers
■ National characters
■ Slash (/)
■ Plus (+)
■ Hyphen (-)
■ Period (.)

1.6.3 Element Name Syntax Rules

The Element name can be up to 255 characters long. It can contain only the
following characters:
■ Uppercase letters
■ Lowercase letters
■ Numbers
■ National characters
■ Period (.)
■ Hyphen (-)
■ Underscore(_)

Element names name include a percent sign (%) in any column as a

placeholder character in most SCL. The final one or more characters may be
replaced in SCL and some panels with an asterisk (*) as a wild character for
selection purposes.

1-24 SCL Reference Guide

Chapter 2. About the SCL Language

The SCL language consists of SCL statements written in an easy-to-follow

format. The format must always include an action, an element, and one or
more required clauses. Optional clauses can be added to the request to provide
Endevor with additional information about the selected elements. This chapter
discusses general coding information as well as coding conventions unique to
Endevor (and SCL).

Chapter 2. About the SCL Language 2-1

2.1 SCL Statements

2.1 SCL Statements

There are several types of SCL statements:
■ Set statements
■ Clear statements
■ EOF (EOJ) statement
■ Element action statements (also referred to as action statements)
■ Environment definition statements
■ Package action statements

A brief overview of each type of statement follows.

Note: SET and CLEAR statements apply only to element action statements.

2.1.1 Set Statements

SET statements are global default statements that establish values for
subsequent element action statements. A SET statement establishes applicable
keyword values (for example, FROM and TO) for specific items that may be
omitted from selected action statements. If a certain parameter is used (or
required) but not coded in a particular action statement, Endevor looks for that
information in a corresponding SET statement.

SET statements also allow consistency across several actions. If you want to
use a particular option (such as CCID or comments) for several actions or
perform actions against those elements in a specific location (TO or FROM),
code the appropriate SET statement. The data you enter is applied to every
subsequent action. SET statements are in effect until another SET statement or
a CLEAR statement is encountered, or processing ends.

You can define the following SET statements:

■ SET ACTION
■ SET BUILD
■ SET FROM
■ SET OPTIONS
■ SET STOPRC
■ SET TO
■ SET WHERE

2-2 SCL Reference Guide

 2.1 SCL Statements

2.1.2 Clear Statements

A CLEAR statements clear the information designated by a related SET
statement. When you are working with a series of element actions and need to
remove information established in a SET statement, code a parallel CLEAR
statement. The CLEAR statement remains in effect until you enter another
related SET statement or until processing ends.

CLEAR statements only apply to SET statements. Similar information entered

in an element action statement is not affected by a CLEAR statement.

You can use the following CLEAR statements:

■ CLEAR BUILD
■ CLEAR FROM
■ CLEAR OPTIONS
■ CLEAR TO
■ CLEAR WHERE

2.1.3 EOF (EOJ) Statement

The EOF or EOJ (End of File or End of Job) statement instructs Endevor to
stop parsing the SCL syntax at a particular point. Using this statement
eliminates the need to manually delete any statements you do not want
Endevor to perform.

You can enter either EOF or EOJ. Use the value to which you are most
accustomed.

2.1.4 Element Action Statements

Element action statements operate against an element or a group of elements.
The element actions consist of the following:
■ ADD—Puts a member under Endevor control from an external data set.
■ ARCHIVE—Writes the current version of an element to a sequential file (or
archive data set).
■ COPY—Copies an element from an archive data set to a data set external
to Endevor.
■ DELETE—Erases base and delta forms of an element and removes related
information from a master control file or component list.
■ GENERATE—Creates an executable form of an element.
■ LIST—Creates a list of elements or members that meet specific selection
criteria.
■ MOVE—Moves elements between stages, within or across environments.

Chapter 2. About the SCL Language 2-3

2.1 SCL Statements

■ PRINT—Prints element or member information.

■ RESTORE—Restores elements to Endevor from an archive data set.
■ RETRIEVE—Copies elements from Endevor to an external data set.
■ SIGNIN—Removes the user signout associated with an element.
■ TRANSFER—Transfers an element from one location to another: Endevor
to Endevor, Endevor to an archive data set, or archive data set to Endevor.
■ UPDATE—Updates an element from an external data set.

2.1.5 Environment Definition Statements

Environment definition statements provide the ability to manage environment
definitions for all inventory structures using SCL. Environment definition
statements allow you to create, update, and delete inventory definitions. The
statements manage the following environment definitions:
■ Approver group
■ Approver group relationships
■ Element types
■ Package shipment data set mapping rules
■ Package shipment destination
■ Processor groups
■ Processor symbols
■ Subsystem
■ Systems
■ Type sequence

2.1.6 Package Action Statements

Package action statements provide the ability to perform package processing in
batch using SCL. Package action statements consist of the following:
■ APPROVE PACKAGE—Approves a package for execution.
■ ARCHIVE PACKAGE—Copies the package definitions to an external data
set.
■ BACKIN PACKAGE—Backs a package in, reversing the BACKOUT
PACKAGE action.
■ BACKOUT PACKAGE—Backouts the change package to restore the
executable and output modules to the state they were in prior execution.
■ CAST PACKAGE—Casts a package, which freezes the data and prevents
further changes at that time.

2-4 SCL Reference Guide

 2.1 SCL Statements

■ COMMIT PACKAGE—Commits a package removing all backout/backin

data.
■ DEFINE PACKAGE—Creates a new or updates an existing package.
■ DELETE PACKAGE—Deletes an entire package from Endevor.
■ DENY PACKAGE—Denies execution of a package.
■ EXECUTE PACKAGE—Executes a package.
■ EXPORT PACKAGE—Writes the SCL associated with a package to an
external data set.
■ RESET PACKAGE—Resets a package back to a status of In-edit.
■ SUBMIT PACKAGE—Submits a JCL job stream to execute one or more
packages.

For information on package processing, see the Packages Guide.

Chapter 2. About the SCL Language 2-5

2.2 Statements and Clauses

2.2 Statements and Clauses

2.2.1 Overview
References are made to statements and clauses throughout this manual. For SCL
purposes, these terms are defined as follows:
■ A statement begins with an action (for example, ADD or DEFINE) and ends
with a period (.). A statement consists of one or more clauses, depending
on how you code the SCL syntax.
■ A clause is an individual line of information within each statement (for
example, FROM ENVIRONMENT TEST or WHERE CCID EQ 'FIX01').
Any number of clauses may be contained within one statement.

Note the following example:

1.MOVE ELEMENTS COPY1

2. FROM ENVIRONMENT DEMO

3. SYSTEM FINANCE

4. SUBSYSTEM ACCTPAY

5. TYPE COBOL

6. WHERE CCID EQ FIX'

7. OPTIONS WITH HISTORY.

Lines 1-7 form a statement. Line 1 begins with an action (MOVE) and line 7
ends with a period.

Lines 2-5 constitute a single clause (a FROM clause). Lines 6 and 7 are
individual clauses. Each of these clauses provide information essential to the
statement.

2.2.2 Coding Order

You must enter the action clause first. You can enter the remaining clauses in
any order. Within each clause, however, you must code the sub-clauses in the
order in which they are shown in the syntax.

In the example above, you might code the FROM clause last and the OPTIONS
clause immediately after the MOVE ELEMENTS clause. Within the FROM
clause, though, you must enter ENVIRONMENT first, followed by SYSTEM,
followed by SUBSYSTEM, followed by TYPE.

2-6 SCL Reference Guide

 2.3 Element Action Examples

2.3 Element Action Examples

The following examples demonstrate different ways you can use the element
action SCL. The four examples all produce the same result; the only difference
is in the number and types of statements and clauses used.
Note: The examples shown here apply to the general structure of
environment definition and package action syntax. The major difference, and
the reason examples are shown for the element actions, is the use of SET and
CLEAR statements.

2.3.1 Example 1
Example 1 illustrates long-hand SCL. The TRANSFER, FROM, TO, WHERE,
and OPTIONS statements are repeated for each element.

TRANSFER ELEMENT COPY1

FROM ENVIRONMENT DEMO
SYSTEM FINANCE
SUBSYSTEM ACCTPAY
TYPE COPYBOOK
STAGE NUMBER2
TO ENVIRONMENT PROD
STAGE NUMBER1
WHERE CCID EQ 'FIX1'
OPTIONS COMMENT 'FIX BUG'.

TRANSFER ELEMENT COPY2

FROM ENVIRONMENT DEMO
SYSTEM FINANCE
SUBSYSTEM ACCTPAY
TYPE COPYBOOK
STAGE NUMBER2
TO ENVIRONMENT PROD
STAGE NUMBER1
WHERE CCID EQ 'FIX1'
OPTIONS COMMENT 'FIX BUG'.

TRANSFER ELEMENT PROG2

FROM ENVIRONMENT DEMO
SYSTEM FINANCE
SUBSYSTEM ACCTPAY
TYPE COBOL
STAGE NUMBER2
TO ENVIRONMENT PROD
STAGE NUMBER1
WHERE CCID EQ 'FIX1'
OPTIONS COMMENT 'FIX BUG'.

Chapter 2. About the SCL Language 2-7

2.3 Element Action Examples

Note that the information coded in the FROM clauses (except in the last FROM
clause where TYPE is different), TO clause, WHERE clause, and OPTIONS
clause is the same. Although there is nothing wrong with coding every line of
a request, you may find it time-consuming when you need to code several
requests. Therefore, it is important to consider several "shortcuts" when
coding the element action syntax. Examples 2 - 4 on the following pages
demonstrate these shortcuts.

2.3.2 Example 2
Example 2 illustrates the concept of global settings, using SET statements to
assign the location (FROM and TO) information, as well as common WHERE
and OPTIONS data.

SET FROM ENVIRONMENT DEMO

STAGE NUMBER2.

SET TO ENVIRONMENT PROD

STAGE NUMBER 1.

SET WHERE CCID EQ 'FIX1'.

SET OPTIONS COMMENT 'FIX BUG'.

TRANSFER ELEMENT COPY1.

TRANSFER ELEMENT COPY2.

SET FROM TYPE COBOL.

TRANSFER ELEMENT PROG1.

In this example, all SET statements coded at the beginning of the syntax are
applied to the first two TRANSFER action requests. Because the type is
different for the third TRANSFER action request, however, a new SET FROM
statement has been entered—containing only the different information.

This new type will be applied to the subsequent TRANSFER request. But, all
other previously-coded information will be applied also. Remember: the data
entered in a SET statement remains in effect until a new, like SET statement (or
a CLEAR statement) is encountered.

2-8 SCL Reference Guide

 2.3 Element Action Examples

2.3.3 Example 3
Example 3 illustrates a combination of global and local settings.

SET FROM ENVIRONMENT DEMO

SYSTEM FINANCE
SUBSYSTEM ACCTPAY
TYPE COPYBOOK
STAGE NUMBER2.

SET TO ENVIRONMENT PROD

STAGE NUMBER1.

SET WHERE CCID EQ'FIX1'.

SET OPTIONS COMMENT 'FIX BUG'.

TRANSFER ELEMENT COPY1.

TRANSFER ELEMENT COPY2.

TRANSFER ELEMENT PROG1

FROM TYPE COBOL.

In this example, the SET statements are applied to all three TRANSFER action
requests, with the exception of type in the third request.

Remember: a value entered locally overrides a like value in a SET statement.

Therefore, coding the clause FROM TYPE COBOL is all that is required in the
third request. The remaining location, WHERE, and OPTIONS information
defaults to the entries coded in the previous SET statements.

2.3.4 Example 4
Example 4 illustrates the use of the name mask. The name mask indicates that
all elements beginning with the indicated letters should be considered for an
action.

TRANSFER ELEMENT ABC

FROM ENVIRONMENT DEMO
SYSTEM FINANCE
SUBSYSTEM ACCTPAY
TYPE 
STAGE NUMBER2
TO ENVIRONMENT PROD
STAGE NUMBER 1
WHERE CCID EQ 'FIX1'
OPTIONS COMMENT 'FIX BUG'.

Chapter 2. About the SCL Language 2-9

2.3 Element Action Examples

In this example, use of the asterisk alone in the TRANSFER ELEMENTS clause
indicates that all elements—as long as the remaining selection criteria is
met—should be selected for the TRANSFER.

Use of the name mask in the TYPE clause indicates that any type will be
acceptable in the TRANSFER action.

Using the name mask with the element name and the type eliminates the need
to set and change SET statements (as was done in examples 2 and 3). Example
4 instructs Endevor to look for all elements, no matter what type, from the
Endevor location indicated (in the environment, system, subsystem, and stage
number clauses), associated with a CCID of FIX01. And, the comment FIX
BUG will be applied to all elements meeting that selection criteria.

2-10 SCL Reference Guide

Chapter 3. Set, Clear, and EOF Statements

This chapter illustrates the syntax for SET, CLEAR, and EOF statements, and
explains the coding rules specific to each statement. SET, CLEAR, and EOF
statements apply only to element action statements (described in the next
chapter). See the About the SCL Language section for examples of syntax using
SET and CLEAR statements.

Chapter 3. Set, Clear, and EOF Statements 3-1

3.1 Set Statements

3.1 Set Statements

A SET statement sets up applicable keyword values (for example, FROM, TO)
for specific items that are omitted from subsequent element action statements.
If a parameter is required and not specifically coded with an element action
statement, a corresponding SET statement must precede that action statement.
The SET statement can be reissued to change the default value of a particular
keyword any number of times within an SCL stream.

You can remove a SET statement by using a CLEAR statement for the same
keyword. Be sure to issue the CLEAR statement after the related element
action statement; otherwise, the SET statement is canceled and you may
receive an error message. (CLEAR statements are explained later in this
chapter.)
Note: The SET statement establishes default values; it is never executed.
Therefore, no element processing is involved.

3.1.1 Conventions
The following conventions apply to all SET statements.
■ SET statements are applied globally to all element action statements
following the entry. Each SET statement remains in effect until one of the
following conditions occurs:
– Endevor encounters another, like SET statement, which overrides the
existing SET statement.
– Endevor encounters a CLEAR statement for that particular SET
statement. For example, a CLEAR WHERE statement would cancel a
SET WHERE statement.
– Processing for this job ends; that is, an EOF or EOJ statement is
encountered.
■ SET statements, and the information contained in each, apply only
where similar data appears on a "local" level; that is, within a specific
action statement. For example, if one of the actions following a SET TO
statement does not require any TO data, the SET TO statement is ignored.
■ Information in the SET statement will be replaced by any overriding SET
values coded locally. That is, if the element action syntax contains the
variable specified in the SET statement, the like information in the SET
statement is ignored. For example, if you enter system and subsystem
names in the FROM clause for a COPY action, Endevor uses those names
rather than the names coded in the related SET FROM statement.

3-2 SCL Reference Guide

 3.1 Set Statements

■ If the information is not available in the element action statement, the

like information in the SET statement is applied to the syntax. For
example, if you do not code a system and subsystem in the FROM clause
for the COPY action, the information will be taken from the related SET
FROM statement.

3.1.2 Set Action

The SET ACTION statement is used in conjunction with the &&ACTION
statement (described in Chapter 4,
"Element Action Statements"). When you use this statement, Endevor sets the
action in all following &&ACTION statements to the action indicated. The
specified action applies until the system encounters another SET ACTION or a
CLEAR ACTION statement, or when processing is terminated.

3.1.3 Syntax

──SET ACTion──┬─ADD──────┬──.───────────────────────────────────────
├─ARChive──┤
├─COPy─────┤
├─DELete───┤
├─GENerate─┤
├─LISt─────┤
├─MOVe─────┤
├─PRInt────┤
├─REStore──┤
├─RETrieve─┤
├─SIGnin───┤
├─TRAnsfer─┤
└─UPDate───┘

3.1.3.1 Syntax Rules

SET ACTION

When you use this statement, Endevor sets the action in all following
&&ACTION statements to the action you indicate in this statement. The action
specifed applies until the system encounters another SET ACTION or a CLEAR
ACTION statement, or when processing is terminated.

Although you can enter more than one SET ACTION statement in your syntax,
only the action indicated in the SET ACTION statement immediately preceding
the &&ACTION statement is performed.

Chapter 3. Set, Clear, and EOF Statements 3-3

3.1 Set Statements

You can code the following actions in the SET ACTION statement:

ADD—adds an element to the environment's entry stage in Endevor.

ARCHIVE—writes the current version of an element to a sequential file (or

archive data set).

COPY—copies an element from an archive data set to a data set external to

Endevor.

DELETE—removes an element from either Stage 1 or Stage 2.

GENERATE—executes the generate processor for an element(s).

LIST—lists elements from the Master Control File or an archive data set, or
lists members from a library.

MOVE—moves elements from one map location to another.

PRINT—prints either element or member information.

RESTORE—restores an element from an archive data set to Endevor.

RETRIEVE—copies an element from either stage to a user data set.

SIGNIN—removes the user signout associated with an element.

TRANSFER—transfers an element from one location to another: Endevor to

Endevor, Endevor to an archive data set, or an archive data set/unload tape to
Endevor.

UPDATE—updates an element in the environment's entry stage only.

3.1.4 Set Build

The SET BUILD statement applies only to the BUILD statement in the LIST
action (see the explanation of LIST earlier in this chapter). This statement has
three parts:
■ ACTION determines the action that is placed in the list of action cards
generated by the LIST request.
■ LEVEL determines whether the element's current version and level is
listed.
■ WITH COMPONENTS determines whether a component list should be
included in the listing for the specified element.
Note: The WITH COMPONENTS option pertains to the Endevor ACM
product only. If you are a Endevor ACM user, refer to the Automated
Configuration Option Guide for additional information.

3-4 SCL Reference Guide

 3.1 Set Statements

3.1.5 Syntax

──SET BUIld──¤──┬──────────────────────┬──¤──.──────────────────────
├─ACTion──┬─&&Action─┬─┤
│ ├─ADD──────┤ │
│ ├─ARChive──┤ │
│ ├─COPy─────┤ │
│ ├─DELete───┤ │
│ ├─GENerate─┤ │
│ ├─LISt─────┤ │
│ ├─MOVe─────┤ │
│ ├─PRInt────┤ │
│ ├─REStore──┤ │
│ ├─RETrieve─┤ │
│ ├─SIGnin───┤ │
│ ├─TRAnsfer─┤ │
│ └─UPDate───┘ │
├─LEVel──┬─CURrent─┬───┤
│ ├─NONe────┤ │
│ └─ACTUal──┘ │
└─WITh COMponent───────┘

3.1.5.1 Syntax Rules

SET BUILD ACTION

SET BUILD ACTION applies to any element, whether from Endevor or an

external file (that is, a sequential file or a library). The action coded stays in
effect until Endevor encounters the next SET BUILD ACTION or a CLEAR
BUILD ACTION statement, or processing ends.

The following can be coded in the SET BUILD ACTION statement:

&&ACTION— indicates that an action will be designated for this element at a

later time.

ADD—adds an element to the environment's entry stage in Endevor.

ARCHIVE—writes the current version of an element to a sequential file (or

archive data set).

COPY—copies an element from an archive data set to a data set external to

Endevor.

DELETE—removes an element from either Stage 1 or Stage 2 in Endevor.

GENERATE—executes the generate processor for the current level of the

element.

Chapter 3. Set, Clear, and EOF Statements 3-5

3.1 Set Statements

LIST—lists elements from the Master Control File or an archive data set, or
lists members from a library.

MOVE—moves elements from one map location to another.

PRINT—prints either information relating to an element (if executed against

Endevor) or the source of the selected members (if executed against an external
library).

RESTORE—restores an element from an archive data set back to Endevor.

RETRIEVE—copies an element from either stage to a user data set (a

sequential file, library, or PDS).

SIGNIN—removes the user signout associated with either a Stage 1 or a Stage

2 element.

TRANSFER—transfers an element from one location to another: Endevor to

Endevor, Endevor to an archive data set, or archive data set/unload tape to
Endevor.

UPDATE—updates an element in the environment's entry stage only.

SET BUILD LEVEL

SET BUILD LEVEL applies only to elements in Endevor (as opposed to those
elements currently in external files). The level coded stays in effect until
Endevor encounters the next SET BUILD LEVEL or a CLEAR BUILD LEVEL
statement, or processing ends.

The following options apply to the SET BUILD LEVEL statement.

■ CURRENT—If the WHERE COMPONENTS EQUAL clause has not been
coded for the action, or no component list exists (that is, the Endevor ACM
product is not installed), the system defaults to the current level of the
element.
■ NONE—The current version and level of the element are not to be listed
on the action cards generated by the LIST request.
■ ACTUAL—The actual level of each component as recorded in the
component list, rather than the current level of the element as recorded in
the Master Control File, should be used to build the element action
statement.
If the WHERE COMPONENTS EQUAL clause has not been coded, or no
component list exists, (that is, Endevor ACM product is not installed), the
current level of the element is listed.

3-6 SCL Reference Guide

 3.1 Set Statements

SET BUILD WITH COMPONENTS

SET BUILD WITH COMPONENTS indicates that action cards should be

generated for every input component that is associated with the specified
element. If you enter this clause, you must also have a WHERE
COMPONENTS EQUAL clause coded, either in the LIST action or as part of a
SET WHERE statement. SET BUILD WITH COMPONENTS is in effect until
the system encounters a CLEAR BUILD WITH COMPONENTS statement or
processing ends.
Note: This option pertains to the Endevor ACM product only. If you are a
Endevor ACM user, refer to the Automated Configuration Option Guide for
additional information.

3.1.6 Set From

The SET FROM statement applies to each element action that uses—but does
not contain all or part of—a FROM clause, and remains in effect until the
system encounters another SET FROM statement or a CLEAR FROM
statement, or when processing ends.

The exact information used from the SET FROM statement depends on both
the specific action and the data you have entered in that action statement.
What you enter in the action's FROM clause overrides that particular entry in
the SET FROM statement. For example, you code all Endevor location
information (environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage number or stage
ID) in a SET FROM statement. Then, when coding a RETRIEVE statement,
you enter a different type. Endevor determines the FROM location by
applying all SET FROM information except for the type, which is taken from
the RETRIEVE statement.

Three types of information can be provided by the SET FROM statement,

depending on the action you enter.
■ Some actions require only Endevor location information.
■ Some actions require only a file name (DDname) or data set name.
■ Some actions require both a file name (DDname) and Endevor location
information.

Each type of information is explained in the following pages. See the

individual element action descriptions to determine the requirements for each
action.

Chapter 3. Set, Clear, and EOF Statements 3-7

3.1 Set Statements

3.1.7 Syntax

──SET FROm──┬─SYSOut────────────────────────────────────────┬──.────
├─C1Print───────────────────────────────────────┤
├─┬─FILe───┬──dd-name───────────────────────────┤
│ └─DDName─┘ │
├─DSName──dataset-name──┬─────────────────────┬─┤
│ └─MEMber──member-name─┘ │
└─┤ LOCATION ├──────────────────────────────────┘
LOCATION:
├──ENVironment──env-name──SYStem──sys-name──SUBsystem──subsys-name─────
──TYPe──type-name──┬────────────────────────┬─────────────────────────┤
├─STAge──stage-id────────┤
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘

3.1.7.1 Syntax Rules

SET FROM ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM sys-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

This clause identifies the Endevor location information. Elements in Endevor

are identified by environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage (ID or
number). Several actions require all or part of this information in the FROM
clause. Whatever data you do not code in the syntax of the specific action
must be entered in the SET FROM statement.

Listed below is a brief definition of each identifier.

■ ENVIRONMENT—The functional areas within an organization.
Environment names can be up to 8 characters in length.
■ SYSTEM—The applications at a site. System names can be up to 8
characters in length.
■ SUBSYSTEM—Specific applications within a system. Subsystem names can
be up to 8 characters in length.
■ TYPE—Categories of source code. Type names can be up to 8 characters
in length.
■ STAGE—A stage in a software life cycle. You refer to stages in SCL
statements by one of the following:
– STAGE ID—A 1-character, alphanumeric stage identifier.
– STAGE NUMBER—Either 1 or 2. Indicates the position of a stage
within the current environment.

3-8 SCL Reference Guide

 3.1 Set Statements

You can use a name mask with the system, subsystem, and type names, as
well as with both stage indicators.

Depending on the particular action, you may have a choice when entering a
stage indicator (that is, ID or number). In this situation, the indicator is
required, but you decide whether to enter an ID or stage number. If only one
type of stage indicator appears in the SCL syntax, you must enter that specific
value.
SET FROM FILE (DDNAME) dd-name
SITE site-id
ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM sys-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no
DSNAME dataset-name

Often, an action requires that only a file name or data set name be entered to
indicate a FROM location. Follow these rules when specifying this clause:
■ When you enter a file name (DDname), be sure that the appropriate JCL is
coded for the entry.
■ When you enter a data set name, be sure to enclose the name in quotes
(single or double) if there is a period in the name; for example, the data set
TEST.LIB must be coded as 'TEST.LIB'.
Note: You cannot code both a file name (or DDname) and a data set name. If
you do, you receive an error message. You also receive an error message if
you code Endevor location information along with a data set name.

Occasionally, you are required to enter both a file name and Endevor location
information for the element. Review the conventions listed above for coding
information about each of these entries.

Note also that:

■ With these particular actions, you can optionally specify a particular site,
to further qualify the FROM location of the element. Site indicates the
location at which Endevor is installed. The site ID is one character in
length.
■ You must enter the file name (DDname) first. If you enter Endevor
location information before the file name, that data is ignored and you
receive an error message.

Chapter 3. Set, Clear, and EOF Statements 3-9

3.1 Set Statements

3.1.8 Set Options

The SET OPTIONS statement tells Endevor to apply one or a series of options
to all subsequent actions, until the next SET OPTIONS statement or a CLEAR
OPTIONS statement is encountered, or processing ends. The exact options
used depend on the action specified and the data you have entered in that
element action statement:
■ Those options that do not apply to the action are ignored.
■ If you enter a particular option in the element action statement and have
coded that option in the SET OPTIONS statement, the entry in the action
statement overrides the SET OPTIONS selection.

3.1.9 Syntax

──SET OPTion──¤──┬─────────────────────────────────────────┬──¤──.──────────
├─CCId──ccid──────────────────────────────┤
├─COMment──comment────────────────────────┤
├─COPyback────────────────────────────────┤
├─DELete input source─────────────────────┤
├─DETail report───────────────────────────┤
├─EXPand includes─────────────────────────┤
├─IGNore generate failed──────────────────┤
├─JUMp────────────────────────────────────┤
├─NEW VERsion──version────────────────────┤
├─NOCc────────────────────────────────────┤
├─NO SIGNOut──────────────────────────────┤
├─OVErride SIGNOut────────────────────────┤
├─ONLy COMPonent──────────────────────────┤
├─REPlace MEMber──────────────────────────┤
├─SHOw TEXt──┬──────────────┬─────────────┤
│ └─PLUs n lines─┘ │
├─SYNchronize─────────────────────────────┤
├─UPDate if present───────────────────────┤
├─WITh HIStory────────────────────────────┤
├─┬─BYPass DELete PROcessor─┬─────────────┤
│ └─BYPass ELEment DELete───┘ │
├─┬─BYPass GENerate PROcessor───────────┬─┤
│ └─PROcessor GROup──┬─EQ─┬──group name─┘ │
│ └─=──┘ │
├─COMPonent──┬─BROwse──┬──────────────────┤
│ ├─CHAnge──┤ │
│ ├─HIStory─┤ │
│ ├─SUMmary─┤ │
│ └─MASter──┘ │
├─┬─NOSearch─┬────────────────────────────┤
│ └─SEArch───┘ │
└─┬─RETain SIGNOut─────┬──────────────────┘
├─SIGNin─────────────┤
└─SIGNOut TO──userid─┘

3-10 SCL Reference Guide

 3.1 Set Statements

3.1.9.1 Syntax Rules

SET OPTIONS

The SET OPTIONS statement tells Endevor to apply one or a series of options
to all subsequent actions, until the next SET OPTIONS statement or a CLEAR
OPTIONS statement is encountered, or processing ends. The exact options
used depend on the action you specify and the data you enter in that element
action statement:

You can code the following options in the SET OPTIONS statement:

BYPASS DELETE PROCESSOR—tells Endevor not to execute the delete

processor for this element.

BYPASS ELEMENT DELETE—tells Endevor not to automatically delete the

element in the FROM location after performing the action.

BYPASS GENERATE PROCESSOR—indicates that Endevor should not

execute the generate processor for this element.

CCID ccid—specifies a 1- to 12-character CCID.

COMMENT comment—specifies a 1- to 40-character comment.

COMPONENT—tells Endevor to print component list information for the

element specified.

BROWSE—tells Endevor to print all statements in the specified level of the

element, indicating the level at which each statement was inserted.

CHANGES—tells Endevor to print all inserts and deletes made to the element
at the level specified.

HISTORY—tells Endevor to print all statements in all levels of the element.

SUMMARY—tells Endevor to print one line of summary information for each

level.

MASTER—tells Endevor to print Master Control File information for the

element.

COPYBACK—tells Endevor to copy the current level of an element back to the

target stage for a GENERATE action, prior to generating the element.

DELETE INPUT SOURCE—tells Endevor to delete a member from the library

in which it originated.

Chapter 3. Set, Clear, and EOF Statements 3-11

3.1 Set Statements

DETAIL REPORT—tells Endevor to provide detail information in the

Execution Report. Endevor, by default, lists only those elements matching the
selection criteria you specify. If you select the DETAIL REPORT option, every
element searched is listed in the report—whether or not a match is found.

EXPAND INCLUDES—tells Endevor to expand INCLUDE statements when

the element is copied to a source output library.

IGNORE GENERATE FAILED—enables processing to continue when the

generate and/or move processors associated with a particular element have
failed.

JUMP—tells Endevor to notify the user if an element exists at an intermediate,

non-map stage between the source and target stages of a MOVE.

NEW VERSION—allows you to assign a different version number to the TO

location element. Simply enter the number (1-99 inclusive, leading zeros
optional) that you want to use.

NOCC—tells Endevor not to print a header on each page of output.

NOSEARCH—tells Endevor to search only in the current environment.

NO SIGNOUT—tells Endevor to retrieve an element without signing it out.

OVERRIDE SIGNOUT—enables you to access an element that has been

signed out to a user ID other than your own. Use OVERRIDE SIGNOUT with
caution to avoid regressing changes made by another user.

ONLY COMPONENTS—allows you to delete the component lists for an

element, but not the element itself.

PROCESSOR GROUP EQUAL/EQ) /= group name—specifies a 1- to

8-character processor group name.

REPLACE MEMBER—tells Endevor to replace an existing member in a target

library with the element specified in the element action statement.

RETAIN SIGNOUT—tells Endevor to retain the current signout for an

element.

SEARCH—tells Endevor to search for elements along the map.

SHOW TEXT PLUS n LINES—tells Endevor to print the line of source code
that contains a specified text string, plus a designated number of lines of code
before and after the text string.

SIGNIN—allows you to override a RETAIN SIGNOUT or SIGNOUT TO

clause in a SET OPTIONS statement.

3-12 SCL Reference Guide

 3.1 Set Statements

SIGNOUT TO—allows you to sign out or reassign an element to another user.

SYNCHRONIZE—tells Endevor to create a sync level at a target location

when the base level of an element at a source location is not the same as the
current level of that element at the target location.

UPDATE IF PRESENT—automatically changes an ADD action to an UPDATE

action if an element currently exists in the entry stage. This option essentially
allows you to add the element to the entry stage.

WITH HISTORY—tells Endevor to preserve change history for an element

when transferring or moving that element.

3.1.9.2 Actions and the Set Options Statement

The following table indicates the action(s) for which you can code each option,
and provides notes on the use of each option.

Option Actions Notes

BYPASS DELETE TRANSFER Cannot be used with BYPASS ELEMENT DELETE.
PROCESSOR
Cannot be used for transfer from external data set to
Endevor.
BYPASS ELEMENT ARCHIVE, Cannot be used with BYPASS DELETE PROCESSOR.
DELETE MOVE,
Cannot be used for transfer from external data set to
TRANSFER
Endevor.
BYPASS ADD, Cannot be used for transfer from Endevor to external data
GENERATE RESTORE, set.
PROCESSOR TRANSFER,
Cannot be used with PROCESSOR GROUP EQUAL.
UPDATE
CCID ccid ADD,
ARCHIVE,
DELETE,
GENERATE,
MOVE,
RESTORE,
RETRIEVE,
TRANSFER,
UPDATE
COMMENT Same as for
comment CCID
[COMPONENT] PRINT ACM required to use [COMPONENT]. One clause
BROWSE (BROWSE, CHANGE, HISTORY, SUMMARY, or
MASTER) allowed per statement.

Chapter 3. Set, Clear, and EOF Statements 3-13

3.1 Set Statements

Option Actions Notes

[COMPONENT] PRINT Same as [COMPONENT] BROWSE.
CHANGES
[COMPONENT] PRINT Same as [COMPONENT] BROWSE.
HISTORY
[COMPONENT] PRINT Same as [COMPONENT] BROWSE.
SUMMARY
[COMPONENT] PRINT Same as [COMPONENT] BROWSE.
MASTER
COPYBACK GENERATE
DELETE INPUT ADD, UPDATE
SOURCE
DETAIL REPORT LIST
EXPAND RETRIEVE
INCLUDES
IGNORE TRANSFER Cannot be used for transfer from external data set to
GENERATE Endevor.
FAILED
JUMP MOVE
NEW VERSION ADD, Cannot be used for transfer from Endevor to external data
version number RESTORE, set.
TRANSFER
NOCC PRINT
NOSEARCH GENERATE, Cannot be used with SEARCH.
LIST, PRINT,
RETRIEVE
NO SIGNOUT RETRIEVE
OVERRIDE ADD,
SIGNOUT ARCHIVE,
DELETE,
GENERATE,
RETRIEVE,
SIGNIN,
TRANSFER,
UPDATE
ONLY DELETE
COMPONENTS

3-14 SCL Reference Guide

 3.1 Set Statements

Option Actions Notes

PROCESSOR ADD, Cannot be used with BYPASS GENERATE PROCESSOR.
GROUP EQUAL GENERATE,
GROUP NAME RESTORE,
TRANSFER,
UPDATE
REPLACE MEMBER COPY, LIST,
RETRIEVE
RETAIN SIGNOUT MOVE, Cannot be used with SIGNIN or SIGNOUT TO.
TRANSFER
SEARCH GENERATE, Cannot be used with NOSEARCH.
LIST, PRINT,
RETRIEVE
SHOW TEXT [PLUS LIST
n LINES]
SIGNIN MOVE, Cannot be used with RETAIN SIGNOUT or SIGNOUT TO
TRANSFER
SIGNOUT TO MOVE, Cannot be used with SIGNIN or RETAIN SIGNOUT
USERID SIGNIN,
TRANSFER
SYNCHRONIZE MOVE,
TRANSFER
UPDATE IF ADD
PRESENT
WITH HISTORY MOVE,
TRANSFER

3.1.10 Set STOPRC

The SET STOPRC statement provides a control for processing during batch
execution. Prior to executing the job stream, Endevor checks for the SET
STOPRC statement. If more than one statement has been coded, the return
code entered in the last statement found is used.

During execution, Endevor checks the Endevor return code (NDVR RC) for the
current action before proceeding with the next action.

Chapter 3. Set, Clear, and EOF Statements 3-15

3.1 Set Statements

3.1.11 Syntax

──SET STOprc──return code──.────────────────────────────────────────

3.1.11.1 Syntax Rules

SET STOPRC return-code

The STOPRC statement identifies your highest acceptable return code for the
current action processing. You can specify a return code value in the range of
4 through 99. If the Endevor return code is equal to or exceeds the return
code entered in the STOPRC statement, Endevor stops processing and the
remaining actions are not executed.

If you do not enter a STOPRC value, Endevor operates as if a STOPRC of 16

has been coded.

3.1.12 Set To
The SET TO statement applies to each element action that uses—but does not
contain all or part of—a TO clause, and remains in effect until Endevor
encounters another SET TO statement or a CLEAR TO statement, or when
processing ends.

The exact information used from the SET TO statement depends on both the
specific action and the data you have entered in that element action statement.
What you enter in the action's TO clause overrides that particular entry in the
SET TO statement. For example, you code all Endevor location information
(environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage ID or stage number) in the
SET TO statement. Then, when coding an UPDATE statement, you enter a
different subsystem. Endevor determines the TO location by applying all SET
TO information except for subsystem, which is taken from the UPDATE
statement.

The SET TO information you enter differs from action to action; see the
individual element action descriptions in Chapter 4, "Element Action
Statements" to determine the requirements for each. Remember that you
cannot use a name mask with any TO location field names.

3-16 SCL Reference Guide

 3.1 Set Statements

3.1.13 Syntax

──SET TO──┬─SYSOut────────────────────────────────────────┬──.──────
├─C1Print───────────────────────────────────────┤
├─┬─FILe───┬──dd-name───────────────────────────┤
│ └─DDName─┘ │
├─DSName──dataset-name──┬─────────────────────┬─┤
│ └─MEMber──member-name─┘ │
└─┤ LOCATION ├──────────────────────────────────┘
LOCATION:
├──ENVironment──env-name──SYStem──sys-name──SUBsystem──subsys-name─────
──TYPe──type-name──┬────────────────────────┬─────────────────────────┤
├─STAge──stage-id────────┤
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘

3.1.13.1 Syntax Rules

SET TO SYSOUT

SYSOUT applies to the LIST action only. Normally when you execute the LIST
action, Endevor lists the action cards in both the listing (Execution Report) and
the location you have indicated in the TO clause. If you do not enter any
information in the TO clause for the LIST action, Endevor checks the SET TO
statement for information. If the appropriate information has not been entered
in the SET TO statement or the SET TO statement indicates only SYSOUT,
Endevor defaults to SYSOUT alone.

When SYSOUT alone is selected, the action cards requested in the LIST action
are printed immediately after the LIST request, as part of the listing. You
cannot perform any editing on these action cards because they are available
only in the printout. If you have indicated another location (such as a library)
in the TO clause, however, you can access, and therefore edit, the action cards
generated.

SET TO C1PRINT

C1PRINT applies to the PRINT action only. If you do not enter any
information in the TO clause for the PRINT action, Endevor checks the SET TO
statement for information. If the appropriate information has not been entered
in the SET TO statement or the SET TO statement indicates C1PRINT, Endevor
defaults to C1PRINT and prints the specified element or member in a listing.
Note: If you want to use C1PRINT, be sure you have included the
appropriate JCL. See the examples below:
■ To send your output to the queue, code the following:
//C1PRINT DD SYSOUT=

Chapter 3. Set, Clear, and EOF Statements 3-17

3.1 Set Statements

■ To send your output to a specific file, code the following:

//C1PRINT DD DSN=filename

SET TO FILE (DDNAME) dd-name

DSNAME dataset-name

When the TO location for the element is external to Endevor (for example,
a library, sequential file, or PDS), you can enter either a file name (or
DDname) or a data set name in the TO clause.
■ When you enter a file name (DDname), be sure that the appropriate
JCL is coded for the entry.
■ When you enter a data set name, be sure to enclose the name in quotes
(single or double) if there is a period in the name; for example, the
data set TEST.LIB must be coded as 'TEST.LIB'.
Note: You cannot code both a file name (or DDname) and a data set
name. If you do, you receive an error message. You also receive an error
message if you enter Endevor location information along with a data set
name.
SET TO ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM sys-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

Elements in Endevor are identified by environment, system, subsystem,

type, and stage (ID or number). Several actions require all or part of this
information in the TO clause. Whatever data you do not code in the syntax
of the specific action must be entered in the SET TO statement.

A brief definition of each identifier follows.

■ ENVIRONMENT—The functional areas within an organization.
Environment names can be up to 8 characters in length.
■ SYSTEM—The applications at a site. System names can be up to 8
characters in length.
■ SUBSYSTEM—Specific applications within a system. Subsystem name
can be up to 8 characters in length.
■ TYPE—Categories of source code. Type names can be up to 8
characters in length.
■ STAGE—A stage in a software life cycle. You refer to stages i n SCL
statements by one of the following:
– STAGE ID—A 1-character, alphanumeric stage identifier.
– STAGE NUMBER—Either 1 or 2. Indicates the position of a stage
within the current environment.

3-18 SCL Reference Guide

 3.1 Set Statements

See the User Guide for complete information about each term.

SET TO MEMBER NAME

SET TO MEMBER applies only to the LIST action. If you do not enter a
member name in the LIST action, Endevor checks the related SET TO
statement for a member name. If a member name has not been coded, the
system defaults to SYSOUT and the list is produced in the listing
immediately following the request.
Note: If this statement is used for any other action other than LIST it will
be ignored.

3.1.14 Set Where

The SET WHERE statement applies to each element action that uses—but
does not contain all or part of—a WHERE clause, and remains in effect
until the system encounters another SET WHERE statement or a CLEAR
statement, or processing ends. The exact information used from the SET
WHERE statement depends on both the specific action and the data you
have entered in that element action statement. What you enter in the
action's WHERE clause overrides that particular entry in the SET Where
statement.

SET WHERE differs from the SET BUILD, SET FROM, and SET TO
statements in that the WHERE (and consequently the SET WHERE) clause
is optional. If you do not enter WHERE information for a specific action
and a SET WHERE statement has not been coded, the system continues
processing; you do not receive an error message nor does processing
terminate.

The WHERE clause is most useful when you are using a name mask, as it
further qualifies the criteria you have entered for the element(s). When
you use a name mask, the designated action is performed for only those
elements matching the WHERE criteria entered (along with any other
qualifying data entered).

Each clause is explained in the following pages. See the individual

element action descriptions in Chapter 4, "Element Action Statements" to
determine which WHERE information you can enter for each request.

Chapter 3. Set, Clear, and EOF Statements 3-19

3.1 Set Statements

3.1.15 Syntax
──SET WHEre──¤──┬──────────────┬──¤──.──────────────────────────────────
├─┤ CCID ├─────┤
├─┤ GENERATE ├─┤
├─┤ ARCHIVE ├──┤
├─┤ SPEC ├─────┤
└─┤ PRO ├──────┘
CCID:
┌─EQual─┐ ┌─,────┐
├──CCId──┬──────────────────┬──┼───────┼──(─── ─ccid─┴──)───────────────────┤
│ ┌─CURrent──┐ │ └─=─────┘
└─OF──┼─ALL──────┼─┘
└─RETrieve─┘
GENERATE:
├──GENerate──┬─FAIled─────────────┬────────────────────────────────────────┤
├─┤ DATE ├───────────┤
├─┤ FROM ├───────────┤
├─┤ THROUGH ├────────┤
└─┤ FROM - THROUGH ├─┘
ARCHIVE:
├──┬─┤ DATE ├───────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
├─┤ FROM ├───────────┤
├─┤ THROUGH ├────────┤
└─┤ FROM - THROUGH ├─┘
DATE:
├──DATe──┬─EQ─┬──date──┬────────────────────┬──────────────────────────────┤
└─=──┘ └─TIMe──┬─EQ─┬──time─┘
└─=──┘
FROM:
├──FROm──DATe──┬─EQ─┬──date──┬────────────────────┬────────────────────────┤
└─=──┘ └─TIMe──┬─EQ─┬──time─┘
└─=──┘
THROUGH:
├──┬─THRough─┬──DATe──┬─EQ─┬──date──┬────────────────────┬─────────────────┤
└─THRu────┘ └─=──┘ └─TIMe──┬─EQ─┬──time─┘
└─=──┘
SPEC:
├──┬─TEXt──┬─text-spec───────────────────────────────────┬─┬───────────────┤
│ │ ┌─,─────────┐ ┌─,─────────┐ │ │
│ └─(─── ─text-spec─┴──┬─AND─┬─── ─text-spec─┴──)─┘ │
│ └─OR──┘ │
└─ACM──┬─comp-spec───────────────────────────────────┬──┘
│ ┌─,─────────┐ ┌─,─────────┐ │
└─(─── ─comp-spec─┴──┬─AND─┬─── ─comp-spec─┴──)─┘
└─OR──┘
PRO:
┌─,──────────┐
├──PROcessor GROup──┬─EQ─┬──(─── ─group name─┴──)───────────────────────────┤
└─=──┘

3-20 SCL Reference Guide

 3.1 Set Statements

3.1.15.1 Syntax Rules

SET WHERE CCID

The SET WHERE statement applies to each element action that uses—but
does not contain all or part of—a WHERE clause, and remains in effect
until the system encounters another SET WHERE statement or a CLEAR
statement, or processing ends. There are two forms of WHERE CCID SCL:

WHERE CCID ccid—Limits processing to only those elements that match

one of the CCIDs coded.

WHERE CCID OF ccid—Also limits the processing to those elements that

match one of the supplied CCIDs. With this SCL, however, you can
indicate where you want Endevor to look for the CCID(s):
■ CURRENT—Tells Endevor to look through the CCID fields in the
MCF (Master Control File) to find a specified CCID(s). This is the
default.
■ ALL—Tells Endevor to search both the Master Control File and the
SOURCE DELTA levels for a specified CCID(s). If you have ACM,
Endevor also searches the COMPONENT LIST DELTA levels for the
specified CCID(s).
■ RETRIEVE—Tells Endevor to use the CCID in the Master Control
File's RETRIEVE CCID field.

You can use a name mask with the CCID.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one CCID, you
can specify multiple CCIDs by enclosing the CCIDs with parentheses and
separating them with commas. The CCIDs may extend over multiple lines
if necessary.

The examples below illustrate the two forms of WHERE CCID SCL.
Example 1: WHERE CCID EQ PROJ
Example 2: WHERE CCID OF CURRENT (PROJ1, PROJ2, PROJ4)
Example 3: WHERE CCID OF ALL (PROJ)

SET WHERE GENERATE

WHERE GENERATE SCL allows you to set a generation date and,

optionally, time as a selection criterion. There are five possible forms for
this clause:
■ WHERE GENERATE FAILED—Tells Endevor to list only those
elements for which the generate processor failed.

Chapter 3. Set, Clear, and EOF Statements 3-21

3.1 Set Statements

■ WHERE GENERATE DATE mm/dd/yy TIME hh:mm—Tells Endevor

to select only those elements with this generate date, and optionally,
this time stamp.
■ WHERE GENERATE FROM DATE mm/dd/yy TIME hh:mm—Tells
Endevor to select all elements with a generate date and, optionally, a
time stamp on or after the specified date and time stamps.
■ WHERE GENERATE THROUGH DATE mm/dd/yy TIME
hh:mm—Tells Endevor to select all elements with a generate date and,
optionally, a time stamp earlier than and including the specified date
and time stamp.
■ WHERE GENERATE FROM DATE mm/dd/yy TIME hh:mm
THROUGH DATE mm/dd/yy TIME hh:mm—Tells Endevor to select
only those elements with a generate date, and optionally, time stamps
within the specified range.

The date(s) must be in mm/dd/yy format (leading zeros are not required).
The time(s) must be in hh:mm format. If you enter a time in this clause,
you must enter a date.

SET WHERE ARCHIVE

WHERE ARCHIVE SCL allows you to set an archive date and, optionally,
time as a selection criteria. There are four possible forms for this clause:
■ WHERE ARCHIVE DATE mm/dd/yy TIME hh:mm—Tells Endevor to
select only those elements with this archive date, and optionally, this
time stamp.
■ WHERE ARCHIVE FROM DATE mm/dd/yy TIME hh:mm—Tells
Endevor to select all elements with an archive date and, optionally, a
time stamp on or after the specified date and time stamps.
■ WHERE ARCHIVE THROUGH DATE mm/dd/yy TIME hh:mm—Tells
Endevor to select all elements with an archive date and, optionally, a
time stamp earlier than and including the specified date and time
stamp.
■ WHERE ARCHIVE FROM DATE mm/dd/yy TIME hh:mm
THROUGH DATE mm/dd/yy TIME hh:mm—Tells Endevor to select
only those elements with an archive date and, optionally, a time stamp
within the specified range.

The date(s) must be in mm/dd/yy format (leading zeros are not required).
The time(s) must be in hh:mm format. If you enter a time in this clause,
you must enter a date.

3-22 SCL Reference Guide

 3.1 Set Statements

SET WHERE TEXT

WHERE TEXT SCL limits a list to elements that contain (or do not contain)
one or more specified 1- to 70-character text strings. The examples below
show how you might code WHERE TEXT SCL. See The List Statement
section of Chapter 4, "Element Action Statements," for an illustration of
WHERE TEXT syntax.
■ This example tells Endevor to list all elements containing the text
string "WO9- LINKAGE:"
WHERE TEXT 'WO9-LINKAGE'
■ This example tells Endevor to list all elements that contain the text
strings "COPY COPY005" and "COPY COPY010" between columns 8
and 40 of the element source:
WHERE TEXT ('COPY COPY5' COLUMN 8 4 AND 'COPY COPY1' COLUMN 8 4)
■ This example tells Endevor to list all elements that do not contain the
text string "REMARKS" between columns 8 and 15 of the element
source:
WHERE TEXT DOES NOT CONTAIN 'REMARKS' COLUMN 8 15
■ This example tells Endevor to list all elements that contain either the
text string "M605SUB" or the text string "M607SUB" and do not contain
the text string "M606SUB:"
WHERE TEXT (('M65SUB' OR 'M67SUB')AND DOES NOT CONTAIN 'M66SUB')

Note: The WHERE TEXT EQUAL clause cannot be used with the
WHERE ACM clauses.

SET WHERE ACM

WHERE ACM SCL limits a list to component lists containing (or not
containing) the designated 1- to 10-character component name.
Wildcards are acceptable in the component name specification. See
The List Statement section of Chapter 4,

See the Set Statements section at the beginning of this chapter for
complete explanations of "Element Action Statements," for an
illustration of WHERE ACM syntax.. There are four clauses:
■ WHERE INPUT COMPONENT tells Endevor to list only input
components matching your entry. This is the default.
■ WHERE RELATED INPUT COMPONENT—tells Endevor to list
only related input components matching your entry.

Chapter 3. Set, Clear, and EOF Statements 3-23

3.1 Set Statements

■ WHERE OUTPUT COMPONENT tells Endevor to list only output

components matching your criteria.
■ WHERE RELATED OUTPUT COMPONENT—tells Endevor to
list only related output components matching your entry.
■ WHERE PROCESSOR COMPONENT tells Endevor to list only
processor components matching the criteria.
■ WHERE ALL COMPONENT tells Endevor to list for matches
within all three types of components.

Additional selection criteria for the component includes the following

clauses.
■ THROUGH (THRU) comp-name—tells Endevor to list elements
within a specific range of 1- to 10-character component names.
The range begins with the component name coded in the WHERE
COMPONENTS clause, and encompasses all components up to
and including the component specified in this clause. Wildcards
are acceptable in the component name specification.
■ VERSION version—tells Endevor to list elements containing
components with a specific 1- to 99-character version number. The
version number of the component may differ from the version
number of the element with which it is associated.
■ LEVEL level tells—Endevor to list elements containing components
with a specific 0- to 99-character level number. The level number
of the component can differ from the level number of the element
with which it is associated.
■ ENVIRONMENT env name—tells Endevor to list elements with
components located in the specified environment. If you provide
an environment name, you must also provide the following
information:
– SYSTEM—1 to 8 characters
– SUBSYSTEM—1 to 8 characters
– TYPE—1 to 8 characters
– STAGE NUMBER—either 1 or 2

3-24 SCL Reference Guide

 3.1 Set Statements

■ FILE (DDNAME) ddname—tells Endevor to list elements whose:

– Input components originated from the specified DDname
– Output components were written to the specified DDname
– Components were produced by a processor step specified by
and associated with the designated DDname
■ DSNAME data set name—tells Endevor to list elements whose:
– Input components originated from the specified data set
– Output components were written to the specified data set
– Components were produced by a processor step specified by
and associated with the designated data set

WHERE ACM comp spec {AND/OR} comp spec

This clause allows you to provide compound component selection

criteria, using the same options as described above.
Note: The WHERE ACM clauses cannot be used with the WHERE
TEXT clause.

WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP

WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP SCL allows you to select elements

according to a specified processor group. You can use a name mask
when specifying the processor group name.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one

processor group, you can specify multiple distinct processor group
selectors by enclosing the processor groups with parentheses and
separating them with commas. The processor groups may extend over
multiple lines if necessary.

The examples below illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBVS, COBII)
Example 2: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBV)

Chapter 3. Set, Clear, and EOF Statements 3-25

3.2 Clear Statements

3.2 Clear Statements

3.2.1 Overview
A CLEAR statement clears the information that has been designated by
a SET statement. The CLEAR statement must be in the same syntax as
the SET statement to which it applies, and must be entered (at some
point in your code) after that SET statement. The CLEAR statement
affects all syntax following it until a new SET statement is encountered
or processing ends. The CLEAR statement does not affect the related
information coded within each individual element action's syntax.
Because these statements are not executed, no source or output
management is involved.

3.2.2 Clear Build

The CLEAR BUILD statement clears like information you have entered
in the SET BUILD statement.

3.2.3 Syntax

──CLEar BUIld──¤──┬────────────────┬──¤──.──────────────────
├─ALL────────────┤
├─ACTion─────────┤
├─LEVel──────────┤
└─WITh COMPonent─┘

3.2.3.1 Syntax Rules

CLEAR BUILD

You can code the following options in the CLEAR BUILD statement.

ALL—Clears every selection designated in the related SET BUILD

clause—action, level, and WITH COMPONENTS (if applicable).

ACTION—Clears the related SET BUILD ACTION clause, no matter

which action is coded in that clause.

LEVEL—Clears the level selection designated in the related SET

BUILD LEVEL clause.

WITH COMPONENTS—Clears the related SET BUILD WITH

COMPONENTS clause.

3-26 SCL Reference Guide

 3.2 Clear Statements

Note: WITH COMPONENTS pertains to the Endevor ACM product

only. See the Set Build section in this chapter, and The List Statement
(BUILD clause) in Chapter 4, "Element Action Statements," for
additional information.

3.2.4 Clear To/From

The CLEAR TO and CLEAR FROM statements clear information from
previously coded SET TO and SET FROM statements.

3.2.5 Syntax

──CLEar──┬─TO───┬──¤──┬─────────────┬──¤──.─────────────────
└─FROm─┘ ├─┬─FILe───┬──┤
│ └─DDName─┘ │
├─DSName──────┤
├─MEMber──────┤
├─ALL─────────┤
├─SITe────────┤
├─ENVironment─┤
├─SYStem──────┤
├─SUBsystem───┤
├─TYPe────────┤
└─STAge───────┘

3.2.5.1 Syntax Rules

CLEAR/TO FROM

You can enter the following values in the CLEAR TO and CLEAR
FROM statements:

FILE/DDNAME—Clears the related SET TO/FROM FILE (DDNAME)

clause.

DSNAME—Clears the related SET TO/FROM DSNAME clause.

MEMBER—Clears the related SET TO/FROM MEMBER clause.

ALL—Clears all clauses entered for the related SET statement(s).

SITE—Clears the related SET FROM SITE (site ID) clause.

ENVIRONMENT—Clears the related SET TO/FROM

ENVIRONMENT clause.

SYSTEM—Clears the related SET TO/FROM SYSTEM clause.

SUBSYSTEM—Clears the related SET TO/FROM SUBSYSTEM clause.

Chapter 3. Set, Clear, and EOF Statements 3-27

3.2 Clear Statements

TYPE—Clears the related SET TO/FROM TYPE clause.

STAGE—Clears the related SET TO/FROM STAGE (ID) or SET

TO/FROM STAGE NUMBER clause(s).

3.2.6 Clear Options

The CLEAR OPTIONS statement clears any "matching" SET OPTIONS
statement coded previously.

3.2.7 Syntax
──CLEar OPTion──¤──┬─────────────────────────────────────────┬──¤────
├─ALL─────────────────────────────────────┤
├─CCId──ccid──────────────────────────────┤
├─COMment──comment────────────────────────┤
├─COPyback────────────────────────────────┤
├─DELete input source─────────────────────┤
├─DETail report───────────────────────────┤
├─EXPand includes─────────────────────────┤
├─IGNore generate failed──────────────────┤
├─JUMp────────────────────────────────────┤
├─NEW VERsion──version────────────────────┤
├─NOCc────────────────────────────────────┤
├─NO SIGNOut──────────────────────────────┤
├─OVErride SIGNOut────────────────────────┤
├─ONLy COMPonent──────────────────────────┤
├─REPlace MEMber──────────────────────────┤
├─SHOw TEXt──┬──────────────┬─────────────┤
│ └─PLUs n lines─┘ │
├─SYNchronize─────────────────────────────┤
├─UPDate if present───────────────────────┤
├─WITh HIStory────────────────────────────┤
├─┬─BYPass DELete PROcessor─┬─────────────┤
│ └─BYPass ELEment DELete───┘ │
├─┬─BYPass GENerate PROcessor───────────┬─┤
│ └─PROcessor GROup──┬─EQ─┬──group name─┘ │
│ └─=──┘ │
├─COMponent──┬─BROwse──┬──────────────────┤
│ ├─CHAnge──┤ │
│ ├─HIStory─┤ │
│ ├─SUMmary─┤ │
│ └─MASter──┘ │
├─┬─NOSearch─┬────────────────────────────┤
│ └─SEArch───┘ │
└─┬─RETain SIGNOut─────┬──────────────────┘
├─SIGNin─────────────┤
└─SIGNOut TO──userid─┘
──.──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

3-28 SCL Reference Guide

 3.2 Clear Statements

3.2.7.1 Syntax Rules

CLEAR OPTIONS

Specify a particular option(s) in a CLEAR OPTIONS clause to clear

only that option(s). Specify ALL to clear all options previously set.
See the section, Set Options, for a description of each option.

3.2.8 Clear Where

The CLEAR WHERE statement clears all related SET WHERE clauses
coded previously.

3.2.9 Syntax

──CLEar WHEre──¤──┬─────────────────┬──¤──.─────────────────
├─ALL─────────────┤
├─TEXt────────────┤
├─CCId────────────┤
├─GENerate FAIled─┤
├─GENerate DATe───┤
├─ARChive DATe────┤
└─ACM─────────────┘

3.2.9.1 Syntax Rules

CLEAR WHERE

You can enter the following values in the CLEAR WHERE statement:

ALL—Clears all SET WHERE statements previously coded.

TEXT—Clears the related SET WHERE TEXT EQUALS clause.

CCID—Clears the related SET WHERE CCID clause.

GENERATE FAILED—Clears the related SET WHERE GENERATE

FAILED clause.

GENERATE DATE—Clears the related SET WHERE GENERATE

DATE (and GENERATE TIME) clause.

ARCHIVE DATE—Clears the related SET WHERE ARCHIVE DATE

(and ARCHIVE TIME) clause.

ACM—Clears all information coded in relation to the SET WHERE

COMPONENTS EQUAL clause, including:

Chapter 3. Set, Clear, and EOF Statements 3-29

3.2 Clear Statements

■ Type of component (input, output, processor, all).

■ THROUGH, VERSION, LEVEL in a WHERE COMPONENTS
EQUAL clause.
■ Component inventory location (environment, system, subsystem,
type, and stage number).
■ File (DDname) or data set name.

3-30 SCL Reference Guide

 3.3 EOF (EOJ) Statement

3.3 EOF (EOJ) Statement

3.3.1 Overview
The EOF (EOJ) statement tells Endevor to stop parsing the SCL syntax
at a particular point. For example, if you have listed two actions and
want to perform only the first action, you would enter EOF. (or EOJ.)
immediately after the last line of the first action (or immediately before
the first line of the second action).

If you do not use the EOF (EOJ) statement, you need to manually
delete the actions (lines of code) you do not want performed.

3.3.2 Syntax

──┬─EOF─┬──.────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─EOJ─┘

3.3.2.1 Syntax Rules

EOF (EOJ)

Simply code either EOF or EOJ in the appropriate place in the syntax.

Chapter 3. Set, Clear, and EOF Statements 3-31

3-32 SCL Reference Guide
Chapter 4. Element Action Statements

This chapter illustrates the syntax for each Endevor element action,
and explains the coding rules specific to that statement.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-1

4.1 Coding Conventions

4.1 Coding Conventions

Most of the actions for which you can code SCL can also be accessed
in foreground or batch mode. A discussion of the processing flow for
these actions can be found in the User's Guide: refer to that as
necessary.

A strict coding order applies to the THROUGH, VERSION, and LEVEL

clauses, as follows:
■ When coding the THROUGH clause, it must immediately follow
the initial action clause. If you enter a THROUGH clause,
however, you cannot specify a level for the action.
■ When coding the VERSION clause, it must immediately follow the
THROUGH clause. If a THROUGH clause has not been entered,
the VERSION clause must immediately follow the initial action
clause.
■ When coding the LEVEL clause, it must immediately follow the
VERSION clause. If a VERSION clause has not been entered, the
LEVEL clause must immediately follow the initial action clause. If
you specify a LEVEL, however, you cannot enter a THROUGH
clause for the action.

All other clauses (following THROUGH, VERSION, and/or LEVEL)

can be coded in any order.
Note: You can enter VERSION and LEVEL for the following actions,
although this is not indicated in the syntax: ADD, ARCHIVE,
GENERATE, MOVE, RESTORE, SIGNIN, TRANSFER, and UPDATE.
However, these fields are ignored during processing.

4-2 SCL Reference Guide

 4.2 SCL Execution JCL

4.2 SCL Execution JCL

4.2.1 Overview
As mentioned previously in this manual, you can use batch panels to
enter your element action requests. The standard JCL required for
execution is already defined. You most likely do not need to code
additional JCL, except in special situations (for example, when you
reference a file by DDname).

If you decide not to use the batch panels, you must code specific JCL
in order to execute your requests. A sample of the JCL required is
provided on the installation tape and loaded to the JCL library
(iprfx.iqual.JCL) during installation. The sample JCL is shown below:

// ( COPY JOBCARD )

//
// 
// BC1JSCL JCL TO EXECUTE ENDEVOR SCL REQUESTS. 
// 
// PLEASE CONSULT YOUR ENDEVOR SCL REFERENCE MANUAL FOR A 
// DESCRIPTION OF SELECTION CRITERIA. 
// 
//
//REPORTS EXEC PGM=NDVRC1,DYNAMNBR=15,PARM='C1BM3',REGION=496K
//STEPLIB DD DSN=SYS2.PANVALET.LOAD,DISP=SHR PANVALET LOADLIB
//CONLIB DD DSN=iprfx.iqual.CONLIB,DISP=SHR
//BSTIPT1 DD 
 PUT SCL STATEMENTS HERE 
//C1MSGS1 DD SYSOUT= MESSAGE OUTPUT
//C1PRINT DD SYSOUT= PRINT ACTION FILE
//SYSOUT DD SYSOUT=

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-3

4.2 SCL Execution JCL

4.3 The &&ACTION Statement

4.3.1 Overview
The &&ACTION statement allows you to substitute any action for a
specified element at run time. This statement normally is generated
when you use the LIST action.

If you do not indicate a specific action(s) to be performed when you

request a list, &&ACTION appears at the beginning of each clause.
You can then input the appropriate action(s) at a later date, using the
SET ACTION statement.

For example, at the beginning of a month, you may want to see a list
of elements involved with a particular project, although you may not
know what actions you will request for those elements. If you request
the list without indicating any specific actions, &&ACTION appears, in
lieu of a specific action, for every action card generated. When you are
ready to perform individual actions, simply specify those actions with
the necessary SET ACTION clause(s).

Whenever you execute an &&ACTION statement, you must precede it

with a SET ACTION statement that contains the action to be
performed. Depending on the action specified, you may need to
include supplementary information, such as TO or FROM clauses, in
the related SET ACTION statement. See the discussions of the SET
ACTION statements in Chapter 3, "Set, Clear, and EOF Statements,"
and in The List Statement section in this chapter for more information.
Note: Additional clauses may be required depending on the action
coded in the SET ACTION statement. Similarly, additional optional
clauses will be available depending on the action you use. See the
individual action descriptions for detailed information regarding each
action's requirements and options.

4.3.2 Syntax

──&&Action ELEment──┬─element─────┬──────────────────────────
└─member-name─┘
──┬─THRough─┬──element name──┬─────────┬──┬─────────┬─────────
└─THRu────┘ └─VERsion─┘ └─version─┘
──┬───────┬──┬────────┬──────────────────────────────────────
└─LEVel─┘ └─level.─┘

4-4 SCL Reference Guide

 4.3 The &&ACTION Statement

4.3.2.1 Syntax Rules

&&ACTION ELEMENTS element
member-name

Indicates the element(s) involved when the designated action is

performed. Code the required syntax and enter the appropriate
element name; up to 10 characters are allowed. In addition, you can
use a name mask with the element name. If you specify a level (in the
LEVEL clause), however, you cannot use a name mask with the
element name.

THROUGH (THRU) element-name

Indicates the range of elements affected by the &&ACTION statement.

You can use a name mask with the element name. You cannot have
both a THROUGH clause and a LEVEL clause.

VERSION version

Indicates the version you want to see for the specified element.
Acceptable values are 1-99.

You must code a full element name if you want to indicate a version
number.

If you code the VERSION clause, it must follow the THROUGH clause.

LEVEL level

Indicates the level you want to see for the specified element.
Acceptable values are 00-99. By default, Endevor retrieves the current
level of the element.

If you enter a LEVEL clause, you cannot enter a THROUGH clause. In

addition, you must code a full element name in the &&ACTION
ELEMENTS clause.

The LEVEL option is not available for all actions. Check the individual
action to see if this clause can be used.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-5

4.3 The &&ACTION Statement

4.3.3 Example of &&ACTION SCL

The following is an example of &&ACTION SCL. In this example, the
SET ACTION GENERATE statement has been specified, as well the
appropriate SET OPTIONS and SET FROM statements.
SET ACTION GENERATE .
SET FROM ENVIRONMENT 'PROD'
SYSTEM 'PAYROLL'
SUBSYSTEM 'REPORTS'
TYPE 'COBOL'
STAGE NUMBER 1 .
SET OPTIONS CCID REQ#4323
COMMENT 'REGENERATE WITH NEW COPY BOOKS'
COPYBACK
SEARCH .

&&ACTION ELEMENTS PAYRPT .

4-6 SCL Reference Guide

 4.3 The &&ACTION Statement

4.4 The Add Statement

4.4.1 Overview
The ADD statement allows you to add an element to an environment's
entry stage in Endevor. The entry stage for an environment is defined
through the C1DEFLTS table.

4.4.2 Add Syntax

──ADD ELEment──element-name──┬───────────────────────────┬───────────
└─┬─THRough─┬──element-name─┘
└─THRu────┘
──FROm──┬─┬─FILe───┬──dd-name───────────────────────────┬──TO─────────
│ └─DDName─┘ │
├─DSName──dataset-name──┬─────────────────────┬─┤
│ └─MEMber──member-name─┘ │
└─PATH──hfspath──HFSFILE──filename──────────────┘
──ENVironment──env-name──SYStem──sys-name──SUBsystem──subsys-name─────
──TYPe──type-name─────────────────────────────────────────────────────
──┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬────
└─OPTion──¤──┬────────────────────────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─CCId──ccid─────────────────────────────────┤
├─COMment──comment───────────────────────────┤
├─NEW VERsion──version───────────────────────┤
├─UPDate if present──────────────────────────┤
├─DELete input source────────────────────────┤
├─OVErride SIGNOut───────────────────────────┤
└─┬─BYPass GENerate PROcessor──────────────┬─┘
└─PROcessor GROup──┬─EQual─┬──group name─┘
└─=─────┘
──.──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4.4.2.1 Syntax Rules

ADD ELEMENTS element-name

Indicates the element(s) to be added. Code the required syntax and

enter the appropriate element name; up to 10 characters are allowed.
In addition, you can use a name mask with the element name.

THROUGH (THRU) element-name

Indicates that a range of elements should be added, beginning with the

element coded in the ADD ELEMENTS statement, up to and including
the element specified in this statement. You can use a name mask
with the element name. If you use the THROUGH clause, however,
you cannot enter a member name in the FROM clause.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-7

4.4 The Add Statement

Note: If you are working with a sequential file, the THROUGH clause
is ignored.
FROM FILE (DDNAME) dd-name
DSNAME dataset-name
MEMBER member-name

PATH hfspath
HFSFILE filename

The FROM clause indicates the location of the element being added.
Endevor uses both the FROM clause in the action and any preceding
SET FROM clause to determine the "from" criteria for that action.
■ A FROM clause in an action overrides values in a SET FROM
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET FROM clause contains values that are not included in
the FROM clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET FROM statement, in Chapter 3, "Set

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

The SET FROM statement allows you to specify only a file (DDname)
or data set name, not a member name.

You must enter a FILE, DDNAME, DSNAME, or PATH in conjunction

with HFSFILE (enter one and only one). If you enter either a FILE or
DDNAME, be sure the appropriate JCL DD statement is coded.

Enter a member name (up to 10 characters) if it differs from the

element name specified in the ADD ELEMENTS clause. If you do not
enter a member name, Endevor assumes that the element name and
member name are the same. If you provide a member name:
■ The ADD ELEMENTS clause must contain a fully qualified
element name.
■ You cannot also code a THROUGH clause.
PATH

The HFS directory where the element source file resides.

HFSFILE

The file in the HFS directory that you want to put under the control of
Endevor.

4-8 SCL Reference Guide

 4.4 The Add Statement

For more information see 1.6.1, “HFSFile Syntax Rules” on

page 1-23.1.6.1, “HFSFile Syntax Rules” on page 1-23.
TO ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM sys-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name

The TO clause indicates where the element is being added. Endevor

uses both the TO clause in the action and any preceding SET TO
clause to determine the "to" criteria for that action.
■ A TO clause in an action overrides values in a SET TO clause that
precedes the action.
■ If the SET TO clause contains values that are not included in the
TO clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET TO statement, in Chapter 3, "Set Clear,

and EOF Statements," for more information.

You must specify an environment, system, subsystem, and type for the
ADD action. Remember that you cannot use a name mask with any
field in the TO location.

OPTIONS

OPTION clauses allow you to further specify action requests.

CCID ccid/COMMENT comment—You can enter a 1- to 12-character

CCID and/or a 1- to 40-character comment.

CCIDs and/or comments may be required. If you do not provide a

required CCID and/or comment, the ADD action fails.

When you specify a CCID and/or comment in an ADD action,

Endevor treats the CCID and/or COMMENT fields differently
depending on whether you are adding a new element or an existing
element.
■ When you specify a CCID and/or comment in an ADD action for
a new element, Endevor uses this CCID and/or comment to:
– Set the source and source delta CCID and/or COMMENT
fields.
– Set the generate and component list delta CCID and/or
COMMENT fields if the generate processor is run.
– Set the last action CCID and/or COMMENT fields.

Endevor also clears the environment's entry stage RETRIEVE CCID

and/or COMMENT fields when you add a new element.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-9

4.4 The Add Statement

■ When you specify a CCID and/or comment in an ADD action for

an existing element, Endevor uses this CCID and/or comment to:
– Set the source CCID and/or COMMENT fields if the CCID
and/or comment has changed.
– Set the source delta CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
– Set the generate CCID and/or COMMENT fields if the
generate proc&essor is run.
– Set the component list delta CCID and/or COMMENT fields if
running the generate processor creates a change.
– Set the last action CCID and/or COMMENT fields.

Endevor also clears the environment's entry stage RETRIEVE CCID

and/or COMMENT fields when you add an existing element. If you
use the BYPASS GENERATE PROCESSOR option, the ADD action
does not set the generate or component list delta CCID and/or
COMMENT fields.

NEW VERSION version—If the element exists up the map, the version
number associated with the existing element will be assigned, by
default. If the element does not exist up the map, the element is
assigned version 1.

UPDATE IF PRESENT—To successfully add an element to Endevor,

that element cannot currently exist in the entry stage. If the element is
present in the entry stage, Endevor returns an error message. The
UPDATE IF PRESENT option, however, allows you to add the element
even if it is in the entry stage, by automatically changing the ADD
action to UPDATE.

DELETE INPUT SOURCE—After an element has been successfully

added to Endevor, you can use this option to remove the member
from the library in which it originated.

If you input a sequential file, this option deletes that file.

OVERRIDE SIGNOUT—If the element has been signed out to a

person other than yourself, you must code this option to perform this
action. This option updates the signout ID at the appropriate stage,
with the user ID of the person performing the override. Use
OVERRIDE SIGNOUT with caution to avoid regressing changes made
by another user.

BYPASS GENERATE PROCESSOR—Use this option if you do not

want the generate processor executed for the element. Otherwise, as
part of normal processing, Endevor looks for and executes the generate
processor for the element when it is added.

4-10 SCL Reference Guide

 4.4 The Add Statement

PROCESSOR GROUP EQ/= group name—You can specify that a

particular processor group be used for this action. If you do not
indicate a processor group and:
■ You are adding a new member, the system defaults to the
processor group associated with the type to which the element is
assigned.
■ You are adding an existing element, the system defaults to the
processor group last used for this element.

4.4.3 Example of Add SCL

The following is an example of ADD SCL. This SCL adds a new
element to the Payroll reporting subsystem in the environment PROD.
After the ADD action completes, the source member will be deleted.
ADD ELEMENT 'PAYRPT31'
TO ENVIRONMENT 'PROD'
SYSTEM 'PAYROLL'
SUBSYSTEM 'REPORTS'
TYPE ' COBOL'
FROM DSNAME 'PAYROLL.SRCLIB'
OPTIONS DELETE INPUT SOURCE
CCID REQ#43213
COMMENT 'ADD THE NEW PAYROLL REPORTING PROGRAM' .

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-11

4.4 The Add Statement

4.5 The Archive Statement

4.5.1 Overview
The ARCHIVE statement writes the base level and all change levels of
an element to a sequential file (known as an archive data set). In
addition, for Endevor ACM users, the ARCHIVE action writes the base
level and all change levels of the Component List to the archive data
set.

Use the ARCHIVE action to:

■ Maintain a backup copy of the element source.
■ Delete the existing version of a particular element from Stage 2.
■ Maintain an archive version of the element source, that is, to
maintain a version of the element source outside of Endevor.

Archive is available in batch only. Once an element has been archived,

COPY, LIST, RESTORE, and TRANSFER actions can be executed
against the archive data set.

4-12 SCL Reference Guide

 4.5 The Archive Statement

4.5.2 Syntax

──ARChive ELEment──element-name──────────────────────────────
──┬───────────────────────────┬──FROm─────────────────────────
└─┬─THRough─┬──element-name─┘
└─THRu────┘
──ENVironment──env-name──SYStem──sys-name─────────────────────
──SUBsystem──subsys-name──TYPe──type-name─────────────────────
──┬─STAge──stage-id────────┬──TO──┬─FILe───┬──dd-name─────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘ └─DDName─┘
──┬───────────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────
└─WHEre──¤──┬──────────┬──¤─┘
├─┤ CCID ├─┤
└─┤ PRO ├──┘
──┬─────────────────────────────────────────┬──.─────────────
└─OPTion──¤──┬───────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─CCId──ccid────────────┤
├─COMment──comment──────┤
├─OVErride SIGNOut──────┤
└─BYPass ELEment DELete─┘
CCID:
┌─EQual─┐ ┌─,────┐
─ccid─┴──)───────┤
├──CCId──┬──────────────────┬──┼───────┼──(───
│ ┌─CURrent──┐ │ └─=─────┘
└─OF──┼─ALL──────┼─┘
└─RETrieve─┘
PRO:
┌─,──────────┐
─group name─┴──)───────────────┤
├──PROcessor GROup──┬─EQ─┬──(───
└─=──┘

4.5.2.1 Syntax Rules

ARCHIVE ELEMENTS element-name

Indicates the element(s) to be archived. Code the required syntax and

enter the appropriate element name; up to 10 characters are allowed.
In addition, you can use a name mask with the element name.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-13

4.5 The Archive Statement

THROUGH (THRU) element-name

Indicates that a range of elements should be archived, beginning with

the element coded in the ARCHIVE ELEMENTS statement, up to and
including the element specified in this statement. You can use a name
mask with the element name.
FROM ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM sys-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

The FROM clause indicates the location of the element being archived.
Endevor uses both the FROM clause in an action and any preceding
SET FROM clause to determine the "from" criteria for that action.
■ A FROM clause in an action overrides values in a SET FROM
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET FROM clause contains values that are not included in
the FROM clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET FROM statement, in Chapter 3, "Set

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

You must specify an environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage.

The environment name must be explicit. You can use a name mask
with the system, subsystem, type, and stage. The stage specification
can be either one of the following:
■ STAGE ID—Enter a single alphanumeric stage identifier.
■ STAGE NUMBER—Enter either 1 or 2.

TO FILE (DDNAME) dd-name

The TO clause indicates where the element is being archived. Endevor

uses both the TO clause in an action and any preceding SET TO clause
to determine the "to" criteria for that action.
■ A TO clause in an action overrides values in a SET TO clause that
precedes the action.
■ If the SET TO clause contains values that are not included in the
TO clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET TO statement, in Chapter 3, "Set Clear,

and EOF Statements," for more information.

4-14 SCL Reference Guide

 4.5 The Archive Statement

The DCB must specify variable blocked records (RECFM=VB), and the
DSORG should be PS.
■ The minimum LRECL should be the greater of 3 times the
maximum MCF-record length or the TYPE-LENGTH plus (+) 14.
■ When archiving to disk, the recommended block size is one-half a
track, and the recommended LRECL is one-half a track minus (-) 4
unless the previous rule requires a bigger LRECL/BLKSIZE.
■ When archiving to tape, the recommended block size is 32760 and
the recommended LRECL is 32756.

WHERE

Use WHERE clauses to further qualify element selection criteria.

Endevor uses both the WHERE clause in an action and any preceding
SET WHERE clause to determine the "where" criteria for that action.
■ A WHERE clause in an action overrides values in a SET WHERE
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET WHERE clause contains values that are not included in
the WHERE clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET WHERE statement, in Chapter 3, "Set,

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

WHERE CCID OF ccid —Limits the processing to those elements that

match one of the supplied CCIDs. You can use a name mask in this
field.
■ CURRENT—Tells Endevor to look through the CCID fields in the
MCF (Master Control File) to find a specified CCID(s). This is the
default.
■ ALL—Tells Endevor to search both the Master Control File and the
SOURCE DELTA levels for a specified CCID(s). If you have ACM,
Endevor also searches the COMPONENT LIST DELTA levels for
the specified CCID(s).
■ RETRIEVE—Tells Endevor to use the CCID in the Master Control
File RETRIEVE CCID field.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one CCID,
you can specify multiple CCIDs by enclosing the CCIDs with
parentheses and separating them with commas. The CCIDs may
extend over multiple lines if necessary. The next examples illustrate
the use of this clause.
Example 1: WHERE CCID OF CURRENT (PROJ1, PROJ2, PROJ4)
Example 2: WHERE CCID OF ALL (PROJV)

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-15

4.5 The Archive Statement

WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP EQ/= group name—This clause allows

you to select elements according to a specified processor group. You
can use a name mask when specifying the processor group name.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one

processor group, you can specify multiple distinct processor group
selectors by enclosing the processor groups with parentheses and
separating them with commas. The processor groups may extend over
multiple lines if necessary.

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBVS, COBII)
Example 2: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBV)

OPTIONS

OPTIONS clauses allow you to further specify requests.

CCID ccid/COMMENTcomment—You can enter a 1- to 12- character

CCID and/or a 1- to 40-character comment.

CCIDS and/or comments may be required. If you do not provide a

required CCID and/or comment, the ARCHIVE action fails.

This is the CCID that Endevor looks for if WHERE ARCHIVE CCID is
specified for the LIST, COPY, RESTORE, and TRANSFER actions.

OVERRIDE SIGNOUT—If the element has been signed out to a

person other than yourself, you must code this option in order to
perform this action. Note, however, that OVERRIDE SIGNOUT does
not apply when you select the BYPASS ELEMENT DELETE option for
this action. This option updates the SIGNOUT ID at the appropriate
stage with the user ID of the person performing the override. Use
OVERRIDE SIGNOUT with caution to avoid regressing changes made
by another user.

BYPASS ELEMENT DELETE—Use this option if you do not want the

element automatically deleted (the default) after it is archived.
Otherwise, Endevor deletes the element, that is, the base and all
change levels.

4-16 SCL Reference Guide

 4.5 The Archive Statement

4.5.3 Example of Archive SCL

The following is an example of ARCHIVE SCL. This SCL archives all
of the elements from the Payroll Reporting subsystem. The archived
elements will be written to the preallocated DD name "ARCHOUT.'
The signout status will be overridden, if necessary.
ARCHIVE ELEMENT ''
FROM ENVIRONMENT 'PROD'
SYSTEM 'PAYROLL'
SUBSYSTEM 'REPORTS'
TYPE 'COBOL'
STAGE NUMBER 1
TO DDNAME ARCHOUT
OPTIONS CCID REQ#44145
COMMENT 'ARCHIVE REPORTING SUBSYSTEM PROGRAMS'
OVERRIDE SIGNOUT .

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-17

4.5 The Archive Statement

4.6 The Copy Statement

4.6.1 Overview
The COPY statement copies an element from an archive data set to a
user data set (that is, a data set external to Endevor). The user data set
can be a library (an AllFusion CA-Panvalet file, an AllFusion
CA-Librarian file, or a PDS) or a sequential file. The element is not
restored to the Master Control File.

The COPY action is available in batch only. Note, also, that copy
processing is strictly external to Endevor.

4-18 SCL Reference Guide

 4.6 The Copy Statement

4.6.2 Syntax

──COPy ELEment──element-name─────────────────────────────────
──┬───────────────────────────┬──┬──────────────────┬─────────
└─┬─THRough─┬──element-name─┘ └─VERsion──version─┘
└─THRu────┘
──FROm──┬─FILe───┬──dd-name──┬───────────────┬────────────────
└─DDName─┘ └─SITe──site-id─┘
──ENVironment──env-name──SYStem──sys-name─────────────────────
──SUBsystem──subsys-name──TYPe──type-name─────────────────────
──STAge NUMber──stage-no──TO──────────────────────────────────
──┬─┬─FILe───┬──dd-name───────────────────────────┬───────────
│ └─DDName─┘ │
├─DSName──dataset-name──┬─────────────────────┬─┤
│ └─MEMber──member-name─┘ │
└─PATH──hfspath──HFSFILE──filename──────────────┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────┬───────────
└─WHERE──¤──┬──────────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
│ ┌─,────┐ │
─ccid─┴──)─┤
├─CCId──┬─EQ─┬──(───
│ └─=──┘ │
└─ARChive──┬─┤ DATE ├────┬─────┘
├─┤ FROM ├────┤
└─┤ THROUGH ├─┘
──┬─────────────────────────────┬──.─────────────────────────
└─OPTions──┬────────────────┬─┘
└─REPlace member─┘
DATE:
├──DATe──┬─EQ─┬──date──┬────────────────────┬──────────────────┤
└─=──┘ └─TIMe──┬─EQ─┬──time─┘
└─=──┘
FROM:
├──FROm──DATe──┬─EQ─┬──date──┬────────────────────┬────────────┤
└─=──┘ └─TIMe──┬─EQ─┬──time─┘
└─=──┘
THROUGH:
├──┬─THRough─┬──DATe──┬─EQ─┬──date──┬────────────────────┬─────┤
└─THRu────┘ └─=──┘ └─TIMe──┬─EQ─┬──time─┘
└─=──┘

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-19

4.6 The Copy Statement

4.6.2.1 Syntax Rules

COPY ELEMENTS element-name

Indicates the element(s) you want to copy. Code the required syntax
and enter the appropriate element name; up to 10 characters are
allowed. In addition, you can use a name mask with the element
name.

THROUGH (THRU) element-name

Indicates that you want to copy a range of elements, beginning with

the element coded in the COPY ELEMENTS statement, up to and
including the element specified in this statement. You can use a name
mask with the element name. If you enter the THROUGH clause,
however, you cannot enter a member name (in the TO clause).

VERSION version

Indicates the version of the element you want to copy. Acceptable

values are 1-99.

You must code a full element name if you want to indicate a version
number.

If you code the VERSION clause, it must follow the THROUGH clause.
FROM FILE (DDNAME) dd-name
ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM sys-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

The FROM clause indicates the location of the element being copied.
Endevor uses both the FROM clause in an action and any preceding
SET FROM clause to determine the "from" criteria for that action.
■ A FROM clause in an action overrides values in a SET FROM
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET FROM clause contains values that are not included in
the FROM clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET FROM statement, in Chapter 3, "Set

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

The FILE (DDNAME) portion of the clause is required. The file name
indicates from which archive file the element is being copied. Enter
this information first when coding the syntax.

4-20 SCL Reference Guide

 4.6 The Copy Statement

You must specify an environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage

number (either 1 or 2). The environment name must be explicit. You
can use a name mask with the system, subsystem, type, and stage.

Entering a site ID is optional. This field further defines the location of

the element being copied.
TO FILE (DDNAME) dd-name
DSNAME dataset-name
MEMBER member-name

The TO clause indicates the file or data set name to which the element
is being copied. Endevor uses both the TO clause in an action and any
preceding SET TO clause to determine the "to" criteria for that action.
■ A TO clause in an action overrides values in a SET TO clause that
precedes the action.
■ If the SET TO clause contains values that are not included in the
TO clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET TO statement, in Chapter 3, "Set, Clear,

and EOF Statements," for more information.

You must enter either a FILE, a DDNAME, or a DSNAME (enter one

and only one). If you enter a FILE or DDNAME, be sure the
appropriate JCL is coded.

Enter a member name (up to 10 characters) if it differs from the

element name specified in the COPY ELEMENTS clause. Remember
that you cannot use a name mask with a TO field name.

If you do not enter a member name, Endevor assumes that the element
name and member name are the same.
■ You can enter a member name only if a full element name has
been coded in the COPY ELEMENTS clause; that is, if you have
not used a name mask.
■ If you want to code a member name, you must do so in the COPY
statement; the SET TO MEMBER clause does not apply to the
COPY action. If you do enter a member name, you cannot use the
THROUGH clause.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-21

4.6 The Copy Statement

WHERE

Use WHERE clauses to further qualify element selection criteria.

Endevor uses both the WHERE clause in an action and any preceding
SET WHERE clause to determine the "where" criteria for that action.
■ A WHERE clause in an action overrides values in a SET WHERE
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET WHERE clause contains values that are not included in
the WHERE clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET WHERE statement, in Chapter 3, "Set,

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

WHERE CCID EQ/= ccid —Limits the processing to those elements

that match one of the supplied CCIDs. You can use a name mask in
this field.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one CCID,
you can specify multiple CCIDs by enclosing the CCIDs with
parentheses and separating them with commas. The CCIDs may
extend over multiple lines if necessary.

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE CCID EQ PROJV
Example 2: WHERE CCID (PROJ1, PROJ2, PROJ4)

WHERE ARCHIVE—This clause allows you to select elements based

on the date and, optionally, time that an element was archived. There
are four possible forms for this clause:

WHERE ARCHIVE DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm ]

This clause tells Endevor to copy only those elements with this date,
and optionally, time stamp.

WHERE ARCHIVE FROM DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm ]

This clause tells Endevor to copy all elements with a date and,
optionally, time stamp on or after the specified date and time stamps.

WHERE ARCHIVE THROUGH DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm ]

This clause tells Endevor to copy all elements with a date and,
optionally, time stamp earlier than and including the specified date
and time stamp.

4-22 SCL Reference Guide

 4.6 The Copy Statement

WHERE ARCHIVE FROM DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm ] TH

ROUGH DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm ]

This clause tells Endevor to copy only those elements with a date, and
optionally, time stamps within the specified range. If you enter a time,
you must enter the date with it.

OPTIONS REPLACE MEMBER

If the element you are copying exists in the target location, Endevor
rejects the request unless you code the REPLACE MEMBER option.
Specify this option when you want to replace the existing member in
the library.

4.6.3 Example of Copy Action SCL

The following is an example of the COPY action. This SCL copies the
archived version of Payroll program "PAYRPT43" to a user data set.
The input is taken from a DDname that refers to a data set that was
created with the ARCHIVE action.
COPY ELEMENT 'PAYRPT43'
FROM DDNAME ARCHIVE
ENVIRONMENT 'PROD'
SYSTEM 'PAYROLL'
SUBSYSTEM 'REPORTS'
TYPE 'COBOL'
STAGE NUMBER 1
TO DSNAME 'PAYROLL.SRCLIB' MEMBER 'PAYRPT43'
OPTIONS REPLACE MEMBER .

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-23

4.6 The Copy Statement

4.7 The Delete Statement

4.7.1 Overview
The DELETE statement deletes an element from the specified inventory
location.

4.7.2 Syntax

──DELete ELEment──element-name───────────────────────────────
──┬───────────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────
└─┬─THRough─┬──element-name─┘
└─THRu────┘
──FROm──ENVironment──env-name──SYStem──sys-name───────────────
──SUBsystem──subsys-name──TYPe──type-name─────────────────────
──┬─STAge──stage-id────────┬──────────────────────────────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘
──┬───────────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────
└─WHEre──¤──┬──────────┬──¤─┘
├─┤ CCID ├─┤
└─┤ PRO ├──┘
──┬────────────────────────────────────┬──.──────────────────
└─OPTion──¤──┬──────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─CCId──ccid───────┤
├─COMment──comment─┤
├─ONLy COMPonent───┤
└─OVErride SIGNOut─┘
CCID:
┌─EQual─┐ ┌─,────┐
─ccid─┴──)───────┤
├──CCId──┬──────────────────┬──┼───────┼──(───
│ ┌─CURrent──┐ │ └─=─────┘
└─OF──┼─ALL──────┼─┘
└─RETrieve─┘
PRO:
┌─,──────────┐
─group name─┴──)───────────────┤
├──PROcessor GROup──┬─EQ─┬──(───
└─=──┘

4-24 SCL Reference Guide

 4.7 The Delete Statement

4.7.2.1 Syntax Rules

DELETE ELEMENTS element-name

Indicates the element(s) to be deleted. Code the required syntax and

enter the appropriate element name; up to 10 characters are allowed.
In addition, you can use a name mask with the element name.

THROUGH (THRU) element-name

Indicates that a range of elements should be deleted, beginning with

the element coded in the DELETE ELEMENTS statement, up to and
including the element specified in this statement. You can use a name
mask with the element name.
FROM ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM sys-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

The FROM clause indicates the location of the element being deleted.
Endevor uses both the FROM clause in an action and any preceding
SET FROM clause to determine the "from" criteria for that action.
■ A FROM clause in an action overrides values in a SET FROM
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET FROM clause contains values that are not included in
the FROM clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET FROM statement, in Chapter 3, "Set

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

You must specify an environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage.

The environment name must be explicit. You can use a name mask
with the system, subsystem, type, and stage. The stage specification
can be either one of the following:
■ STAGE ID—Enter a single alphanumeric stage identifier.
■ STAGE NUMBER—Enter either 1 or 2.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-25

4.7 The Delete Statement

WHERE

Use WHERE clauses to further qualify element selection criteria.

Endevor uses both the WHERE clause in an action and any preceding
SET WHERE clause to determine the "where" criteria for that action.
■ A WHERE clause in an action overrides values in a SET WHERE
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET WHERE clause contains values that are not included in
the WHERE clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET WHERE statement, in Chapter 3, "Set,

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

WHERE CCID OF ccid —Limits the processing to those elements that

match one of the supplied CCIDs. You can use a name mask in this
field.
■ CURRENT—Tells Endevor to look through the CCID fields in the
MCF (Master Control File) to find a specified CCID(s). This is the
default.
■ ALL—Tells Endevor to search both the Master Control File and the
SOURCE DELTA levels for a specified CCID(s). If you have ACM,
Endevor also searches the COMPONENT LIST DELTA levels for
the specified CCID(s).
■ RETRIEVE—Tells Endevor to use the CCID in the Master Control
File RETRIEVE CCID field.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one CCID,
you can specify multiple CCIDs by enclosing the CCIDs with
parentheses and separating them with commas. The CCIDs may
extend over multiple lines if necessary.

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE CCID OF CURRENT (PROJ1, PROJ2, PROJ4)
Example 2: WHERE CCID OF ALL (PROJV)

WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP EQ/= group name—This clause allows

you to select elements according to a specified processor group. You
can use a name mask when specifying the processor group name.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one

processor group, you can specify multiple distinct processor group
selectors by enclosing the processor groups with parentheses and
separating them with commas. The processor groups may extend over
multiple lines if necessary.

4-26 SCL Reference Guide

 4.7 The Delete Statement

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBVS, COBII)
Example 2: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBV)

OPTIONS

OPTIONS clauses allow you to further specify action requests.

CCID ccid/COMMENT comment—You can enter a 1- to 12- character

CCID and/or a 1- to 40-character comment.

CCIDs and/or comments may be required. If you do not provide a

required CCID and/or comment, the DELETE action fails.

ONLY COMPONENTS—Applicable for Endevor ACM users only.

Indicates whether you want to delete both the element component list
and the element, or the element component list only. Y (yes—delete
just the element component list) or N (no—delete the element as well
as the element component list).

OVERRIDE SIGNOUT—If the element has been signed out to a

person other than yourself, you must code this option in order to
perform this action. This option updates the SIGNOUT ID at the
appropriate stage with the user ID of the person performing the
override. Use OVERRIDE SIGNOUT with caution to avoid regressing
changes made by another user.

4.7.3 Example of Delete Action SCL

The following is an example of DELETE SCL. This SCL deletes an
element from Stage 2. The signout will be overridden, if necessary.
DELETE ELEMENT 'PAYRPT3'
FROM ENVIRONMENT 'PROD'
SYSTEM 'PAYROLL'
SUBSYSTEM 'REPORTS'
TYPE 'COBOL'
STAGE NUMBER 2
OPTIONS CCID REQ#4334
COMMENT 'DELETE AN OBSOLETE PAYROLL PROGRAM'
OVERRIDE SIGNOUT .

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-27

4.7 The Delete Statement

4.8 The Generate Statement

4.8.1 Overview
The GENERATE statement executes the generate processor for the
current level of an element, in either Stage 1 or Stage 2.

4.8.2 Syntax
──GENerate ELEment──element-name──┬───────────────────────────┬──FROm─────────
└─┬─THRough─┬──element-name─┘
└─THRu────┘
──ENVironment──env-name──SYStem──sys-name──SUBsystem──subsys-name──────────────
──TYPe──type-name──┬─STAge──stage-id────────┬──────────────────────────────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘
──┬───────────────────────────┬────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─WHEre──¤──┬──────────┬──¤─┘
├─┤ CCID ├─┤
└─┤ PRO ├──┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──.────────────────
└─OPTion──¤──┬─────────────────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─CCId──ccid──────────────────────────┤
├─COMment──comment────────────────────┤
├─OVErride SIGNOut────────────────────┤
│ ┌─SEArch───┐ │
├─COPyback──┴─NOSearch─┴──────────────┤
└─PROcessor GROup──┬─EQ─┬──group name─┘
└─=──┘
CCID:
┌─EQual─┐ ┌─,────┐
├──CCId──┬──────────────────┬──┼───────┼──(─── ─ccid─┴──)────────────────────────┤
│ ┌─CURrent──┐ │ └─=─────┘
└─OF──┼─ALL──────┼─┘
└─RETrieve─┘
PRO:
├──PROcessor GROup──┬─EQ─┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
└─=──┘

4.8.2.1 Syntax Rules

GENERATE ELEMENTS element-name

Indicates the element(s) to be generated. Code the required syntax and

enter the appropriate element name; up to 10 characters are allowed.
In addition, you can use a name mask with the element name .

THROUGH (THRU) element-name

Indicates that a range of elements should be generated, beginning with

the element coded in the GENERATE ELEMENTS statement, up to and
including the element specified in this statement. You can use a name
mask with the element name.

4-28 SCL Reference Guide

 4.8 The Generate Statement

FROM ENVIRONMENT env-name

SYSTEM system-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

The FROM clause indicates the location of the element being

generated. Endevor uses both the FROM clause in an action and any
preceding SET FROM clause to determine the "from" criteria for that
action
■ A FROM clause in an action overrides values in a SET FROM
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET FROM clause contains values that are not included in
the FROM clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET FROM statement, in Chapter 3, "Set

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

You must specify an environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage.

The environment name must be explicit. You can use a name mask
with the system, subsystem, type, and stage. The stage specification
can be either one of the following:
■ STAGE ID—Enter a single alphanumeric stage identifier.
■ STAGE NUMBER—Enter either 1 or 2.

If you use a name mask, Endevor begins searching for the specified
element(s) in Stage 1 of the current environment, and generates the
first element that matches the specified element name, regardless of its
location, version or level.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-29

4.8 The Generate Statement

WHERE

Use WHERE clauses to further qualify element selection criteria.

Endevor uses both the WHERE clause in an action and any preceding
SET WHERE clause to determine the "where" criteria for that action.
■ A WHERE clause in an action overrides values in a SET WHERE
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET WHERE clause contains values that are not included in
the WHERE clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET WHERE statement, in Chapter 3, "Set,

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

WHERE CCID OF ccid —Limits the processing to those elements that

match one of the supplied CCIDs. You can use a name mask in this
field.
■ CURRENT—Tells Endevor to look through the CCID fields in the
MCF (Master Control File) to find a specified CCID(s). This is the
default.
■ ALL—Tells Endevor to search both the Master Control File and the
SOURCE DELTA levels for a specified CCID(s). If you have ACM,
Endevor also searches the COMPONENT LIST DELTA levels for
the specified CCID(s).
■ RETRIEVE—Tells Endevor to use the CCID in the Master Control
File's RETRIEVE CCID field.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one CCID,
you can specify multiple CCIDs by enclosing the CCIDs with
parentheses and separating them with commas. The CCIDs may
extend over multiple lines if necessary.

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE CCID OF CURRENT (PROJ1, PROJ2, PROJ4)
Example 2: WHERE CCID OF ALL (PROJV)

WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP EQ/= group name— This clause allows

you to select elements according to a specified processor group. You
can use a name mask when specifying the processor group name.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one

processor group, you can specify multiple distinct processor group
selectors by enclosing the processor groups with parentheses and
separating them with commas. The processor groups may extend over
multiple lines if necessary.

4-30 SCL Reference Guide

 4.8 The Generate Statement

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBVS, COBII)
Example 2: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBV)

OPTIONS

OPTIONS clauses allow to further specify an action request.

CCID ccid/COMMENT comment— You can enter a 1- to 12- character

CCID and/or a 1- to 40-character comment.

CCIDs and/or comments may be required. If you do not provide a

required CCID and/or comment, the GENERATE action fails.

When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a GENERATE action,

Endevor updates the CCID and/or COMMENT fields differently,
depending on whether you specify the GENERATE action with or
without the COPYBACK option.

When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a GENERATE action

without the COPYBACK option, Endevor uses this CCID and/or
comment to:
■ Set the generate CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
■ Set the last action CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
■ Set the component list delta CCID and/or COMMENT fields if
running the generate processor creates a change.

When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a GENERATE action

with the COPYBACK option, Endevor uses this CCID and/or
comment to:
■ Set the generate and component list delta CCID and/or
COMMENT fields.
■ Set the last action CCID and/or COMMENT fields.

Endevor also uses the CCID and comment associated with the
copied-back element to set the source and source delta CCID and/or
COMMENT fields when you generate that element using the
COPYBACK option.

COPYBACK—If you select this option, Endevor first copies the current
level of the element back to the FROM stage, then generates the
element.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-31

4.8 The Generate Statement

Endevor searches for the element first in the current environment, then
in other stages along the map. You can restrict the search to the
current environment by coding the NOSEARCH option.

If the element currently exists in the FROM stage, Endevor ignores the
COPYBACK option and simply generates the element.

SEARCH or NOSEARCH—This option is valid only when you have

selected the COPYBACK option. The SEARCH option tells Endevor to
look for the element to be generated with copyback along the map, if it
is not in the current environment.

Code NOSEARCH to restrict Endevor's search to the current

environment.

OVERRIDE SIGNOUT—If the element has been signed out to a

person other than yourself, you must code this option in order to
perform this action. This option updates the SIGNOUT ID at the
appropriate stage with the user ID of the person performing the
override. Use OVERRIDE SIGNOUT with caution to avoid regressing
changes made by another user.

PROCESSOR GROUP EQ/= group name—Select this option to specify

a predefined, named group of processors. If you do not specify a
processor group, Endevor defaults to the processor group last used for
this element.

4.8.3 Example of Generate SCL

The following is an example of GENERATE SCL. This SCL generates
COBOL program PAYRPT01 at Stage 1. The element will be fetched if
it does not already exist at Stage 1.
GENERATE ELEMENT 'PAYRPT17'
FROM ENVIRONMENT 'PROD'
SYSTEM 'PAYROLL'
SUBSYSTEM 'REPORTS'
TYPE COBOL
STAGE NUMBER 1
OPTIONS CCID REQ#4323
COMMENT 'REGENERATE WITH NEW COPY BOOKS'
COPYBACK
SEARCH .

4-32 SCL Reference Guide

 4.8 The Generate Statement

4.9 The List Statement

4.9.1 Overview
The LIST statement scans elements or members in the Master Control
File, an archive data set, or a library, and generates a list of
elements/members that meet your selection criteria. The LIST action is
available in batch only. The WHERE clause supplies the selection
criteria for the LIST action. It selects the elements based on content as
opposed to the names of the elements.

The LIST action searches for elements and/or members in a location

defined by the data you enter in the FROM clause. You can request a
LIST action from one of the following:
■ Endevor (Master Control File)
■ An archive data set
■ An external library

The processing involved is the same for each type of LIST request.
The clauses required, however, depend on the location being searched.
Similarly, the options available depend on the location of the element
or member. This section of the chapter addresses each type of LIST
request separately; the appropriate syntax is illustrated first, followed
by a complete discussion of the associated LIST action rules.

4.9.2 List from Endevor Statement

The LIST FROM Endevor statement generates a list of elements from
Endevor's Master Control File.

4.9.3 Syntax
──LISt ELEment──element-name──┬─THRough─┬──element-name──FROm──ENVironment──env-name─────
└─THRu────┘
──SYStem──sys-name──SUBsystem──subsys-name──TYPe──type-name───────────────────────────────
──┬─STAge──stage-id────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────
│ ┌─SYSOut────────────────────────────────────────┐ │
└─TO──┼─┬─FILe───┬──dd-name───────────────────────────┼─┘
│ └─DDName─┘ │
└─DSName──dataset-name──┬─────────────────────┬─┘
└─MEMber──member-name─┘
──WHEre──¤──┬─────────────────────┬──¤──┬──────────────────────────────────────────┬──────
├─┤ CCID ├────────────┤ └─BUIld──¤──┬─────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─┤ GENERATE ├────────┤ │ ┌─&&Action────┐ │
├─┤ SPEC ├────────────┤ ├─ACTion──┴─action-name─┴─┤
└─┤ PROCESSOR GROUP ├─┘ │ ┌─CURrent─┐ │
├─LEVel──┼─NONe────┼──────┤
│ └─ACTual──┘ │
└─WITh COMponent──────────┘

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-33

4.9 The List Statement

──┬──────────────────────────────────────────────┬──.────────────────────────────────────
└─OPTion──¤──┬────────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─REPlace member─────────────┤
├─DETail REPort──────────────┤
├─SHOw TEXt──┬─────────────┬─┤
│ └─PLUs n line─┘ │
│ ┌─NOSearch─┐ │
└─┴─SEArch───┴───────────────┘
CCId:
┌─EQual─┐ ┌─,────┐
├──┬──────────────────┬──┼───────┼──(─── ─ccid─┴──)─────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ ┌─CURrent──┐ │ └─=─────┘
└─OF──┼─ALL──────┼─┘
└─RETrieve─┘
GENERATE:
├──GENerate──┬─FAIled──────────────────────────────────────────────────┬───────────────────┤
│ ┌─EQual─┐ │
├─DATe──┴─=─────┴──date──┬──────────────────────────────┬─┤
│ └─TIMe──┬──────────────┬──date─┘ │
│ │ ┌─EQual─┐ │ │
│ └─┴───────┴──=─┘ │
├─┤ FROM ├────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
├─┤ THROUGH ├─────────────────────────────────────────────┤
└─┤ FROM-THROUGH ├────────────────────────────────────────┘
FROM:
┌─EQual─┐
├──FROM──DATe──┼───────┼──date──┬───────────────────────┬──────────────────────────────────┤
└─=─────┘ │ ┌─EQual─┐ │
└─TIMe──┴─=─────┴──time─┘
THRough:
┌─EQual─┐
├──┬─────────────┬──DATe──┼───────┼──date──┬─────────────────┬─────────────────────────────┤
└─┬─THRough─┬─┘ └─=─────┘ │ ┌─EQual─┐ │
└─THRu────┘ └─TIMe──┼───────┼─┘
├─=─────┤
└─time──┘
FROM-THROUGH:
┌─EQual─┐ ┌─EQual─┐
├──FROM──DATe──┴─=─────┴──date──┬───────────────────────┬──┬─THRough─┬──DATe──┼───────┼────
│ ┌─EQual─┐ │ └─THRu────┘ └─=─────┘
└─TIMe──┼───────┼──time─┘
└─=─────┘
──date──┬───────────────────────┬─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ ┌─EQual─┐ │
└─TIMe──┼───────┼──time─┘
└─=─────┘
SPEC:
├──┬─TEXt──┬─text-spec─────────────────────────────┬─┬─────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │ ┌─,─────────┐ ┌─,─────────┐ │ │
│ └── ─text-spec─┴──┬─AND─┬─── ─text-spec─┴─┘ │
│ └─OR──┘ │
└─ACM──┬─comp-spec─────────────────────────────┬──┘
│ ┌─,─────────┐ ┌─,─────────┐ │
└── ─comp-spec─┴──┬─AND─┬─── ─comp-spec─┴─┘
└─OR──┘
PROCESSOR GROUP:
┌─EQuAL─┐ ┌─,──────────┐
├──PROcessor GROup──┼───────┼──(─── ─group name─┴──)────────────────────────────────────────┤
└─=─────┘

Where text-spec is replaced as necessary with:

──┬───────────────────────┬──text──┬─────────────────────────────────┬──────────────────
│ ┌─EQual───┐ │ └─┬─────────┬──start-pos──end-pos─┘
└─DOEs NOT──┼─────────┼─┘ └─columns─┘
├─CONTain─┤
└─=───────┘

and comp-spec is replaced as necessary with:

4-34 SCL Reference Guide

 4.9 The List Statement

┌─INPut─────┐
──┬─────────┬──┼───────────┼──COMPonent──┬───────────────────────────┬───────────────────
└─RELated─┘ ├─OUTput────┤ └─┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬─┘
├─PROcessor─┤ └─DOEs NOT─┘ ├─CONTain─┤
└─ALL───────┘ ├─EQ──────┤
└─=───────┘
──comp-name──¤──┬─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──¤────────────
├─┬─THRough─┬──comp-name──────────────────────────────────┤
│ └─THRu────┘ │
├─ENVironment──env-name──¤──┬────────────────────────┬──¤─┤
│ ├─SYStem──sys-name───────┤ │
│ ├─SUBsystem──subsys-name─┤ │
│ ├─TYPe──type-name────────┤ │
│ ├─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┤ │
│ ├─VERsion──version───────┤ │
│ └─LEVel──level───────────┘ │
├─┬─FILe───┬──dd-name─────────────────────────────────────┤
│ └─DDName─┘ │
└─DSNname──dataset-name───────────────────────────────────┘
──RELated──┬─────────────────┬──COMponent─────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─OBJect──COMment─┘
──┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──.────────────
└─┬──────────┬──┬─────────┬──text──┬─────────────────────────────────┬─┘
└─DOEs NOT─┘ ├─CONTain─┤ └─┬─────────┬──start-pos──end pos─┘
├─EQ──────┤ └─columns─┘
└─=───────┘

4.9.3.1 Syntax Rules

LIST ELEMENT element-name

Indicates the element(s) to be listed. Code the required syntax and

enter the appropriate element name; up to 10 characters are allowed.
In addition, you can use a name mask with the element name.

THROUGH (THRU) element-name

Indicates that a range of elements should be listed, beginning with the

element coded in the LIST ELEMENT clause, up to and including the
element specified in this statement. You can use a name mask with
the element name. If you code the THROUGH clause, you cannot
enter a member name (in the TO clause).
FROM ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM system-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

The FROM clause indicates the location of the element to be listed.

Endevor uses both the FROM clause in an action and any preceding
SET FROM clause to determine the "from" criteria for that action.
■ A FROM clause in an action overrides values in a SET FROM
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET FROM clause contains values that are not included in
the FROM clause, Endevor uses these values.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-35

4.9 The List Statement

See the description of the SET FROM statement, in Chapter 3, "Set

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

You must specify an environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage.

The environment name must be explicit. You can use a name mask
with the system, subsystem, type, and stage. The stage specification
can be either one of the following:
■ STAGE ID—Enter a single alphanumeric stage identifier.
■ STAGE NUMBER—Enter either 1 or 2.

TO

The TO clause indicates where the element is to be listed. Endevor

uses both the TO clause in an action and any preceding SET TO clause
to determine the "to" criteria for that action.
■ A TO clause in an action overrides values in a SET TO clause that
precedes the action.
■ If the SET TO clause contains values that are not included in the
TO clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET TO statement, in Chapter 3, "Set Clear,

and EOF Statements," for more information.

TO SYSOUT—SYSOUT is the default TO location. If you do not

provide a TO clause, and no SET TO information has been coded,
Endevor writes the action cards to the Execution Report. The
Execution Report appears immediately after the LIST request and
cannot be edited.

TO FILE (DDNAME) dd-name or DSNAME dataset- name— You can

tell Endevor to write action cards to both the Execution Report and an
external data set by providing a file name (DDname) or a data set
name; if you enter a FILE or DDNAME, be sure the appropriate JCL is
coded. Use this option if you want to edit the action cards.

TO MEMBER member-name— Enter a member name (up to 10

characters). This clause is valid only if you are not specifying a
sequential file.
■ Endevor ignores a member specification if you have coded the TO
SYSOUT option.
■ The action fails if you code a member name along with a file
(DDname) or data set name that is sequential.

4-36 SCL Reference Guide

 4.9 The List Statement

If you are using PDSs and do not provide a member name, Endevor
assigns a temporary name of TEMPNAME. If you wish to use the
temporary naming capability, do not code multiple list requests to the
same external data set.

If you are using a PDS and have multiple list statements with only one
member name on a SET statement, then all lists go to same member
name and only first LIST results are available.

WHERE

Use WHERE clauses to further qualify element selection criteria.

Endevor uses both the WHERE clause in an action and any preceding
SET WHERE clause to determine the "where" criteria for that action.
■ A WHERE clause in an action overrides values in a SET WHERE
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET WHERE clause contains values that are not included in
the WHERE clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET WHERE statement, in Chapter 3, "Set,

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

WHERE CCID OF ccid — Limits the list to those elements that match
one of the supplied CCIDs. You can use a name mask in this field.
■ CURRENT—Tells Endevor to look through the CCID fields in the
MCF (Master Control File) to find a specified CCID(s). This is the
default.
■ ALL—Tells Endevor to search both the Master Control File and the
SOURCE DELTA levels for a specified CCID(s). If you have ACM,
Endevor also searches the COMPONENT LIST DELTA levels for
the specified CCID(s).
■ RETRIEVE—Tells Endevor to use the CCID in the Master Control
File RETRIEVE CCID field.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one CCID,
you can specify multiple CCIDs by enclosing the CCIDs with
parentheses and separating them with commas. The CCIDs may
extend over multiple lines if necessary.

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE CCID OF CURRENT (PROJ1, PROJ2, PROJ4)
Example 2: WHERE CCID OF ALL (PROJV)

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-37

4.9 The List Statement

WHERE GENERATE—This clause allows you to select elements based

on the date and, optionally, time that an element was generated.
There are five forms for this clause.
■ WHERE GENERATE FAILED—Tells Endevor to list only those
elements for which the generate processor failed.
■ WHERE GENERATE DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm ]—Tells
Endevor to list only those elements with this date, and optionally,
time stamp.
■ WHERE GENERATE FROM DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm ]
—Tells Endevor to list all elements with a date and, optionally,
time stamp on or after the specified date and time stamps.
■ WHERE GENERATE THROUGH DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME
hh:mm ]—Tells Endevor to list all elements with a date and,
optionally, time stamp earlier than and including the specified date
and time stamp.
■ WHERE GENERATE FROM DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm ]
THROUGH DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm]—Tells Endevor to
list only those elements with date, and optionally, time stamps
within the specified range. If you enter a time, you must enter the
date with it.

WHERE TEXT text spec—Limits the list to elements that contain (or do
not contain) one or more specified 1- to 70-character text strings.

Examples:

WHERE TEXT 'WO9-LINKAGE'

In this example, Endevor lists all elements containing the text string
WO9-LINKAGE.

WHERE TEXT ((EQ 'COPY COPY005' COLUMN 8 40) AND EQ

'COPY COPY010' COLUMN 8 40))

In this example, Endevor lists all element containing the text strings
COPY COPY005 and COPY COPY010 between columns 8 and 40 of the
element source.

WHERE TEXT DOES NOT CONTAIN 'REMARKS' COLUMN 8 15

In this example, Endevor lists all elements that do not contain the text
string REMARKS between columns 8 and 15 of the element source.

WHERE TEXT (('M605SUB' OR 'M607SUB') AND DOES NOT

CONTAIN 'M606SUB')

4-38 SCL Reference Guide

 4.9 The List Statement

In this example, Endevor lists all elements that contain either the text
string M605SUB or the text string M607SUB and do not contain the
text string M606SUB.

The WHERE TEXT EQUAL clause cannot be used with the WHERE
ACM clauses.

WHERE [ACM] comp spec—Limits the list to component lists

containing the designated 1- to 10-character component name.
Wildcards are acceptable in the component name specification.

WHERE INPUT COMPONENT—is the default. It tells Endevor to list

both input components and related input components matching your
entry.

WHERE RELATED INPUT COMPONENT—Tells Endevor to list only

related input components matching your entry.

WHERE OUTPUT COMPONENT—Tells Endevor to list both output

components and related output components matching your criteria.

WHERE RELATED OUTPUT COMPONENT—Tells Endevor to list

only related output components matching your entry.

WHERE PROCESSOR COMPONENT—Tells Endevor to list only

processor components matching the criteria.

WHERE ALL COMPONENT—Tells Endevor to list matches within all

three types of components.

WHERE RELATED OBJECT COMPONENT—Tells Endevor to list

only objects matching your entry.

WHERE RELATED COMMENT COMPONENT—Tells Endevor to list

comments matching your entry. Note that this applies only to
comments that have been added to the component list by the
CONRELE utility in a processor step. For more information on the
CONRELE utility, see the Extended Processors Guide

You can further specify the component using the following clauses.

THROUGH (THRU) comp-name—Tells Endevor to list elements

containing one in a specific range of 1- to 10-character component
names. The range begins with the component name coded in the
WHERE COMPONENTS clause, and encompasses all components up
to and including the component specified in this clause. Wildcards are
acceptable in the component name specification.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-39

4.9 The List Statement

ENVIRONMENT env name—Tells Endevor to list elements with

components located in the specified environment. If you provide an
environment name you must also provide the following:
SYSTEM—1 to 8 characters
SUBSYSTEM—1 to 8 characters
TYPE—1 to 8 characters
STAGE NUMBER—either 1 or 2

VERSION version—Tells Endevor to list elements containing

components with a specific version number. Acceptable values are
1-99. The version number of the component may differ from the
version number of the element with which it is associated.

LEVEL level—Tells Endevor to list elements containing components

with a specific level number. Acceptable values are 00-99. The level
number of the component may differ from the level number of the
element with which it is associated.

FILE (DDNAME) dd-name—Tells Endevor to list elements whose:

■ Input components originated from the specified DDname;
■ Output components were written to the specified DDname;
■ Components were produced by a processor step specified by and
associated with the designated DDname.

DSNAME data set name—Tells Endevor to list elements whose:

■ Input components originated from the specified data set;
■ Output components were written to the specified data set;
■ Components were produced by a processor step specified by and
associated with the designated data set.

WHERE ACM comp spec {AND/OR} comp spec—Allows you to

provide compound component selection criteria. See the previous
section for option descriptions. The WHERE ACM clauses cannot be
used with the WHERE TEXT clause.

WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP group name—This clause allows you

to select elements according to a specified processor group. You can
use a name mask when specifying the processor group name.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one

processor group, you can specify multiple distinct processor group
selectors by enclosing the processor groups with parentheses and
separating them with commas. The processor groups may extend over
multiple lines if necessary.

4-40 SCL Reference Guide

 4.9 The List Statement

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBVS, COBII)
Example 2: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBV)

BUILD

Indicates specific information to be applied to each action statement

generated by LIST. The data in this clause assists in building the SCL
statements (and builds additional SCL statements if you enter WITH
COMPONENTS) that result from your LIST request.
Note: You cannot build a generate with copyback request using LIST.
This is because LIST can only build an action for an element when the
element exists in the FROM stage.

If you do not enter BUILD information, Endevor looks for a SET

BUILD clause containing the appropriate information. (See the
description of SET BUILD, in Chapter 3, "Set, Clear, and EOF
Statements, for additional coding details.) If a SET BUILD clause has
not been coded, the system defaults to &&ACTION for BUILD
ACTION and to CURRENT for BUILD LEVEL.

The WITH COMPONENTS clause is optional within the BUILD clause;

if it is not coded here or in the SET BUILD statement, component
information is not provided in the list.

BUILD ACTION—Determines the action that appears in the LIST

action syntax for the specified element. You can enter either a specific
action name or &&ACTION, which indicates that a specific action will
be designated for this element at a later time. This action can be
entered manually or using the SET ACTION statement.
■ BUILD LEVEL—Indicates whether you want the version and level
of the specified element to appear on the action cards generated by
the LIST request:
■ CURRENT—Tells Endevor to include the current version and level
of elements in LIST actions. This is the default if the WHERE
COMPONENTS SPEC clause has not been coded for the action, or
no component list exists (Endevor ACM is not installed). If the
where component spec clause has been coded for the action, the
default is ACTUAL.
■ NONE—Tells Endevor not to list the current version and level for
the element.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-41

4.9 The List Statement

■ ACTUAL—valid only if ACM is installed. Tells Endevor to

include the level of the component as recorded in the component
list in LIST action statements, rather than the current level of the
element as recorded in the Master Control File. This is the default
if a WHERE COMPONENTS SPEC clause has been coded for the
action.

BUILD WITH COMPONENTS—Indicates that action cards should be

generated for every input component that is associated with the
specified element. BUILD WITH COMPONENTS pertains to the
Endevor ACM product only, and must be used in conjunction with the
WHERE ACM clause (explained earlier in this section).

OPTIONS

OPTIONS clauses allow you to further specify action requests.

REPLACE MEMBER—When you specify a PDS and member name in

the TO clause, list requests fail if the member already exists. Use the
REPLACE MEMBER option if you want to replace the existing member
in the TO location library.

DETAIL REPORT—By default, in the Execution Report, Endevor lists

only those elements matching the selection criteria you specify. If you
select the DETAIL REPORT option, every element searched is listed in
the report—whether or not a match is found.

SHOW TEXT [ PLUS n LINES ]—This option allows you to print the
line of source code that contains a specified text string, plus a
designated number of lines of code before and after the text string.

You must code the WHERE TEXT clause if you use the SHOW TEXT
option. Otherwise, you receive a syntax error.

SEARCH or NOSEARCH—The SEARCH option tells Endevor to look

for and list all occurrences of the element on the map. The default is
NOSEARCH. Code NOSEARCH to restrict Endevor's list to the
current environment.

4-42 SCL Reference Guide

 4.9 The List Statement

4.9.4 List from Archive Data Set

The LIST FROM ARCHIVE DATA SET statement generates a list of
elements from an archive data set.

4.9.5 Syntax

──LISt ELEment──element-name──┬───────────────────────────┬──FROm─────────────
└─┬─THRough─┬──element-name─┘
└─THRu────┘
──┬─FILe───┬──dd-name──┬───────────────┬──ENVironment──env-name────────────────
└─DDName─┘ └─SITe──site-id─┘
──SYStem──sys-name──SUBsystem──subsys-name──TYPe──type-name────────────────────
──STAge NUMber──stage-no───────────────────────────────────────────────────────
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬────────────────────
│ ┌─SYSOut────────────────────────────────────────┐ │
└─TO──┼─┬─FILe───┬──dd-name───────────────────────────┼─┘
│ └─DDName─┘ │
└─DSName──dataset-name──┬─────────────────────┬─┘
└─MEMber──member-name─┘
──┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────┬─────────────────────────
└─WHEre──¤──┬─────────────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─┤ CCID ├────────────────────────┤
├─┤ PRO ├─────────────────────────┤
└─ARChive──┬─┤ DATE ├───────────┬─┘
├─┤ FROM ├───────────┤
├─┤ THROUGH ├────────┤
└─┤ FROM - THROUGH ├─┘
──┬────────────────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────────────────
│ ┌─&&Action────┐ │
└─BUIld──ACTion──┴─action-name─┴─┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────┬──.────────────────────────
└─OPTion──¤──┬─────────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─REPlace member──────────────┤
├─DETail REPort───────────────┤
└─SHOw TEXt──┬──────────────┬─┘
└─PLUs n lines─┘
CCID:
┌─,────┐
├──CCId──┬─EQ─┬──(─── ─ccid─┴──)─────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
└─=──┘
DATE:
├──DATe──┬─EQ─┬──date──┬────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────────┤
└─=──┘ └─TIMe──┬─EQ─┬──time─┘
└─=──┘
FROM:
├──FROm──DATe──┬─EQ─┬──date──┬────────────────────┬─────────────────────────────┤
└─=──┘ └─TIMe──┬─EQ─┬──time─┘
└─=──┘
THROUGH:
├──┬─THRough─┬──DATe──┬─EQ─┬──date──┬────────────────────┬──────────────────────┤
└─THRu────┘ └─=──┘ └─TIMe──┬─EQ─┬──time─┘
└─=──┘
PRO:
┌─,──────────┐
├──PROcessor GROup──┬─EQ─┬──(─── ─group name─┴──)────────────────────────────────┤
└─=──┘

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-43

4.9 The List Statement

4.9.5.1 Syntax Rules

LIST ELEMENT element-name

Indicates the element(s) to be listed. Code the required syntax and

enter the appropriate element name; up to 10 characters are allowed.
In addition, you can use a name mask with the element name.

THROUGH (THRU) element-name

Indicates that a range of elements should be listed, beginning with the

element coded in the LIST ELEMENT clause, up to and including the
element specified in this statement. You can use a name mask with
the element name. If you code the THROUGH clause, you cannot
enter a member name (in the TO clause).
FROM FILE (DDNAME)dd-name SITE site-id
ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM system-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

The FROM clause indicates the location of the element to be listed.

Endevor uses both the FROM clause in an action and any preceding
SET FROM clause to determine the "from" criteria for that action.
■ A FROM clause in an action overrides values in a SET FROM
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET FROM clause contains values that are not included in
the FROM clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET FROM statement, in Chapter 3, "Set

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

You must code at least a FILE or DDNAME for this request, indicating
the archive data set to be searched for the specified element. Enter this
information first when coding the syntax.

You must specify an environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage

number (either 1 or 2). The environment name must be explicit. You
can use a name mask with the system, subsystem, type, and stage.

Entering a site ID is optional. This field further defines the location of

the element to be listed.

4-44 SCL Reference Guide

 4.9 The List Statement

TO

The TO clause indicates where the element is to be listed. Endevor

uses both the TO clause in an action and any preceding SET TO clause
to determine the "to" criteria for that action.
■ A TO clause in an action overrides values in a SET TO clause that
precedes the action.
■ If the SET TO clause contains values that are not included in the
TO clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET TO statement, in Chapter 3, "Set Clear,

and EOF Statements," for more information.

TO SYSOUT—SYSOUT is the default TO location. If you do not

provide a TO clause, and no SET TO information has been coded,
Endevor writes the action cards to the Execution Report. The
Execution Report appears immediately after the LIST action request
and cannot be edited.

TO FILE (DDNAME) dd-name or DSNAME dataset-name—You can

tell Endevor to write action cards to both the Execution Report and an
external data set by providing a file name (DDname) or a data set
name; if you enter a FILE or DDNAME, be sure the appropriate JCL is
coded. Use this option if you want to edit the action cards.

TO MEMBER member-name—Enter a member name (up to 10

characters). This clause is valid only if you are not specifying a
sequential file.
■ Endevor ignores a member specification if you have coded the TO
SYSOUT option.
■ The action fails if you code a member name along with a file
(DDname) or data set name that is sequential.

If you are using PDSs and do not provide a member name, Endevor
assigns a temporary name of TEMPNAME. If you wish to use the
temporary naming capability, do not code multiple list requests to the
same external data set.

If you are using a PDS and have multiple list statements with only one
member name on a SET statement, then all lists go to same member
name and only first LIST results are available.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-45

4.9 The List Statement

WHERE

Use WHERE clauses to further qualify element selection criteria.

Endevor uses both the WHERE clause in an action and any preceding
SET WHERE clause to determine the "where" criteria for that action.
■ A WHERE clause in an action overrides values in a SET WHERE
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET WHERE clause contains values that are not included in
the WHERE clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET WHERE statement, in Chapter 3, "Set,

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

WHERE CCID ccid —Limits the list to those elements that match one
of the supplied CCIDs. You can use a name mask in this field.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one CCID,
you can specify multiple CCIDs by enclosing the CCIDs with
parentheses and separating them with commas. The CCIDs may
extend over multiple lines if necessary.

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE CCID EQ PROJV
Example 2: WHERE CCID (PROJ1, PROJ2, PROJ4)

WHERE ARCHIVE—This clause allows you to select elements based

on the date and, optionally, time that an element was archived. There
are four possible forms for this clause:
■ WHERE ARCHIVE DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm ]
■ This clause tells Endevor to list only those elements with this
archive date, and optionally, time stamp.
■ WHERE ARCHIVE FROM DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm ]
■ This clause tells Endevor to list all elements with an archive date
and, optionally, time stamp on or after the specified date and time
stamps.

4-46 SCL Reference Guide

 4.9 The List Statement

■ WHERE ARCHIVE THROUGH DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm]

■ This clause tells Endevor to list all elements with an archive date
and, optionally, time stamp earlier than and including the specified
date and time stamp.
■ WHERE ARCHIVE FROM DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm ]
THROUGH DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm ]
■ This clause tells Endevor to list only those elements with archive
date, and optionally, time stamps within the specified range. If
you enter a time, you must enter the date with it.

WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP group name—This clause allows you to

select elements according to a specified processor group. You can use
a name mask when specifying the processor group name.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one

processor group, you can specify multiple distinct processor group
selectors by enclosing the processor groups with parentheses and
separating them with commas. The processor groups may extend over
multiple lines if necessary.

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBVS, COBII)
Example 2: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBV)

BUILD ACTION&&ACTION

action-name

Determines the action that appears in the LIST action syntax for the
specified element. If you do not enter required BUILD information
here, Endevor looks for a SET BUILD clause containing the appropriate
information. (See the description of SET BUILD, in Chapter 3, "Set,
Clear, and EOF Statements, for additional coding information.) If a
SET BUILD clause has not been coded, the system defaults to
&&ACTION.

You can enter a specific action (for example, ADD or MOVE) in this
clause or the variable &&ACTION. &&ACTION indicates that a
specific action will be designated for this element at a later time. This
action can be entered manually or using the SET ACTION statement.
(See the description of SET ACTION, in Chapter 3, "Set Clear, and EOF
Statements," for additional coding information.)

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-47

4.9 The List Statement

OPTIONS

OPTIONS clauses allow you to further specify action requests.

REPLACE MEMBER—When you specify a PDS and member name in

the TO clause, LIST requests fail if the member already exists. Use the
REPLACE MEMBER option if you want to replace the existing member
in the TO location library.

DETAIL REPORT—By default, in the Execution Report, Endevor lists

only those elements matching the selection criteria you specify. If you
select the DETAIL REPORT option, every element searched is listed in
the report—whether or not a match is found.

SHOW TEXT [ PLUS n LINES ]—This option allows you to print the
line of source code that contains a specified text string, plus a
designated number of lines of code before and after the text string.

4-48 SCL Reference Guide

 4.9 The List Statement

4.9.6 List Members (List from External Library)

The LIST MEMBER statement generates a list of elements from an
external library.

4.9.7 Syntax
──LISt MEMber──member-name──┬──────────────────────────┬──FROm────────────────
└─┬─THRough─┬──member-name─┘
└─THRu────┘
──┬─┬─FILe───┬──dd-name──┬─────────────────────────────────────────────────────
│ └─DDName─┘ │
└─DSName──dataset-name─┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬────────────────────
│ ┌─SYSout────────────────────────────────────────┐ │
└─TO──┼─┬─FILe───┬──dd-name───────────────────────────┼─┘
│ └─DDName─┘ │
└─DSName──dataset-name──┬─────────────────────┬─┘
└─MEMber──member-name─┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬────────
└─WHEre TEXt──┬─text-spec─────────────────────────────────────────┬─┘
│ ┌─,─────────┐ ┌─,─────────┐ │
└─(─── ─text-spec─┴──)──┬─AND─┬──(─── ─text-spec─┴──)─┘
└─OR──┘
──┬───────────────────────────────┬────────────────────────────────────────────
│ ┌─&&Action────┐ │
└─BUIld ACTion──┴─action-name─┴─┘
──┬──────────────────────────────────────────────┬──.─────────────────────────
└─OPTion──¤──┬────────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─REPlace member─────────────┤
├─DETail REPort──────────────┤
└─SHOw TEXt──┬─────────────┬─┘
└─PLUs n line─┘

──┬───────────────────────┬──text──┬────────────────────────────────┬────────
│ ┌─EQual───┐ │ └─┬────────┬──start-pos──end-pos─┘
└─DOEs NOT──┼─────────┼─┘ └─column─┘
├─CONTain─┤
└─=───────┘

4.9.7.1 Syntax Rules

LIST MEMBER member-name

Indicates the member(s) to be listed. Code the required syntax and

enter the appropriate member name; up to 10 characters are allowed.
In addition, you can use a name mask with the member name.

THROUGH (THRU) member-name

Indicates that a range of members should be listed, beginning with the

member coded in the LIST MEMBER clause, up to and including the
member specified in this statement. You can use a name mask with
the member name. If you code the THROUGH clause, you cannot
enter a member name in the TO clause.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-49

4.9 The List Statement

FROM FILE (DDNAME) dd-name

DSNAME dataset-name

The FROM clause indicates the location of the member being listed.
Endevor uses both the FROM clause in an action and any preceding
SET FROM clause to determine the "from" criteria for that action.
■ A FROM clause in an action overrides values in a SET FROM
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET FROM clause contains values that are not included in
the FROM clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET FROM statement, in Chapter 3, "Set

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

If you enter a FILE or DDNAME, be sure the appropriate JCL is coded.

The data set you specify in the FROM clause cannot be a load module
library or a sequential file.

TO

The TO clause indicates where the element is to be listed. Endevor

uses both the TO clause in an action and any preceding SET TO clause
to determine the "to" criteria for that action.
■ A TO clause in an action overrides values in a SET TO clause that
precedes the action.
■ If the SET TO clause contains values that are not included in the
TO clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET TO statement, in Chapter 3, "Set Clear,

and EOF Statements," for more information.

TO SYSOUT—SYSOUT is the default TO location. If you do not

provide a TO clause, and no SET TO information has been coded,
Endevor writes the action cards to the Execution Report. The
Execution Report appears immediately after the LIST action request
and cannot be edited.

TO FILE (DDNAME)dd-name or DSNAME dataset- name—You can

tell Endevor to write action cards to both the Execution Report and an
external data set by providing a file name (DDname) or a data set
name; if you enter a FILE or DDNAME, be sure the appropriate JCL is
coded. Use this option if you want to edit the action cards.

4-50 SCL Reference Guide

 4.9 The List Statement

TO MEMBER member-name—Enter a member name (up to 10

characters). This clause is valid only if you are not specifying a
sequential file.
■ Endevor ignores a member specification if you have coded the TO
SYSOUT option.
■ The action fails if you code a member name along with a file
(DDname) or data set name that is sequential.

If you are using PDSs and do not provide a member name, Endevor
assigns a temporary name of TEMPNAME. If you wish to use the
temporary naming capability, do not code multiple list requests to the
same external data set.

If you are using a PDS and have multiple list statements with only one
member name on a SET statement, then all lists go to same member
name and only first LIST results are available.

WHERE

Use WHERE clauses to further qualify element selection criteria.

Endevor uses both the WHERE clause in an action and any preceding
SET WHERE clause to determine the "where" criteria for that action.
■ A WHERE clause in an action overrides values in a SET WHERE
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET WHERE clause contains values that are not included in
the WHERE clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET WHERE statement, in Chapter 3, "Set,

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

WHERE TEXT text spec—Limits the list to elements that contain (or
do not contain) one or more specified 1- to 70-character text strings.
Examples:
WHERE TEXT 'WO9-LINKAGE'

In this example, Endevor lists all elements containing the text string
WO9-LINKAGE.

Where TEXT ('COPY COPY005' COLUMN 7 41 AND

'COPY COPY010' COLUMN 7 41)

In this example, Endevor lists all elements containing the text strings
COPY COPY005 and COPY COPY010 between columns 7 and 41 of the
element source.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-51

4.9 The List Statement

WHERE TEXT DOES NOT CONTAIN 'REMARKS' COLUMN 8 15

In this example, Endevor lists all elements that do not contain the text
string REMARKS between columns 8 and 15 of the element source.

WHERE TEXT (('M605SUB' OR 'M607SUB') AND DOES NOT

CONTAIN 'M606SUB')

In this example, Endevor lists all elements that contain either the text
string M605SUB or the text string M607SUB and do not contain the
text string M606SUB.

BUILD ACTION&&ACTION action-name

Determines the action that appears in the LIST action syntax for the
specified element. If you do not enter required BUILD information
here, Endevor looks for a SET BUILD clause containing the appropriate
information. (See the description of SET BUILD, in Chapter 3, "Set,
Clear, and EOF Statements," for additional coding information.) If a
SET BUILD clause has not been coded, the system defaults to
&&ACTION.

You can enter a specific action (for example, ADD or MOVE) in this
clause or the variable &&ACTION. &&ACTION indicates that a
specific action will be designated for this element at a later time. This
action can be entered manually or using the SET ACTION statement.
(See the description of SET ACTION, in Chapter 3, "Set, Clear, and
EOF Statements," for additional coding information.)

OPTIONS

OPTIONS clauses allow you to further specify action requests.

REPLACE MEMBER—When you specify a PDS and member name in

the TO clause, list requests fail if the member already exists. Use the
REPLACE MEMBER option if you want to replace the existing member
in the TO location library.

DETAIL REPORT—By default, in the Execution Report, Endevor lists

only those elements matching the selection criteria you specify. If you
select the DETAIL REPORT option, every element searched is listed in
the report—whether or not a match is found.

4-52 SCL Reference Guide

 4.9 The List Statement

SHOW TEXT [ PLUS n LINES ]—This option allows you to print the
line of source code that contains a specified text string, plus a
designated number of lines of code before and after the text string.

You must code the WHERE TEXT clause if you use the SHOW TEXT
option. Otherwise, you receive a syntax error.

4.9.8 Example of List SCL

The following are examples of LIST SCL. In the first example, the SCL
generates a list of all the elements in the Payroll Reporting subsystem
that contain the text "COPY PAYCOPY1" in columns 7 through 45,
inclusive. SCL will be generated for each element found.
LIST ELEMENT ''
FROM ENVIRONMENT 'PROD'
SYSTEM 'PAYROLL'
SUBSYSTEM 'REPORTS'
TYPE 'COBOL'
STAGE NUMBER 1
WHERE TEXT EQ 'COPY PAYCOPY1' COLUMN 7 45
BUILD ACTION GENERATE .

In the second example, the SCL generates a list of all members in

PAYROLL.SRCLIB that begin with "PAYRPT*' and contain the string
"COPY PAYCOPY3" in columns 7 through 45, inclusive. The
subsequent report will display the entire line in which the text was
found.
LIST MEMBER 'PAYRPT'
FROM DSNAME 'PAYROLL.SRCLIB'
WHERE TEXT EQ 'COPY PAYCOPY3' IN COLUMN 7 45
OPTIONS SHOW TEXT .

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-53

4.9 The List Statement

4.10 The Move Statement

4.10.1 Overview
The MOVE statement moves elements between inventory locations
along a map.

4.10.2 Syntax

──MOVe ELEment──element-name─────────────────────────────────
──┬───────────────────────────┬──FROm─────────────────────────
└─┬─THRough─┬──element-name─┘
└─THRu────┘
──ENVironment──env-name──SYStem──sys-name─────────────────────
──SUBsystem──subsys-name──TYPe──type-name─────────────────────
──┬─STAge──stage-id────────┬──────────────────────────────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘
──┬───────────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────
└─WHEre──¤──┬──────────┬──¤─┘
├─┤ CCID ├─┤
└─┤ PRO ├──┘
──┬──────────────────────────────────────────┬──.────────────
└─OPTion──¤──┬────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─CCId──ccid─────────────┤
├─COMment──comment───────┤
├─SYNchronize────────────┤
├─WITh HIStory───────────┤
├─BYPass ELEment DELete──┤
│ ┌─SIGnin─────────────┐ │
├─┼─RETAin SIGNOut─────┼─┤
│ └─SIGNOut TO──userid─┘ │
└─JUMp───────────────────┘
CCID:
┌─EQual─┐ ┌─,────┐
─ccid─┴──)───────┤
├──CCId──┬──────────────────┬──┼───────┼──(───
│ ┌─CURrent──┐ │ └─=─────┘
└─OF──┼─ALL──────┼─┘
└─RETrieve─┘
PRO:
┌─,──────────┐
─group name─┴──)───────────────┤
├──PROcessor GROup──┬─EQ─┬──(───
└─=──┘

4-54 SCL Reference Guide

 4.10 The Move Statement

4.10.2.1 Syntax Rules

MOVE ELEMENT element-name

Indicates the element(s) to be moved. Code the required syntax and

enter the appropriate element name; up to 10 characters are allowed.
In addition, you can use a name mask with the element name.

THROUGH (THRU) element-name

Indicates that a range of elements should be moved, beginning with

the element coded in the MOVE ELEMENT statement, up to and
including the element specified in this statement. You can use a name
mask with the element name.
FROM ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM sys-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE stage id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

The FROM clause indicates the location of the element being moved.
Endevor uses both the FROM clause in an action and any preceding
SET FROM clause to determine the "from" criteria for that action.
■ A FROM clause in an action overrides values in a SET FROM
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET FROM clause contains values that are not included in
the FROM clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET FROM statement, in Chapter 3, "Set

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

You must specify an environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage.

You can use a name mask with the system, subsystem and type. The
environment name and stage information must be explicit. The stage
specification can be either one of the following:
■ STAGE ID—Enter a single alphanumeric stage identifier.
■ STAGE NUMBER—Enter either 1 or 2.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-55

4.10 The Move Statement

WHERE

Use the WHERE clause to further qualify element selection criteria.

Endevor uses both the WHERE clause in an action and any preceding
SET WHERE clause to determine the "where" criteria for that action.
■ A WHERE clause in an action overrides values in a SET WHERE
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET WHERE clause contains values that are not included in
the WHERE clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET WHERE statement, in Stage 3, for more
information.

WHERE CCID OF ccid —Limits the processing to those elements that

match one of the supplied CCIDs. You can use a name mask in this
field.
■ CURRENT—Tells Endevor to look through the CCID fields in the
MCF (Master Control File) to find a specified CCID(s). This is the
default.
■ ALL—Tells Endevor to search both the Master Control File and the
SOURCE DELTA levels for a specified CCID(s). If you have ACM,
Endevor also searches the COMPONENT LIST DELTA levels for
the specified CCID(s).
■ RETRIEVE—Tells Endevor to use the CCID in the Master Control
File RETRIEVE CCID field.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one CCID,
you can specify multiple CCIDs by enclosing the CCIDs with
parentheses and separating them with commas. The CCIDs may
extend over multiple lines if necessary.

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE CCID OF CURRENT (PROJ1, PROJ2, PROJ4)
Example 2: WHERE CCID OF ALL (PROJV)

WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP group name—This clause allows you to

select elements according to a specified processor group. You can use
a name mask when specifying the processor group name.

4-56 SCL Reference Guide

 4.10 The Move Statement

If you need to select elements identified under more than one

processor group, you can specify multiple distinct processor group
selectors by enclosing the processor groups with parentheses and
separating them with commas. The processor groups may extend over
multiple lines if necessary.

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBVS, COBII)
Example 2: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBV)

OPTIONS

OPTIONS clauses allow you to further specify requests.

CCID ccid/COMMENT comment—You can enter a 1- to 12- character

CCID and/or a 1- to 40-character comment.

CCIDs and/or comments may be required. If you do not provide a

required CCID and/or comment, the MOVE action fails.

When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a MOVE action,

Endevor updates the CCID and/or COMMENT fields differently,
depending on whether you specify the MOVE action with history or
without history.

When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a MOVE action without

history, Endevor uses this CCID and/or comment to set the last action
CCID and/or COMMENT fields. Endevor also:
■ Sets the source and generate CCID and/or COMMENT fields to
their value at the source location of the move.
■ Sets the source and component list delta CCID and/or COMMENT
fields to their last value at the source location of the move.
■ Clears the retrieve CCID and/or COMMENT field.

When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a MOVE action using

the WITH HISTORY option, Endevor uses this CCID and/or comment
to set the last action CCID and/or COMMENT fields.

Endevor also does the following:

■ Sets the source and generate CCID and/or COMMENT fields to
their value at the source location of the move.
■ Clears the retrieve CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
■ Moves source delta and component list delta CCIDs and comments
with their respective delta levels.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-57

4.10 The Move Statement

SYNCHRONIZE— The SYNCHRONIZE option compensates for

differences between the base level of a source element and the current
level of a target element. Endevor attempts to find a sync level
between the source and target elements, beginning with the first level
at the source, and working forward through the deltas. If Endevor
finds a sync level, it compares the two and creates a new level at the
target that reflects the differences. If Endevor cannot find a sync level
and you specify SYNC, Endevor issues an out of sync message.
Endevor then compares the last level of the source and last level of the
target, and creates a new level at the target that reflects the differences.

When moving with history, if the sync point is found, Endevor moves
the element from the FROM location to the TO location, appending the
FROM location delta levels after the sync-point element. If the two
levels are different, and SYNC is specified, Endevor first creates a sync
level at the target reflecting the differences between the base level of
the FROM element and the target, then moves the element to the TO
location and appends the FROM location delta levels to the target.

WITH HISTORY—The WITH HISTORY option preserves source

element change history. If you request MOVE WITH HISTORY,
Endevor first ensures that the current level of the target element is the
same as the base level of the source element. It then moves all levels
of the element from source to target, appending the source change
history to the target change history.

If you do not code this option, Endevor moves the element(s) without
history. When you move the element without history Endevor
searches through the element levels at the source location to find a
matching level at the target location. Endevor then compares the two
and creates a new level at the target location that reflects the
differences.

If the base level of the source element differs from the current level at
the target, the move fails unless you code the SYNCHRONIZE option.

4-58 SCL Reference Guide

 4.10 The Move Statement

BYPASS ELEMENT DELETE—This option tells Endevor to retain the

element in the source stage after successfully completing the move.

SIGNIN—Default. This option tells Endevor to sign in all elements at

the target stage after successfully completing the move. You must
code this option to override SET OPTION RETAIN SIGNOUT or SET
OPTION SIGNOUT TO clauses.

RETAIN SIGNOUT—This option tells Endevor to retain the source

location signouts for all elements at the target location. This option
applies only if the element was signed out at the target before the
MOVE.

If the element was signed out at the target before the MOVE, it will be
signed out to that same ID—at the target—after the MOVE.

If the element was not signed out at the target before the MOVE, it
will not be signed out at the target after the MOVE.

If you do not use this option, the element at the target location is not
signed out, regardless of whether it was signed out at the target before
the MOVE took place.

SIGNOUT TO userid—This option tells Endevor to sign all elements

out to the specified user ID at the target stage.

JUMP—The JUMP option tells Endevor to move elements across

environments even if the element exists at an intermediate stage that is
not on the map. If the element exists at an intermediate stage, the
move fails if REQ ELM JUMP ACKNOWLEDGE=Y at the system level
and the JUMP option is not coded.

In either case, Endevor issues a message informing you that the

element exists in a non-map stage between the source and target stages
of the move.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-59

4.10 The Move Statement

4.10.3 Example of Move SCL

The following is an example of MOVE SCL. This SCL moves an
element from Stage 1. The element history will be retained at the
target stage.
MOVE ELEMENT 'PAYRPT17'
FROM ENVIRONMENT 'PROD'
SYSTEM 'PAYROLL'
SUBSYSTEM 'REPORTS'
TYPE 'COBOL'
STAGE NUMBER 1
OPTIONS CCID REQ#4334
COMMENT 'MOVE INTO PRODUCTION'
WITH HISTORY .

4-60 SCL Reference Guide

 4.10 The Move Statement

4.11 The Print Statement

4.11.1 Overview
The PRINT statement prints selected information about an element(s)
or library member(s), depending on the data entered in the FROM
clause. You can print from either Endevor or selected output libraries
(for example, a PDS, AllFusion CA-PANVALET, and so on).

4.11.2 Printing from Endevor

When executing the PRINT action against Endevor, you can request
the following information about elements and component lists:
■ BROWSE (the default) prints all statements in the specified level of
the element, as well as the level at which each statement was
inserted.
■ CHANGES shows all inserts and deletes made to the element at
the level specified.
■ HISTORY prints all statements in all levels of the element.
■ SUMMARY prints one line of summary information for each level.

You can request the following information about elements only:

■ MASTER prints Master Control File information for the element.

4.11.3 Printing from an Output Library

When you execute the PRINT action against an output library, the
source of the selected, footprinted member(s) is printed.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-61

4.11 The Print Statement

4.11.4 Print Element Statement

The PRINT ELEMENT statement prints selected information about the
element you specify. You can print from either Endevor or from
selected output libraries.

4.11.5 Syntax

──PRInt ELEment──element-name────────────────────────────────
──┬───────────────────────────┬──┬──────────────────┬─────────
└─┬─THRough─┬──element-name─┘ └─VERsion──version─┘
└─THRu────┘
──┬──────────────┬──FROm──ENVironment──env-name───────────────
└─LEVel──level─┘
──SYStem──sys-name──SUBsystem──subsys-name────────────────────
──TYPe──type-name──STAge NUMber──stage-no─────────────────────
┌─C1Print─────────────┐
──TO──┴─┬─FILe───┬──dd-name─┴─────────────────────────────────
└─DDName─┘
──┬───────────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────
└─WHEre──¤──┬──────────┬──¤─┘
├─┤ CCID ├─┤
└─┤ PRO ├──┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────┬──.───────────
└─OPTions──¤──┬────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─NOCc───────────────────┤
│ ┌─BROwse──┐ │
├─COMPonent──┼─CHAnge──┼─┤
│ ├─HIStory─┤ │
│ └─SUMmary─┘ │
├─MASter─────────────────┤
│ ┌─NOSearch─┐ │
└─┴─SEArch───┴───────────┘
CCID:
┌─EQual─┐ ┌─,────┐
─ccid─┴──)───────┤
├──CCId──┬──────────────────┬──┼───────┼──(───
│ ┌─CURrent──┐ │ └─=─────┘
└─OF──┼─ALL──────┼─┘
└─RETrieve─┘
PRO:
┌─,──────────┐
─group name─┴──)───────────────┤
├──PROcessor GROup──┬─EQ─┬──(───
└─=──┘

4-62 SCL Reference Guide

 4.11 The Print Statement

4.11.5.1 Syntax Rules

PRINT ELEMENT element-name

Indicates the 1- to 10-character name of the element(s) to be printed.

You can use a name mask, unless you specify a level (in the LEVEL
clause).

THROUGH (THRU) element-name

Indicates that a range of elements should be printed, beginning with

the element coded in the PRINT ELEMENT statement, up to and
including the element specified in this statement. You can use a name
mask with either name. If you enter a THROUGH clause, you cannot
enter a LEVEL clause.

VERSION version

Indicates the version number of the element you want to print.

Acceptable values are 1-99. You must code a full element name if you
want to indicate a version number.

LEVEL level

Tells Endevor to print data for the designated level of the element.
Acceptable values are 00-99. By default Endevor prints information for
the current level.

If you enter a LEVEL clause, you cannot use the THROUGH clause,
and you must code a full element name in the PRINT ELEMENT
clause.
FROM ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM sys-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

The FROM clause indicates the location of the element being printed.
Endevor uses both the FROM clause in an action and any preceding
SET FROM clause to determine the "from" criteria for that action.
■ A FROM clause in an action overrides values in a SET FROM
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET FROM clause contains values that are not included in
the FROM clause, Endevor uses these values.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-63

4.11 The Print Statement

See the description of the SET FROM statement, in Chapter 3, "Set

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

You must specify an environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage

number (either 1 or 2). The environment name must be explicit. You
can use a name mask with the system, subsystem, type, and stage
number.
TO C1PRINT..
FILE (DDNAME) dd-name

The TO clause indicates where the element is being printed. Endevor

uses both the TO clause in an action and any preceding SET TO clause
to determine the "to" criteria for that action.
■ A TO clause in an action overrides values in a SET TO clause that
precedes the action.
■ If the SET TO clause contains values that are not included in the
TO clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET TO statement, in Chapter 3, "Set Clear,

and EOF Statements," for more information. If a SET TO clause has
not been entered, the system defaults to C1PRINT and prints the
element in a listing.

As an alternative, you can print the element or member to a sequential

file; that is, to a FILE (DDNAME). The indicated file must be
sequential, with a record length of 133, or the PRINT action fails. Be
sure the appropriate JCL is coded if you use either a FILE or
DDNAME for the TO location.

WHERE

Use WHERE clauses to further qualify element selection criteria.

Endevor uses both the WHERE clause in an action and any preceding
SET WHERE clause to determine the "where" criteria for that action.
■ A WHERE clause in an action overrides values in a SET WHERE
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET WHERE clause contains values that are not included in
the WHERE clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET WHERE statement, in Chapter 3, "Set,

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

4-64 SCL Reference Guide

 4.11 The Print Statement

WHERE CCID OF ccid —Limits the processing to those elements that

match one of the supplied CCIDs. You can use a name mask in this
field.
■ CURRENT—Tells Endevor to look through the CCID fields in the
MCF (Master Control File) to find a specified CCID(s). This is the
default.
■ ALL—Tells Endevor to search both the Master Control File and the
SOURCE DELTA levels for a specified CCID(s). If you have ACM,
Endevor also searches the COMPONENT LIST DELTA levels for
the specified CCID(s).
■ RETRIEVE—Tells Endevor to use the CCID in the Master Control
File's RETRIEVE CCID field.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one CCID,
you can specify multiple CCIDs by enclosing the CCIDs with
parentheses and separating them with commas. The CCIDs may
extend over multiple lines if necessary.

The following examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE CCID OF CURRENT (PROJ1, PROJ2, PROJ4)
Example 2: WHERE CCID OF ALL (PROJV)

WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP group name—This clause allows you

to select elements according to a specified processor group. You can
use a name mask when specifying the processor group name.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one

processor group, you can specify multiple distinct processor group
selectors by enclosing the processor groups with parentheses and
separating them with commas. The processor groups may extend over
multiple lines if and separating them with commas. The processor
groups may extend over multiple lines if necessary.

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause:

Example 1: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBVS, COBII)
Example 2: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBV)

OPTIONS

OPTIONS clauses allow you to further specify an action request.

NOCC—By default, Endevor prints a header on each page of the

printed output. You can suppress the printing of the header by
entering this option in the PRINT statement.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-65

4.11 The Print Statement

COMPONENTS—When you select this option, Endevor prints all

component information for the element specified. There are five forms
of this clause:
■ BROWSE—When you select the BROWSE option, Endevor prints
the current element or component list source, indicating the level
at which each line was added. If you specify a particular level,
Endevor prints the source for that level.
■ CHANGES—When you select the CHANGES option, Endevor
prints all the changes—inserts and deletes—made to the element or
component list at the level specified. If you do not specify a level
in the LEVEL clause, changes for the current level of the element
are shown.
■ HISTORY—When you select the HISTORY option, Endevor prints
all lines that have ever been in the element or component list
source, noting the level at which the line was added, changed, or
deleted. If you specify a level in the LEVEL clause, Endevor prints
history for that level.
■ SUMMARY—When you select the SUMMARY option, Endevor
prints a summary line of data for each level of the element or
component list specified, and includes information appropriate to
that level (for example, the number of inserts and the number of
deletes).

MASTER—When you select the MASTER option, Endevor prints

Master Control File information stored for the selected element, as well
as current data pertaining to that element (such as last processor,
processor return codes, current version or level, and so on.)

The BROWSE, CHANGES, HISTORY, SUMMARY, and MASTER

printouts provide the same information as their corresponding online
panels. See the User's Guide for additional details.

If you code only COMPONENTS, Endevor prints BROWSE

information. If you code COMPONENTS in conjunction with the
BROWSE, CHANGES, HISTORY, and SUMMARY options, Endevor
prints the requested information for the element component list. If
you code COMPONENTS in conjunction with the MASTER option,
Endevor prints both COMPONENTS and MASTER information.

Endevor prints as much information as is available for the component

list. For example, if you code COMPONENTS CHANGES but there
were no changes to the output components section, that section would
not appear in the associated listing. The COMPONENTS option
applies only to section would not appear in the associated listing. The
COMPONENTS option applies only to Endevor ACM. If you are not a
Endevor ACM user and you code this option, the action fails.

4-66 SCL Reference Guide

 4.11 The Print Statement

SEARCH or NOSEARCH—The SEARCH option tells Endevor to look

and print all occurrences of the element on the map.

The default is NOSEARCH. Code NOSEARCH to restrict Endevor's

search to the current environment.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-67

4.11 The Print Statement

4.11.6 Print Member Statement

The PRINT MEMBER statement prints selected information about the
member you specify. You can print from either Endevor or from
selected output libraries.

4.11.7 Syntax

──PRInt MEMber──member-name──┬──────────────────────────┬────
└─┬─THRough─┬──member-name─┘
└─THRu────┘
──FROm──┬─┬─FILe───┬──dd-name──┬──────────────────────────────
│ └─DDName─┘ │
└─DSName──dataset-name─┘
┌─C1Print─────────────┐
──TO──┴─┬─FILe───┬──dd-name─┴──.─────────────────────────────
└─DDName─┘

4.11.7.1 Syntax Rules

PRINT MEMBER member-name

Indicates the 1- to 10-character name of the member(s) to be printed.

You can use a name mask.

THROUGH (THRU) member-name

Indicates that a range of members should be printed beginning with

the member coded in the PRINT MEMBER statement, up to and
including the member specified in this statement. You can use a name
mask with either name.
FROM FILE (DDNAME) dd-name
DSNAME dataset-name

The FROM clause indicates the location of the member being printed.
Endevor uses both the FROM clause in an action and any preceding
SET FROM clause to determine the "from" criteria for that action.
■ A FROM clause in an action overrides values in a SET FROM
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET FROM clause contains values that are not included in
the FROM clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET FROM statement, in Chapter 3, "Set

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

4-68 SCL Reference Guide

 4.11 The Print Statement

You must enter a FILE, DDNAME, or DSNAME (enter one and only
one); be sure the appropriate JCL is coded for a FILE or DDNAME. If
you enter any other information in the FROM clause, it is ignored.
TO C1PRINT..
FILE (DDNAME) dd-name

The TO clause indicates where the member is being printed. Endevor

uses both the TO clause in an action and any preceding SET TO clause
to determine the "to" criteria for that action.
■ A TO clause in an action overrides values in a SET TO clause that
precedes the action.
■ If the SET TO clause contains values that are not included in the
TO clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET TO statement, in Chapter 3, "Set Clear,

and EOF Statements," for more information. If a SET TO clause has not
been entered, the system defaults to C1PRINT and prints the element
in a listing.

As an alternative, you can print the element or member to a sequential

file; that is, to a FILE or DDNAME. The indicated file must be
sequential, with a record length of 133, or you receive an error
message. Be sure the appropriate JCL is coded if you use either a FILE
or DDNAME for the TO location.

4.11.8 Example of Print SCL

The following are examples of PRINT SCL. In the first example, the
SCL prints the current version of element "PAYRPT19." The output is
written to the default DDname (C1PRINT).
PRINT ELEMENT 'PAYRPT19'
FROM ENVIRONMENT 'PROD'
SYSTEM 'PAYROLL'
SUBSYSTEM 'REPORTS'
TYPE 'COBOL'
STAGE NUMBER 1 .

The SCL in the second example prints member "PAYRPT12" from the
Endevor Listing Library. The output is sent to the default DDname
(C1PRINT).
PRINT MEMBER 'PAYRPT12'
FROM DSNAME 'ENDEVOR.PAYROLL.STAGE1.LISTINGS' .

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-69

4.11 The Print Statement

4.12 The Restore Statement

4.12.1 Overview
The RESTORE statement restores an element from an archive data set
back to Endevor, "copying" the source as it was before the element was
archived or transferred to the data set.

The RESTORE action is available in batch only.

4.12.2 Syntax
──REStore ELEment──element-name──┬───────────────────────────┬──FROm──────────
└─┬─THRough─┬──element-name─┘
└─THRu────┘
──┬─FILe───┬──dd-name──┬───────────────┬──ENVironment──env-name────────────────
└─DDName─┘ └─SITe──site-id─┘
──SYStem──sys-name──SUBsystem──subsys-name──TYPe──type-name────────────────────
──STAge NUMber──stage-no──TO──ENVironment──env-name──SYStem──sys-name──────────
──SUBsystem──subsys-name──TYPe──type-name──┬─STAge──stage-id────────┬──────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘
──ELEment──element-name────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
──┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────┬─────────────────────────
└─WHERE──¤──┬─────────────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
│ ┌─,────┐ │
├─CCId──┬─EQ─┬──(─── ─ccid─┴──)────┤
│ └─=──┘ │
└─ARChive──┬─┤ DATE ├───────────┬─┘
├─┤ FROM ├───────────┤
├─┤ THROUGH ├────────┤
└─┤ FROM - THROUGH ├─┘
──┬────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──.───────────
└─OPTions──¤──┬─────────────────────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─CCId──ccid──────────────────────────────┤
├─COMment──comment────────────────────────┤
├─NEW VERsion──version────────────────────┤
└─┬─BYPass GENerate PROcessor───────────┬─┘
└─PROcessor GROup──┬─EQ─┬──group-name─┘
└─=──┘
DATE:
├──DATe──┬─EQ─┬──date──┬────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────────┤
└─=──┘ └─TIMe──┬─EQ─┬──time─┘
└─=──┘
FROM:
├──FROm──DATe──┬─EQ─┬──date──┬────────────────────┬─────────────────────────────┤
└─=──┘ └─TIMe──┬─EQ─┬──time─┘
└─=──┘
THROUGH:
├──┬─THRough─┬──DATe──┬─EQ─┬──date──┬────────────────────┬──────────────────────┤
└─THRu────┘ └─=──┘ └─TIMe──┬─EQ─┬──time─┘
└─=──┘

4-70 SCL Reference Guide

 4.12 The Restore Statement

4.12.2.1 Syntax Rules

RESTORE ELEMENT element-name

Indicates the element(s) to be restored. Code the required syntax and

enter the appropriate element name; up to 10 characters are allowed.
In addition, you can use a name mask with the element name.

THROUGH (THRU) element-name

Indicates that a range of elements should be restored, beginning with

the element coded in the RESTORE ELEMENT statement, up to and
including the element specified in this statement. You can use a name
mask with the element name. If you use the THROUGH clause,
however, you cannot enter a new element name (in the TO clause).
FROM FILE (DDNAME) dd-name SITE site-id
ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM system-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

The FROM clause indicates the location of the element being restored.
Endevor uses both the FROM clause in an action and any preceding
SET FROM clause to determine the "from" criteria for that action.
■ A FROM clause in an action overrides values in a SET FROM
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET FROM clause contains values that are not included in
the FROM clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET FROM statement, in Chapter 3, "Set

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

You must enter a FILE or DDNAME, indicating from which archive

file the element is being restored. Enter this information first when
coding the syntax.

You must also specify the environment, system, subsystem, type, and
stage number (either 1 or 2). The environment name must be explicit.
You can use a name mask with the system, subsystem, type, and stage
number.

Entering a site ID is optional. This field further defines the location of

the element being restored.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-71

4.12 The Restore Statement

TO ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM system-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no
ELEMENT element-name

The TO clause indicates where the element is being restored. Endevor

uses both the TO clause in an action and any preceding SET TO clause
to determine the "to" criteria for that action.
■ A TO clause in an action overrides values in a SET TO clause that
precedes the action.
■ If the SET TO clause contains values that are not included in the
TO clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET TO statement, in Chapter 3, "Set Clear,

and EOF Statements," for more information.

If no SET TO clause has been coded, Endevor retrieves the required

information from the FROM clause coded for this action. Environment
must be coded first in TO.

You must specify an environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage.

The stage specification can be either one of the following:
■ STAGE ID—Enter a single alphanumeric stage identifier.
■ STAGE NUMBER—Enter either 1 or 2.

Remember that you cannot use a name mask with a TO field name.

Enter a different element name if you want to change the element

name specified (that is, the archived element name) in the RESTORE
ELEMENT clause. If you do not enter an element name here, Endevor
uses the archived element name.
■ You can enter a new element name only if a full element name
was coded in the RESTORE ELEMENT clause; that is, if you have
not used a name mask.
■ If you enter an element name here, you cannot use the THROUGH
clause.
■ If you want to code a different element name, you must do so in
the RESTORE statement. The SET TO MEMBER clause does not
apply to this action.

4-72 SCL Reference Guide

 4.12 The Restore Statement

WHERE

Use WHERE clauses to further qualify element selection criteria.

Endevor uses both the WHERE clause in an action and any preceding
SET WHERE clause to determine the "where" criteria for that action.
■ A WHERE clause in an action overrides values in a SET WHERE
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET WHERE clause contains values that are not included in
the WHERE clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET WHERE statement, in Chapter 3, "Set,

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

WHERE CCID ccid —Limits the processing to those elements that

match one of the supplied CCIDs. You can use a name mask in this
field.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one CCID,
you can specify multiple CCIDs by enclosing the CCIDs with
parentheses and separating them with commas. The CCIDs may
extend over multiple lines if necessary.

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause:

Example 1: WHERE CCID EQ PROJV
Example 2: WHERE CCID (PROJ1, PROJ2, PROJ4)

WHERE ARCHIVE—This clause allows you to select elements based

on the date and, optionally, time that an element was archived. There
are four possible forms for this clause:

WHERE ARCHIVE DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm ]

This clause tells Endevor to archive only those elements with this date,
and optionally, time stamp.

WHERE ARCHIVE FROM DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm]

This clause tells Endevor to archive all elements with a date and,
optionally, time stamp on or after the specified date and time stamps.

WHERE ARCHIVE THROUGH DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm ]

This clause tells Endevor to archive all elements with a date and,
optionally, time stamp earlier than and including the specified date
and time stamp.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-73

4.12 The Restore Statement

WHERE ARCHIVE FROM DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm ]

THROUGH DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm ]

This clause tells Endevor to archive only those elements with date, and
optionally, time stamps within the specified range.

Note: If you enter a time, you must enter the date with it.

OPTIONS

CCID ccid/COMMENT comment—You can enter a 1- to 12-character

CCID and/or a 1- to 40-character comment.

CCIDs and/or comments may be required. If you do not provide a

required CCID and/or comment, the RESTORE action fails.

When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a RESTORE action for

an existing element, Endevor uses this CCID and/or comment to:
■ Set the generate and component list delta CCID and/or
COMMENT fields if the generate processor is run. Endevor writes
this comment to the Master Control File replacing the comment for
that element. Endevor does not set these fields if you code
BYPASS GENERATE PROCESSOR.
■ Set the last action CCID and/or COMMENT fields.

Endevor sets the source, source delta, and RETRIEVE CCID and/or
COMMENT fields based on the archive data set.

NEW VERSION version—Tells Endevor to assign the specific version

number to the element. Acceptable values are 1-99.

BYPASS GENERATE PROCESSOR—Tells Endevor not to execute the

generate processor after restoring the element.

PROCESSOR GROUP group name—Tells Endevor which processor

group to associate with the restored element.

4-74 SCL Reference Guide

 4.12 The Restore Statement

4.12.3 Example of Restore SCL

The following is an example of RESTORE SCL. This SCL restores all
of the COBOL elements from the archive file associated with the
ARCHIN DD statement that you specify in the execution JCL.
RESTORE ELEMENT ''
FROM FILE ARCHIN
ENVIRONMENT 'PROD'
SYSTEM 'PAYROLL'
SUBSYSTEM 'REPORTS'
TYPE 'COBOL'
STAGE NUMBER 1
TO ENVIRONMENT 'PROD'
SYSTEM 'PAYROLL'
SUBSYSTEM 'REPORTS'
TYPE 'COBOL'
STAGE NUMBER 1
OPTIONS CCID REQ344145
COMMENT 'ARCHIVE REPORTING SUBSYSTEM PROGRAMS' .

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-75

4.12 The Restore Statement

4.13 The Retrieve Statement

4.13.1 Overview
The RETRIEVE statement copies an element to a user data set.

4.13.2 Syntax

──RETrieve ELEment──element-name──┬───────────────────────────┬──────
└─┬─THRough─┬──element-name─┘
└─THRu────┘
──┬──────────────────┬──┬──────────────┬──FROm────────────────────────
└─VERsion──version─┘ └─LEVel──level─┘
──ENVironment──env-name──SYStem──sys-name──SUBsystem──subsys-name─────
──TYPe──type-name──┬─STAge──stage-id────────┬──TO─────────────────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘
──┬─┬─FILe───┬──dd-name───────────────────────────┬───────────────────
│ └─DDName─┘ │
├─DSName──dataset-name──┬─────────────────────┬─┤
│ └─MEMber──member-name─┘ │
└─PATH──hfspath──HFSFILE──filename──────────────┘
──┬───────────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────────────
└─WHEre──¤──┬──────────┬──¤─┘
├─┤ CCID ├─┤
└─┤ PRO ├──┘
──┬────────────────────────────────────┬──.──────────────────────────
└─OPTion──¤──┬──────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─CCId──ccid───────┤
├─COMment──comment─┤
├─REPlace member───┤
├─NO SIGNOut───────┤
├─EXPand include───┤
├─OVErride SIGNOut─┤
│ ┌─SEArch───┐ │
└─┴─NOSearch─┴─────┘
CCID:
┌─EQual─┐ ┌─,────┐
├──CCId──┬──────────────────┬──┼───────┼──(─── ─ccid─┴──)───────────────┤
│ ┌─CURrent──┐ │ └─=─────┘
└─OF──┼─ALL──────┼─┘
└─RETrieve─┘
PRO:
┌─,──────────┐
├──PROcessor GROup──┬─EQual─┬──(─── ─group name─┴──)────────────────────┤
└─=─────┘

4-76 SCL Reference Guide

 4.13 The Retrieve Statement

4.13.2.1 Syntax Rules

RETRIEVE ELEMENT element-name

Indicates the 1- to 10-character name of the element(s) to be retrieved.

You can specify the element name using a name mask, unless you
want to retrieve a specific level of the element.

THROUGH (THRU) element-name

Indicates that a range of elements should be retrieved, beginning with

the element coded in the RETRIEVE ELEMENT statement, up to and
including the element specified in this statement. You can use a name
mask with the element name.

If you use the THROUGH clause, you cannot enter a member name in
the TO clause or a different level in the LEVEL clause.

VERSION version

Indicates the version of the element you want to retrieve. Acceptable

values are 1-99. By default Endevor retrieves the version of the
element at the target stage.

You must specify a full element name if you want to indicate a version
number.

LEVEL level

Indicates the level of the element you want to retrieve. Acceptable

values are 00-99. By default Endevor retrieves the current level of the
element at the target stage.

If you enter a LEVEL clause, you cannot use the THROUGH clause,
and you must code a full element name in the RETRIEVE ELEMENT
clause.
FROM ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM system-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-77

4.13 The Retrieve Statement

The FROM clause indicates the location of the element being retrieved.
Endevor uses both the FROM clause in an action and any preceding
SET FROM clause to determine the "from" criteria for that action.
■ A FROM clause in an action overrides values in a SET FROM
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET FROM clause contains values that are not included in
the FROM clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET FROM statement, in Chapter 3, "Set,

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

You must specify an environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage.

The environment name must be explicit. You can use a name mask
with the system, subsystem, type and stage. The stage specification
can be either one of the following:
■ STAGE ID—Enter a single alphanumeric stage identifier.
■ STAGE NUMBER—Enter either 1 or 2.

If you use a name mask with the stage, Endevor begins searching for
the specified element(s) in Stage 1 of the current environment, and
retrieves the first element that matches the specified element name,
regardless of its location, version or level.
TO FILE (DDNAME) dd-name
DSNAME dataset-name
MEMBER member-name

PATH hfspath
HFSFILE filename

The TO clause indicates where the element is being retrieved. Endevor

uses both the TO clause in an action and any preceding SET TO clause
to determine the "to" criteria for that action.
■ A TO clause in an action overrides values in a SET TO clause that
precedes the action.
■ If the SET TO clause contains values that are not included in the
TO clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET TO statement, in Chapter 3, "Set Clear,

and EOF Statements," for more information.

You must enter a FILE, DDNAME, DSNAME or PATH in conjunction

with HFSFILE (enter one and only one). If you enter either a FILE or
DDNAME, be sure the appropriate JCL is coded.

Enter a member name (up to 10 characters) if it differs from the

element name specified in the RETRIEVE ELEMENT clause.
Remember that you cannot use a name mask with a TO field name.

4-78 SCL Reference Guide

 4.13 The Retrieve Statement

If you do not enter a member name, Endevor assumes that the

element name and member name are the same. If you code a member
name:
■ The RETRIEVE ELEMENT clause must contain a fully qualified
element name.
■ You cannot use the THROUGH clause.

The SET TO MEMBER clause does not apply to the RETRIEVE action.

PATH

The HFS directory you want to retrieve the element from. This has a
maximum of 768 characters.

HFSFILE

The name of the file for the retrieved element. The file name has a
maximum of 255 characters.

For more information see HFSFile Syntax Rules in this chapter.

WHERE

Use WHERE clauses to further qualify element selection criteria.

Endevor uses both the WHERE clause in an action and any preceding
SET WHERE clause to determine the "where" criteria for that action.
■ A WHERE clause in an action overrides values in a SET WHERE
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET WHERE clause contains values that are not included in
the WHERE clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET WHERE statement, in Chapter 3, "Set,

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

WHERE CCID OF ccid—Limits the processing to those elements that

match one of the supplied CCIDs. You can use a name mask in this
field.
■ CURRENT—Tells Endevor to look through the CCID fields in the
Master Control File to find a specified CCID(s). This is the default.
■ ALL—Tells Endevor to search both the Master Control File and the
SOURCE DELTA levels for a specified CCID(s). If you have ACM,
Endevor also searches the COMPONENT LIST DELTA levels for
the specified CCID(s).
■ RETRIEVE—Tells Endevor to use the CCID in the Master Control
File RETRIEVE CCID field.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-79

4.13 The Retrieve Statement

If you need to select elements identified under more than one

CCID, you can specify multiple CCIDs by enclosing the CCIDs
with parentheses and separating them with commas. The CCIDs
may extend over multiple lines if necessary.
The next examples illustrate the use of this clause:
Example 1: WHERE CCID OF CURRENT (PROJ1, PROJ2, PROJ4)
Example 2: WHERE CCID OF ALL (PROJV)

WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP group name— This clause allows you

to select elements according to a specified processor group. You can
use a name mask when specifying the processor group name.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one

processor group, you can specify multiple distinct processor group
selectors by enclosing the processor groups with parentheses and
separating them with commas. The processor groups may extend over
multiple lines if necessary.

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBVS, COBII)
Example 2: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBV)

OPTIONS

OPTIONS clauses allow you to further specify action requests.

CCID ccid/COMMENT comment—You can enter a 1- to 12-character

CCID and/or a 1- to 40-character comment. CCIDs and/or comments
may be required. If you do not provide a required CCID and/or
comment, the RETRIEVE action fails.

When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a RETRIEVE action for

an existing element, Endevor uses this CCID and /or comment to set
the RETRIEVE CCID and/or COMMENT fields.

REPLACE MEMBER—If you retrieve an element to a library, Endevor

checks to see whether that element is currently in the library. By
default, if this condition exists, the request will be rejected. The
REPLACE MEMBER option, however, enables you to replace the
member currently in the library with the retrieved element. Specify
this option when you want to replace the existing member in the
library.

NO SIGNOUT—This option is applicable only if SIGNIN/SIGNOUT

is in effect for the system. NO SIGNOUT enables the element to be
retrieved without signing it out; that is, if you select this option, the
element is not signed out to your user ID. This enables another user
to retrieve the element at the same time you are working with it.

4-80 SCL Reference Guide

 4.13 The Retrieve Statement

Similarly, if you want to use an element currently signed out to

another user, you can retrieve a copy of it if that user has selected the
NO SIGNOUT option.

If you use NO SIGNOUT, any CCIDS and comments are ignored.

Consequently, the Master Control File is not updated

EXPAND INCLUDES—This option indicates that INCLUDE

statements should be expanded when the element is copied to the
external data set.

In addition, the type definition for this element must specify an

INCLUDE library.

OVERRIDE SIGNOUT—If the element has been signed out to a

person other than yourself, you must code this option in order to
perform this action. Use OVERRIDE SIGNOUT with caution to avoid
regressing changes made by another user.

SEARCH/NOSEARCH—The SEARCH option tells Endevor to look for

the element to be retrieved along the map, if it is not in the current
environment. The default is SEARCH.

Code NOSEARCH to restrict Endevor's search to the current

environment.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-81

4.13 The Retrieve Statement

4.13.3 Example of Retrieve SCL

The following is an example of RETRIEVE SCL. This SCL retrieves
Payroll program "PAYRPT23." The map will be searched if the
program is not found at Stage 1.
RETRIEVE ELEMENT 'PAYRPT23'
FROM ENVIRONMENT 'PROD'
SYSTEM 'PAYROLL'
SUBSYSTEM 'REPORTS'
TYPE 'COBOL'
STAGE 1
TO DSNAME 'PAYROLL.SRCLIB' MEMBER 'PAYRPT31'
OPTIONS CCID REQ#4324
COMMENT 'RETRIEVE THE FICA TAX REPORTING PROGRAM'
SEARCH
REPLACE MEMBER .

4-82 SCL Reference Guide

 4.13 The Retrieve Statement

4.14 The Signin Statement

4.14.1 Overview
The SIGNIN statement removes a user signout associated with an
element. It also enables you to sign out or reassign an element to
another user.

4.14.2 Syntax

──SIGnin ELEment──element-name───────────────────────────────
──┬───────────────────────────┬──FROm─────────────────────────
└─┬─THRough─┬──element-name─┘
└─THRu────┘
──ENVironment──env-name──SYStem──sys-name─────────────────────
──SUBsystem──subsys-name──TYPe──type-name─────────────────────
──┬─STAge──stage-id────────┬──────────────────────────────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘
──┬───────────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────
└─WHEre──¤──┬──────────┬──¤─┘
├─┤ CCID ├─┤
└─┤ PRO ├──┘
──┬──────────────────────────────────────┬──.────────────────
└─OPTion──¤──┬────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─OVErride SIGNOut───┤
├─SIGNOut TO──userid─┤
│ ┌─NOSearch─┐ │
└─┴─SEArch───┴───────┘
CCID:
┌─EQual─┐ ┌─,────┐
─ccid─┴──)───────┤
├──CCId──┬──────────────────┬──┼───────┼──(───
│ ┌─CURrent──┐ │ └─=─────┘
└─OF──┼─ALL──────┼─┘
└─RETrieve─┘
PRO:
┌─,──────────┐
─group name─┴──)───────────────┤
├──PROcessor GROup──┬─EQ─┬──(───
└─=──┘

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-83

4.14 The Signin Statement

4.14.2.1 Syntax Rules

SIGNIN ELEMENT element-name

Indicates the element(s) to be signed in. Code the required syntax and
enter the appropriate element name; up to 10 characters are allowed.
In addition, you can use a name mask with the element name.

THROUGH (THRU) element-name

Indicates that a range of elements should be signed in, beginning with

the element coded in the SIGNIN ELEMENT statement, up to and
including the element specified in this statement. You can use a name
mask with the element name.
FROM ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM system-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

The FROM clause indicates the location of the element being signed in.
Endevor uses both the FROM clause in an action and any preceding
SET FROM clause to determine the "from" criteria for that action.
■ A FROM clause in an action overrides values in a SET FROM
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET FROM clause contains values that are not included in
the FROM clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET FROM statement, in Chapter 3, "Set

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

You must specify an environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage.

The environment name must be explicit. You can use a name mask
with the system, subsystem, type, and stage. The stage specification
can be either one of the following:
■ STAGE ID—Enter a single alphanumeric stage identifier.
■ STAGE NUMBER—Enter either 1 or 2.

If you use a name mask with the stage, Endevor begins searching for
the specified element(s) in Stage 1 of the current environment, and
signs in the first element that matches the specified element name,
regardless of its location, version or level.

4-84 SCL Reference Guide

 4.14 The Signin Statement

WHERE

Use WHERE clauses to further qualify element selection criteria.

Endevor uses both the WHERE clause in an action and any preceding
SET WHERE clause to determine the "where" criteria for that action.
■ A WHERE clause in an action overrides values in a SET WHERE
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET WHERE clause contains values that are not included in
the WHERE clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET WHERE statement, in Chapter 3, "Set,

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

WHERE CCID OF ccid —Limits the processing to those elements that

match one of the supplied CCIDs. You can use a name mask in this
field.
■ CURRENT—Tells Endevor to look through the CCID fields in the
MCF (Master Control File) to find a specified CCID(s). This is the
default.
■ ALL—Tells Endevor to search both the Master Control File and the
SOURCE DELTA levels for a specified CCID(s). If you have ACM,
Endevor also searches the COMPONENT LIST DELTA levels for
the specified CCID(s).
■ RETRIEVE—Tells Endevor to use the CCID in the Master Control
File RETRIEVE CCID field.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one CCID,
you can specify multiple CCIDs by enclosing the CCIDs with
parentheses and separating them with commas. The CCIDs may
extend over multiple lines if necessary. The next examples illustrate
the use of this clause.
Example 1: WHERE CCID OF CURRENT (PROJ1, PROJ2, PROJ4)
Example 2: WHERE CCID OF ALL (PROJV)

WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP group name—This clause allows you

to select elements according to a specified processor group. You can
use a name mask when specifying the processor group name.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-85

4.14 The Signin Statement

If you need to select elements identified under more than one

processor group, you can specify multiple distinct processor group
selectors by enclosing the processor groups with parentheses and
separating them with commas. The processor groups may extend over
multiple lines if necessary.

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBVS, COBII)
Example 2: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBV)

OPTIONS

OPTIONS clauses allow you to further specify action requests.

OVERRIDE SIGNOUT—If the element has been signed out to a

person other than yourself, you must code this option in order to
perform this action. Use OVERRIDE SIGNOUT with caution to avoid
regressing changes made by another user.

SIGNOUT TO—Enables you to sign out or reassign an element at

either stage to another user. If you have an element signed out to
your user ID, you can use this option to reassign that element to the
other user.

SEARCH/NOSEARCH—The NOSEARCH option tells Endevor to

restrict its search to the current environment. The default is
NOSEARCH.

Code SEARCH to tell Endevor to look for the element to be signed in

along the map, if it is not in the current environment.

4.14.3 Example of Signin SCL

The following is an example of SIGNIN SCL. This SCL signs in all
COBOL elements that begin with "PAYRPT*" at Stage 1 and are
associated with CCID REQ#39934.
SIGNIN ELEMENT 'PAYRPT'
FROM ENVIRONMENT 'PROD'
SYSTEM 'PAYROLL'
SUBSYSTEM 'REPORTS'
TYPE 'COBOL'
STAGE NUMBER 1
WHERE CCID OF CURRENT = REQ#39934.

4-86 SCL Reference Guide

 4.14 The Signin Statement

4.15 The Transfer Statement

4.15.1 Overview
The TRANSFER statement transfers an element from one location to
another. There are three types of transfers:
■ Endevor to Endevor transfers elements from one Endevor location
to another.
■ Endevor to an archive data set transfers elements from Endevor to
an archive data set.
■ Archive/unload data set to Endevor transfers elements from an
archive data set or an unload tape to Endevor.

The TRANSFER action is available in batch only. If the elements have

been transferred to an archive data set, the COPY, LIST, and RESTORE
actions can be executed against that data set.

4.15.2 Transfer from Endevor to Endevor Statement

The TRANSFER FROM Endevor TO Endevor statement transfers
elements from one Endevor location to another.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-87

4.15 The Transfer Statement

4.15.3 Syntax
──TRAnsfer ELEment──element-name──┬──────────────────┬──┬──────────────┬──────
└─VERsion──version─┘ └─LEVel──level─┘
──┬───────────────────────────┬──FROm──┤ DEF ├─────────────────────────────────
└─┬─THRough─┬──element-name─┘
└─THRU────┘
──TO──┤ DEF ├──┬───────────────────────┬──┬───────────────────────────┬────────
└─ELEment──element-name─┘ └─WHEre──¤──┬──────────┬──¤─┘
├─┤ CCID ├─┤
└─┤ PRO ├──┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──.────────────
└─OPTION──¤──┬─────────────────────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─CCId──ccid──────────────────────────────┤
├─COMment──comment────────────────────────┤
├─NEW VERsion──version────────────────────┤
├─IGNore generate failed──────────────────┤
├─OVErride SIGNOut────────────────────────┤
├─WITh HIStory────────────────────────────┤
├─SYNchronize─────────────────────────────┤
├─┬─BYPass GENerate PROcessor───────────┬─┤
│ └─PROcessor GROup──┬─EQ─┬──group-name─┘ │
│ └─=──┘ │
├─┬─BYPass ELEment DELete───┬─────────────┤
│ └─BYPass DELete PROcessor─┘ │
│ ┌─SIGnin─────────────┐ │
└─┼─RETain SIGNOut─────┼──────────────────┘
└─SIGNOut TO──userid─┘
DEF:
├──ENVIronment──environment-name──SYStem──system-name───────────────────────────
──SUBSYStem──subsystem-name──TYPe──type-name──┬─STAge──stage-id────────┬───────┤
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘
CCID:
┌─EQual─┐ ┌─,────┐
├──CCId──┬──────────────────┬──┼───────┼──(─── ─ccid─┴──)────────────────────────┤
│ ┌─CURrent──┐ │ └─=─────┘
└─OF──┼─ALL──────┼─┘
└─RETrieve─┘
PRO:
┌─,──────────┐
├──PROcessor GROup──┬─EQ─┬──(─── ─group name─┴──)────────────────────────────────┤
└─=──┘

4-88 SCL Reference Guide

 4.15 The Transfer Statement

4.15.3.1 Syntax Rules

TRANSFER ELEMENT element-name

Identifies the element(s) to be transferred. Code the required syntax

and enter the appropriate element name; up to 10 characters are
allowed. In addition, you can use a name mask with the element
name.

VERSION

Identifies the version (1-99) of the element you want to transfer. If you
use this clause you must specify a full element name.

LEVEL

Identifies the level (00-99) of the element you want to transfer. If you
use the LEVEL clause you:
■ Cannot use the THROUGH clause.
■ Must specify a full element name.

If you do not specify a LEVEL clause, the Transfer action transfers all
levels to the target location. If you specify this clause, Endevor only
transfers the level you indicate.

If the specified level is not the current level, the execution of the
generate processor at the target location is forced, regardless of the
setting specified by the processor group definition.

THROUGH (THRU) element-name

Indicates that a range of elements should be transferred, beginning

with the element coded in the TRANSFER ELEMENT statement, up to
and including the element specified in this statement. You can use a
name mask with the element name.
FROM ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM system-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no
FILE(DDNAME) can point to an archive data set or to an unload
dataset.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-89

4.15 The Transfer Statement

The FROM clause indicates the location of the element being

transferred. Endevor uses both the FROM clause in an action and any
preceding SET FROM clause to determine the "from" criteria for that
action.
■ A FROM clause in an action overrides values in a SET FROM
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET FROM clause contains values that are not included in
the FROM clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET FROM statement, in Chapter 3, "Set

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

You must specify an environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage.

The environment name must be explicit. You can use a name mask
with the system, subsystem, type, and stage. The stage specification
can be either one of the following:
■ STAGE ID—Enter a single alphanumeric stage identifier.
■ STAGE NUMBER—Enter either 1 or 2.
TO ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM system-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no
ELEMENT element-name
The TO clause indicates where the element is being transferred.
Endevor uses both the TO clause in an action and any preceding SET
TO clause to determine the "to" criteria for that action.
■ A TO clause in an action overrides values in a SET TO clause that
precedes the action.
■ If the SET TO clause contains values that are not included in the
TO clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET TO statement, in Chapter 3, "Set Clear,

and EOF Statements," for more information.

4-90 SCL Reference Guide

 4.15 The Transfer Statement

If no SET TO clause has been coded and the TO clause system,

subsystem, type, or element fields are not coded, these fields will
default to the corresponding values coded in the FROM clause.
Note: The target environment and stage values must be explicitly
coded in the TO clause or SET TO clause. Wildcarding and name
masking are not allowed for any of the TO clause fields.

You must specify environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage.

The stage specification can be either one of the following:
■ STAGE ID—Enter a single alphanumeric stage identifier.
■ STAGE NUMBER—Enter either 1 or 2.

Remember that you cannot use a name mask with a TO field name.

Enter a different element name if you want to change the element

name specified in the TRANSFER ELEMENT clause. If you do not
enter an element name here, Endevor assigns the FROM location
element name.
■ You can enter a new element name only if a full element name
was coded in the TRANSFER ELEMENT clause; that is, if you
have not used a name mask.
■ If you want to code a different element name, you must do so in
the TRANSFER statement; the SET TO MEMBER clause does not
apply to this action.

WHERE

Use WHERE clauses to further qualify element selection criteria.

Endevor uses both the WHERE clause in an action and any preceding
SET WHERE clause to determine the "where" criteria for that action.
■ A WHERE clause in an action overrides values in a SET WHERE
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET WHERE clause contains values that are not included in
the WHERE clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET WHERE statement, in Chapter 3, "Set,

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-91

4.15 The Transfer Statement

WHERE CCID OF ccid —Limits the processing to those elements that

match one of the supplied CCIDs. You can use a name mask in this
field.
■ CURRENT—Tells Endevor to look through the CCID fields in the
MCF (Master Control File) to find a specified CCID(s). This is the
default.
■ ALL—Tells Endevor to search both the Master Control File and the
SOURCE DELTA levels for a specified CCID(s). If you have ACM,
Endevor also searches the COMPONENT LIST DELTA levels for
the specified CCID(s).
■ RETRIEVE—Tells Endevor to use the CCID in the Master Control
File's RETRIEVE CCID field.
If you need to select elements identified under more than one CCID,
you can specify multiple CCIDs by enclosing the CCIDs with
parentheses and separating them with commas. The CCIDs may
extend over multiple lines if necessary.

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE CCID OF CURRENT (PROJ1, PROJ2, PROJ4)
Example 2: WHERE CCID OF ALL (PROJ)

WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP group name—This clause allows you to

select elements according to a specified processor group. You can use
a name mask when specifying the processor group name.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one

processor group, you can specify multiple distinct processor group
selectors by enclosing the processor groups with parentheses and
separating them with commas. The processor groups may extend over
multiple lines if necessary.

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBVS, COBII)
Example 2: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COB)

OPTIONS

OPTIONS clauses allow you to further specify action requests.

CCID ccid/COMMENT comment—You can enter a 1- to 12-character

CCID and/or a 1- to 40-character comment.

CCIDs and/or comments may be required. If you do not provide a

required CCID and/or comment, the TRANSFER action fails.

4-92 SCL Reference Guide

 4.15 The Transfer Statement

When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a TRANSFER action,

Endevor updates CCID and/or COMMENT fields differently,
depending on whether you specify the TRANSFER request without
history, with history, or with synchronization.

When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a TRANSFER action

without history, Endevor uses this CCID and/or comment to:
■ Set the generate and component list delta CCID and/or
COMMENT fields if the generate processor is run.
■ Set the last action CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
Endevor also:
■ Clears the retrieve CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
■ Sets the source CCID and /or COMMENT fields from their value
in the previous stage.
■ Sets the source delta CCID and/or COMMENT fields from their
last delta value in the previous stage.

When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a TRANSFER action

using the WITH HISTORY option, Endevor uses the CCID and/or
comment to:
■ Set the generate and component list delta CCID and/or
COMMENT fields if the generate processor is run.
■ Set the last action CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
Endevor also:
■ Clears the retrieve CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
■ Sets the source CCID and/or COMMENT fields from their value in
the previous stage.
■ Moves source delta CCIDs and COMMENTs with their respective
delta levels.
When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a TRANSFER action
using the SYNCHRONIZE option, Endevor uses this CCID and/or
comment to:
■ Set the retrieve CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
■ Set the source CCID and/or COMMENT fields from their value in
the previous stage.
■ Set the source delta CCID and/or COMMENT fields from their
value at the target of the transfer, with a sync flag.

If you use BYPASS GENERATE PROCESSOR, the TRANSFER action

will not set the generate or component list delta CCID and/or
COMMENT fields.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-93

4.15 The Transfer Statement

NEW VERSION version—By default, the version number of the

FROM location element—at the time it is transferred—is assigned to
the TO location element. Use this option to assign a different version
number to the TO location element; simply enter the number (1-99
inclusive, leading zeros optional) that you want to use.

Endevor allows only one version of an element at each location.

Therefore, if the element currently exists at the target location, you
cannot update it with another version. For example, if you try to
transfer Version 2 of an element to a target location that already has an
existing Version 1, you must archive or delete the current Version 1
before you transfer the Version 2.

IGNORE GENERATE FAILED—This option applies to the *FAILED*

flag previously set for the element. If the TRANSFER action is
unsuccessful, you receive a message indicating that "the generate
failed." Processing for the action normally is terminated at this point.

If you enter this option, however, you can perform the action whether
or not the element was previously generated or moved successfully.

BYPASS GENERATE PROCESSOR—Select this option if you do not

want the generate/move processor (depending on the processor group
option chosen) executed for the element.

PROCESSOR GROUP group name—Select this option to specify a

predefined named group of processors. If you do not specify a
processor group, Endevor defaults to the processor group last used for
this element.

If the FROM element is associated with a processor group that does

not specify BYPASS GENERATE PROCESSOR, the processor group
may be overridden with the processor group clause. Otherwise, a
message will be issued saying that the processor group cannot be
overridden.

OVERRIDE SIGNOUT—If the element has been signed out to a

person other than yourself, you must code this option in order to
perform the this action. Use OVERRIDE SIGNOUT with caution to
avoid regressing changes made by another user.

4-94 SCL Reference Guide

 4.15 The Transfer Statement

BYPASS ELEMENT DELETE—This option tells Endevor to retain the

element in the FROM location after it is transferred. When you select
this option, the delete processor is also bypassed.

BYPASS DELETE PROCESSOR—If you select this option, Endevor

does not execute the delete processor.

WITH HISTORY—The WITH HISTORY option preserves source

element change history. If you request TRANSFER WITH HISTORY,
Endevor first ensures that the current level of the target element is the
same as the base level of the source element. It then transfers all levels
of the element from source to target, appending the source change
history to the target change history.

If you do not code this option, Endevor transfers the element(s)

without history. When you transfer the element without history
Endevor searches through the element levels at the source location to
find a matching level at the target location. Endevor then compares
the two and creates a new level at the target location that reflects the
differences.

If the base level of the source element differs from the current level at
the target, the TRANSFER fails unless you code the SYNCHRONIZE
option.

SYNCHRONIZE— The SYNCHRONIZE option compensates for

differences between the base level of a source element and the current
level of a target element. Endevor attempts to find a sync level
between the source and target elements beginning with the first level
of the source and works forward through the deltas. If Endevor finds
a sync level, it compares the two and creates a new level at the target
that reflects the differences. If Endevor cannot find a sync level and
you specify SYNC, Endevor issues an out of sync message. Endevor
then compares the last level of the source and last level of the target,
and creates a new level at the target that reflects the differences. When
moving with history, if the sync point is found, Endevor moves the
element from the FROM location to the TO location, appending the
FROM location delta levels after the sync-point element. If the two
levels are different, and SYNC is specified, Endevor first creates a sync
level at the target reflecting the differences between the base level of
the FROM element and the target , then moves the element to the TO
location and appends the FROM location delta levels to the target.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-95

4.15 The Transfer Statement

SIGNIN—This option tells Endevor to sign in all elements at the target

stage after successfully completing the move. Use this option to
override SET OPTION RETAIN SIGNOUT or SET OPTION SIGNOUT
TO clauses.

RETAIN SIGNOUT—This option tells Endevor to retain the source

location signouts for all elements at the target location. This option
applies only if the element was signed out at the source before the
TRANSFER.
■ If the element was signed out at the source before the TRANSFER,
it will be signed out to that same ID—at the target—after the
TRANSFER.
■ If the element was not signed out at the source before the
TRANSFER, it will not be signed out at the target after the
TRANSFER.
■ If you do not use this option, the element at the target location is
not signed out, regardless of whether it was signed out at the
target before the TRANSFER took place.

SIGNOUT TO userid—This option tells Endevor to sign all elements

out to the specified user ID at the target stage.

4-96 SCL Reference Guide

 4.15 The Transfer Statement

4.15.4 Transfer from Endevor to Archive Data Set Statement

The TRANSFER FROM Endevor TO ARCHIVE DATA SET statement
transfers elements from Endevor to an archive data set.

4.15.5 Syntax

──TRAnsfer ELEment──element-name──┬──────────────────┬───────
└─VERsion──version─┘
──┬──────────────┬──┬───────────────────────────┬─────────────
└─LEVel──level─┘ └─┬─THRough─┬──element-name─┘
└─THRU────┘
──FROm──┤ DEF ├──TO──┬─FILe───┬──dd-name──────────────────────
└─DDName─┘
──┬───────────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────
└─WHEre──¤──┬──────────┬──¤─┘
├─┤ CCID ├─┤
└─┤ PRO ├──┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────┬──.───────
└─OPTION──¤──┬─────────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─CCId──ccid──────────────────┤
├─COMment──comment────────────┤
├─NEW VERsion──version────────┤
├─IGNore generate failed──────┤
├─OVErride SIGNOut────────────┤
└─┬─BYPass ELEment DELete───┬─┘
└─BYPass DELete PROcessor─┘
DEF:
├──ENVironment──environment-name──SYStem──system-name──────────
──SUBSYStem──subsystem-name──TYPe──type-name──────────────────
──┬─STAge──stage-id────────┬──────────────────────────────────┤
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘
CCID:
┌─EQual─┐ ┌─,────┐
─ccid─┴──)───────┤
├──CCId──┬──────────────────┬──┼───────┼──(───
│ ┌─CURrent──┐ │ └─=─────┘
└─OF──┼─ALL──────┼─┘
└─RETrieve─┘
PRO:
┌─,──────────┐
─group name─┴──)───────────────┤
├──PROcessor GROup──┬─EQ─┬──(───
└─=──┘

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-97

4.15 The Transfer Statement

4.15.5.1 Syntax Rules

TRANSFER ELEMENT element-name

Indicates the element(s) to be transferred. Code the required syntax

and enter the appropriate element name; up to 10 characters are
allowed. In addition, you can use a name mask with the element
name.

VERSION

Identifies the version (1-99) of the element you want to transfer. If you
use this clause you must specify a full element name.

LEVEL

Identifies the level (00-99) of the element you want to transfer. If you
use the LEVEL clause you:
■ Cannot use the THROUGH clause.
■ Must specify a full element name.

If you do not specify a LEVEL clause, the Transfer action transfers all
levels to the target location. If you specify this clause, Endevor only
transfers the level you indicate.

If the specified level is not the current level, the execution of the
generate processor at the target location is forced, regardless of the
setting specified by the processor group definition.

THROUGH (THRU) element-name

Indicates that a range of elements should be transferred, beginning

with the element coded in the TRANSFER ELEMENT statement, up to
and including the element specified in this statement. You can use a
name mask with the element name.
FROM ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM system-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

4-98 SCL Reference Guide

 4.15 The Transfer Statement

The FROM clause indicates the location of the element being

transferred. Endevor uses both the FROM clause in an action and any
preceding SET FROM clause to determine the "from" criteria for that
action.
■ A FROM clause in an action overrides values in a SET FROM
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET FROM clause contains values that are not included in
the FROM clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET FROM statement, in Chapter 3, "Set

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

You must specify an environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage.

The environment name must be explicit. You can use a name mask
with the system, subsystem, type, and stage. The stage specification
can be either one of the following:
■ STAGE ID—Enter a single alphanumeric stage identifier.
■ STAGE NUMBER—Enter either 1 or 2.

TO FILE (DDNAME) dd-name

The TO clause indicates the file or DDname to which the element is

being transferred. Endevor uses both the TO clause in an action and
any preceding SET TO clause to determine the "to" criteria for that
action.
■ A TO clause in an action overrides values in a SET TO clause that
precedes the action.
■ If the SET TO clause contains values that are not included in the
TO clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET TO statement, in Chapter 3, "Set Clear,

and EOF Statements," for more information.

The DCB must specify variable blocked records (RECFM=VB), a

minimum LRECL of 1021, DSORG=PS, and a block size greater than
1025. When archiving to tape, the recommended block size is 32,000.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-99

4.15 The Transfer Statement

WHERE

Use WHERE clauses to further qualify element selection criteria.

Endevor uses both the WHERE clause in an action and any preceding
SET WHERE clause to determine the "where" criteria for that action.
■ A WHERE clause in an action overrides values in a SET WHERE
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET WHERE clause contains values that are not included in
the WHERE clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET WHERE statement, in Chapter 3, "Set,

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

WHERE CCID OF ccid —Limits the processing to those elements that

match one of the supplied CCIDs. You can use a name mask in this
field.
■ CURRENT—Tells Endevor to look through the CCID fields in the
MCF (Master Control File) to find a specified CCID(s). This is the
default.
■ ALL—Tells Endevor to search both the Master Control File and the
SOURCE DELTA levels for a specified CCID(s). If you have ACM,
Endevor also searches the COMPONENT LIST DELTA levels for
the specified CCID(s).
■ RETRIEVE—Tells Endevor to use the CCID in the Master Control
File RETRIEVE CCID field.
If you need to select elements identified under more than one
CCID, you can specify multiple CCIDs by enclosing the CCIDs
with parentheses and separating them with commas. The CCIDs
may extend over multiple lines if necessary.

4-100 SCL Reference Guide

 4.15 The Transfer Statement

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE CCID OF CURRENT (PROJ1, PROJ2, PROJ4)
Example 2: WHERE CCID OF ALL (PROJV)
WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP group name—This clause allows
you to select elements according to a specified processor group.
You can use a name mask when specifying the processor group
name.
If you need to select elements identified under more than one
processor group, you can specify multiple distinct processor group
selectors by enclosing the processor groups with parentheses and
separating them with commas. The processor groups may extend
over multiple lines if necessary.
The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.
Example 1: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBVS, COBII)
Example 2: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBV)
OPTIONS
OPTIONS clauses allow you to further specify action requests.
CCID ccid/COMMENT comment—You can enter a 1- to
12-character CCID and/or a 1- to 40-character comment.
CCIDs and/or comments may be required. If you do not provide
a required CCID and/or comment, the TRANSFER action fails.
When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a TRANSFER
action, Endevor updates CCID and/or COMMENT fields
differently depending on whether you specify the TRANSFER
request without history, with history, or with synchronization.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-101

4.15 The Transfer Statement

When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a TRANSFER action

without history, Endevor uses this CCID and/or comment to:
– Set the generate and component list delta CCID and/or
COMMENT fields if the generate processor is run.
– Set the last action CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
– Endevor also:
– Clears the retrieve CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
– Sets the source CCID and/or COMMENT fields from their
value in the previous stage.
– Sets the source delta CCID and/or COMMENT fields from
their last delta value in the previous stage.
When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a TRANSFER
action using the WITH HISTORY option, Endevor uses this
CCID and/or comment to:
– Set the generate and component list delta CCID and/or
COMMENT fields if the generate processor is run.
– Set the last action CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
– Endevor also:
– Clears the retrieve CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
– Sets the source CCID and/or COMMENT fields from their
value in the previous stage.
– Moves source delta CCIDs and COMMENTS with their
respective delta levels.
When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a TRANSFER
action using the SYNCHRONIZE option, Endevor uses this
CCID and/or comment to:
– Set the retrieve CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
– Set the source CCID and/or COMMENT fields from their
value in the previous stage.
– Set the source delta CCID and/or COMMENT fields from their
value at the target of the TRANSFER with a sync flag.

BYPASS ELEMENT DELETE—This option tells Endevor to retain the

element in the FROM location after it is transferred. When you select
this option, the delete processor is also bypassed.

BYPASS DELETE PROCESSOR—If you select this option, Endevor

does not execute the delete processor.

4-102 SCL Reference Guide

 4.15 The Transfer Statement

IGNORE GENERATE FAILED—This option applies to the *FAILED*

flag previously set for the element. If the TRANSFER action is
unsuccessful, you receive a message indicating that "the generate
failed." Processing for the action normally is terminated at this point.

If you enter this option, however, you can perform the action whether
or not the element was previously generated or moved successfully.

OVERRIDE SIGNOUT—If the element has been signed out to a

person other than yourself, you must code this option in order to
perform this action. Use OVERRIDE SIGNOUT with caution to avoid
regressing changes made by another user.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-103

4.15 The Transfer Statement

4.15.6 Transfer from Archive Data Set or Unload Tape to Endevor

Statement
The ARCHIVE/UNLOAD DATA SET TO Endevor statement transfers
elements from an archive data set or an unload tape to Endevor.

4-104 SCL Reference Guide

 4.15 The Transfer Statement

4.15.7 Syntax
──TRAnsfer ELEment──element-name──┬──────────────────┬──┬──────────────┬──────
└─VERsion──version─┘ └─LEVel──level─┘
──┬───────────────────────────┬──FROm──┤ DEF ├─────────────────────────────────
└─┬─THRough─┬──element-name─┘
└─THRU────┘
──TO──┤ DEF ├──ELEment──element-name───────────────────────────────────────────
──┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────┬─────────────────────────
└─WHEre──¤──┬─────────────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─┤ CCID ├────────────────────────┤
├─┤ PRO ├─────────────────────────┤
└─ARChive──┬─┤ DATE ├───────────┬─┘
├─┤ FROM ├───────────┤
├─┤ THROUGH ├────────┤
└─┤ FROM - THROUGH ├─┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──.────────────
└─OPTION──¤──┬─────────────────────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─CCId──ccid──────────────────────────────┤
├─COMment──comment────────────────────────┤
├─NEW VERsion──version────────────────────┤
├─OVErride SIGNOut────────────────────────┤
├─┬─BYPass GENerate PROcessor───────────┬─┤
│ └─PROcessor GROup──┬─EQ─┬──group-name─┘ │
│ └─=──┘ │
├─WITh HIStory────────────────────────────┤
├─SYNchronize─────────────────────────────┤
│ ┌─SIGnin─────────────┐ │
└─┼─RETain SIGNOut─────┼──────────────────┘
└─SIGNOut TO──userid─┘
DEF:
├──┬─FILe───┬──ddname──ENVIronment──environment-name──SYStem──system-name───────
└─DDName─┘
──SUBSYStem──subsystem-name──TYPe──type-name──STAge NUMber──stage-no───────────┤
CCID:
┌─EQual─┐ ┌─,────┐
├──CCId──┼───────┼──(─── ─ccid─┴──)──────────────────────────────────────────────┤
└─=─────┘
DATE:
├──DATe──┬────┬──date──┬────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────────┤
├─EQ─┤ └─TIMe──┬────┬──time─┘
└─=──┘ ├─EQ─┤
└─=──┘
FROM:
├──FROm──DATe──┬────┬──date──┬────────────────────┬─────────────────────────────┤
├─EQ─┤ └─TIMe──┬────┬──time─┘
└─=──┘ ├─EQ─┤
└─=──┘
THROUGH:
├──┬─────────┬──DATe──┬─EQ─┬──date──┬────────────────────┬──────────────────────┤
├─THRough─┤ └─=──┘ └─TIMe──┬────┬──time─┘
└─THRu────┘ ├─EQ─┤
└─=──┘
PRO:
┌─,──────────┐
├──PROcessor GROup──┬─EQ─┬──(─── ─group-name─┴──)────────────────────────────────┤
└─=──┘

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-105

4.15 The Transfer Statement

4.15.7.1 Syntax Rules

TRANSFER ELEMENT element-name

Indicates the element(s) to be transferred. Code the required syntax

and enter the appropriate element name; up to 10 characters are
allowed. In addition, you can use a name mask with the element
name.

VERSION

Identifies the version (1-99) of the element you want to transfer. If you
use this clause you must specify a full element name.

LEVEL

Identifies the level (00-99) of the element you want to transfer. If you
use the LEVEL clause you:
■ Cannot use the THROUGH clause.
■ Must specify a full element name.

If you do not specify a LEVEL clause, the Transfer action transfers all
levels to the target location. If you specify this clause, Endevor only
transfers the level you indicate.

If the specified level is not the current level, the execution of the
generate processor at the target location is forced, regardless of the
setting specified by the processor group definition.

THROUGH (THRU) element-name

Indicates that a range of elements should be transferred, beginning

with the element coded in the TRANSFER ELEMENT statement, up to
and including the element specified in this statement. You can use a
name mask with the element name.
FROM FILE (DDNAME) dd-name
ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM system-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

4-106 SCL Reference Guide

 4.15 The Transfer Statement

The FROM clause indicates the location of the element to be

transferred. Endevor uses both the FROM clause in an action and any
preceding SET FROM clause to determine the "from" criteria for that
action.
■ A FROM clause in an action overrides values in a SET FROM
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET FROM clause contains values that are not included in
the FROM clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET FROM statement, in Chapter 3, "Set

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

You must code a FILE or DDNAME for this request, indicating the
archive data set from which the element is being transferred. Enter
this information first when coding the syntax.

You must specify an environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage

number (either 1 or 2). The environment name must be explicit. You
can use a name mask with the system, subsystem, and type names, as
well as the stage number.

Entering a site ID is optional. This field further defines the location of

the element being transferred.
TO ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM system-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no
ELEMENT element-name

The TO clause indicates the Endevor location to which the element is

being transferred. Endevor uses both the TO clause in an action and
any preceding SET TO clause to determine the "to" criteria for that
action.
■ A TO clause in an action overrides values in a SET TO clause that
precedes the action.
■ If the SET TO clause contains values that are not included in the
TO clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET TO statement, in Chapter 3, "Set Clear,

and EOF Statements," for more information.

If no SET TO clause has been coded and the TO clause system,

subsystem, type, or element fields are not coded, these fields will
default to the corresponding values coded in the FROM clause.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-107

4.15 The Transfer Statement

Note: The target environment and stage values must be explicitly

coded in the TO clause or SET TO clause. Wildcarding and name
masking are not allowed for any of the TO clause fields.

You must specify an environment, system, subsystem, type, and stage.

The stage specification can be either one of the following:
■ STAGE ID—Enter a single alphanumeric stage identifier.
■ STAGE NUMBER—Enter either 1 or 2.

Remember that you cannot use a name mask with a TO field location.

Enter a different element name if you want to change the element

name specified in the TRANSFER ELEMENT clause. If you do not
enter an element name here, Endevor uses the archived element name.
■ You can enter a new element name only if a full element name
was coded in the TRANSFER ELEMENT clause; that is, if you
have not used a name mask.
■ If you want to code a different element name, you must do so in
the TRANSFER statement; the SET TO MEMBER clause does not
apply to this action.

WHERE

Use WHERE clauses to further qualify element selection criteria.

Endevor uses both the WHERE clause in an action and any preceding
SET WHERE clause to determine the "where" criteria for that action.
■ A WHERE clause in an action overrides values in a SET WHERE
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET WHERE clause contains values that are not included in
the WHERE clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET WHERE statement, in Chapter 3, "Set,

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

WHERE CCID ccid —Limits the processing to those elements that

match one of the supplied CCIDs. You can use a name mask in this
field.

If you need to select elements identified under more than one CCID,
you can specify multiple CCIDs by enclosing the CCIDs with
parentheses and separating them with commas. The CCIDs may
extend over multiple lines if necessary.

4-108 SCL Reference Guide

 4.15 The Transfer Statement

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE CCID EQ PROJV
Example 2: WHERE CCID (PROJ1, PROJ2, PROJ4)

WHERE ARCHIVE—This clause allows you to select elements based

on the date and, optionally, time that an element was archived. There
are four possible forms for this clause:
■ WHERE ARCHIVE DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm]
■ This clause tells Endevor to archive only those elements with this
date, and optionally, this time stamp.
■ WHERE ARCHIVE FROM DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm]
■ This clause tells Endevor to archive all elements with a date and,
optionally, a time stamp on or after the specified date and time
stamps.
■ WHERE ARCHIVE THROUGH DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME
hh:mm]
■ This clause tells Endevor to archive all elements with a date and,
optionally, a time stamp earlier than and including the specified
date and time stamp.
■ WHERE ARCHIVE FROM DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm]
THROUGH DATE mm/dd/yy [TIME hh:mm]
■ This clause tells Endevor to archive only those elements with a
date, and optionally, a time stamp within the specified range. If
you enter a time, you must enter the date with it.

WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP group name—This clause is not valid

when transferring from an archive data set. This clause allows you to
select elements according to a specified processor group. You can use
a name mask when specifying the processor group name

If you need to select elements identified under more than one

processor group, you can specify multiple distinct processor group
selectors by enclosing the processor groups with parentheses and
separating them with commas. The processor groups may extend over
multiple lines if necessary.

The next examples illustrate the use of this clause.

Example 1: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBVS, COBII)
Example 2: WHERE PROCESSOR GROUP (COBV)

OPTIONS

OPTIONS clauses allow you to further specify action requests.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-109

4.15 The Transfer Statement

CCID ccid/COMMENT comment—You can enter a 1- to 12-character

CCID and/or a 1- to 40-character comment.

CCIDs and/or comments may be required. If you do not provide a

required CCID and/or comment, the TRANSFER action fails.

When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a TRANSFER action,

Endevor updates CCID and/or COMMENT fields differently,
depending on whether you specify the TRANSFER request without
history, with history, or with synchronization.

If you use the BYPASS GENERATE PROCESSOR option, the

TRANSFER action does not set the generate or component list delta
CCID and/or COMMENT fields.

When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a TRANSFER action

without history, Endevor uses this CCID and/or comment to:
■ Set the generate and component list delta CCID and/or
COMMENT fields if the generate processor is run.
■ Set the last action CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
■ Endevor also:
■ Clears the retrieve CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
■ Sets the source CCID and /or COMMENT fields from their value
in the previous stage.
■ Sets the source delta CCID and/or COMMENT fields from their
last delta value in the previous stage.

When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a TRANSFER action

using the WITH HISTORY option, Endevor uses the CCID and/or
comment to:
■ Set the generate and component list delta CCID and/or
COMMENT fields if the generate processor is run.
■ Set the last action CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
■ Endevor also:
■ Clears the retrieve CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
■ Sets the source CCID and/or COMMENT fields from their value in
the previous stage.
■ Moves source delta CCIDs and COMMENTs with their respective
delta levels.

4-110 SCL Reference Guide

 4.15 The Transfer Statement

■ When you specify a CCID and/or comment in a TRANSFER action

using the SYNCHRONIZE option, Endevor uses this CCID and/or
comment to:
■ Set the retrieve CCID and/or COMMENT fields.
■ Set the source CCID and/or COMMENT fields from their value in
the previous stage.
■ Set the source delta CCID and/or COMMENT fields from their
value at the target of the transfer, with a sync flag.

NEW VERSION version—Use this option to assign a different version

number to the TO location element. Acceptable values are 1-99.

Endevor allows only one version of an element at each location. For

example, if you try to transfer Version 2 of an element to a target
location that already has an existing Version 1, you must archive or
delete the current Version 1 before you transfer the Version 2.

OVERRIDE SIGNOUT—If the element is signed out to another

person, you must code this option in order to perform this action. Use
OVERRIDE SIGNOUT with caution to avoid regressing changes made
by another user.

BYPASS GENERATE PROCESSOR—Use this option if you do not

want the generate processor executed for the element. Otherwise,
Endevor looks for and executes the generate processor for the element
when it is transferred.

PROCESSOR GROUP group name—Select this option to specify a

predefined named group of processors. If you do not specify a
processor group, Endevor defaults to the processor group last used for
this element.

WITH HISTORY—The WITH HISTORY option preserves source

element change history. If you request TRANSFER WITH HISTORY,
Endevor first ensures that the current level of the target element is the
same as the base level of the source element. It then transfers all levels
of the element from source to target, appending the source change
history to the target change history.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-111

4.15 The Transfer Statement

If you do not code this option, Endevor transfers the element(s)

without history. When you transfer the element without history
Endevor searches through the element levels at the source location to
find a matching level at the target location. Endevor then compares
the two and creates a new level at the target location that reflects the
differences.

If the base level of the source element differs from the current level at
the target, the transfer fails unless you code the SYNCHRONIZE
option.

SYNCHRONIZE—When transferring either with or without history,

the SYNCHRONIZE option compensates for differences between the
base level of a source element and the current level of a target element.
If these levels differ, the SYNCHRONIZE option tells Endevor to create
a new level at the target that reflects the differences.

After creating the sync level, Endevor transfers the element(s), either
with or without history.

SIGNIN—This option tells Endevor to sign in all elements at the target

stage. Use this option to override SET OPTION RETAIN SIGNOUT or
SET OPTION SIGNOUT TO clauses.

RETAIN SIGNOUT—This option tells Endevor to retain the source

location signouts for all elements at the target location. This option
applies only if the element was signed out at the source before the
TRANSFER.
■ If the element was signed out at the source before the TRANSFER,
it will be signed out to that same ID—at the target—after the
TRANSFER.
■ If the element was not signed out at the source before the
TRANSFER, it will not be signed out at the target after the
TRANSFER.
■ If you do not use this option, the element at the target location is
not signed out, regardless of whether it was signed out at the
target before the TRANSFER took place.

SIGNOUT TO userid—This option tells Endevor to sign all elements

out to the specified user ID at the target stage.

4-112 SCL Reference Guide

 4.15 The Transfer Statement

4.15.8 Example of Transfer SCL

The following is an example of TRANSFER SCL. This SCL transfers all
of the "PAYRPT*" COBOL elements to the NEWREPRT subsystem. All
element history will be retained, and the signout status can be
overridden, if necessary.
TRANSFER ELEMENT 'PAYRPT'
FROM ENVIRONMENT 'PROD'
SYSTEM 'PAYROLL'
SUBSYSTEM 'REPORTS'
TYPE 'COBOL'
STAGE NUMBER 1
TO ENVIRONMENT 'PROD'
SYSTEM 'PAYROLL'
SUBSYSTEM 'NEWREPRT'
TYPE 'COBOL'
STAGE NUMBER 1
OPTIONS CCID REQ#4418
COMMENT 'MOVE REPORTING SUBSYSTEM PROGRAMS'
WITH HISTORY
OVERRIDE SIGNOUT .

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-113

4.15 The Transfer Statement

4.16 The Update Statement

4.16.1 Overview
The UPDATE statement updates an element in the entry stage, thereby
creating a new level for the element in the entry stage. The entry stage
for the environment is defined through the C1DEFLTS table. Elements
are updated only if there are differences between the incoming source
in the FROM location and the target entry stage source.

4.16.2 Syntax

──UPDate ELEment──element-name──┬───────────────────────────┬────────
└─┬─THRough─┬──element-name─┘
└─THRu────┘
──FROm──┬─┬─FILe───┬──dd-name───────────────────────────┬─────────────
│ └─DDName─┘ │
├─DSName──dataset-name──┬─────────────────────┬─┤
│ └─MEMber──member-name─┘ │
└─PATH──hfspath──HFSFILE──filename──────────────┘
──TO──ENVironment──env-name──SYStem──sys-name─────────────────────────
──SUBsystem──subsys-name──TYPe──type-name─────────────────────────────
──┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬────
└─OPTion──¤──┬────────────────────────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─CCId──ccid─────────────────────────────────┤
├─COMment──comment───────────────────────────┤
├─DELete input source────────────────────────┤
├─OVErride SIGNOut───────────────────────────┤
└─┬─BYPass GENerate PROcessor──────────────┬─┘
└─PROcessor GROup──┬─EQual─┬──group name─┘
└─=─────┘
──.──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

4.16.2.1 Syntax Rules

UPDATE ELEMENT element-name

Indicates the element(s) to be updated. Code the required syntax and

enter the appropriate element name; up to 255 characters are allowed.
In addition, you can use a name mask with the element name.

THROUGH (THRU) element-name

Indicates that a range of elements should be updated, beginning with

the element coded in the UPDATE ELEMENT statement, up to and
including the element specified in this statement. You can use a name
mask with the element name. If you use the THROUGH clause,
however, you cannot enter a member name (in the FROM clause).

4-114 SCL Reference Guide

 4.16 The Update Statement

Note: If you are working with a sequential file, the THROUGH clause
is ignored.
FROM FILE (DDNAME) dd-name
DSNAME dataset-name
MEMBER member-name

PATH hfspath
HFSFILE filename

The FROM clause indicates the location of the element being updated.
Endevor uses both the FROM clause in an action and any preceding
SET FROM clause to determine the "from" criteria for that action.
■ A FROM clause in an action overrides values in a SET FROM
clause that precedes the action.
■ If the SET FROM clause contains values that are not included in
the FROM clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET FROM statement, in Chapter 3, "Set

Clear, and EOF Statements," for more information.

You must enter a FILE, DDNAME, DSNAME, or PATH in conjunction

with the HFSFILE (enter one and only one). If you enter a FILE or
DDNAME, be sure the appropriate JCL is coded.

Enter a member name (up to 255 characters) if it differs from the

element name specified in the UPDATE ELEMENT clause; you can use
a name mask with this entry. If you do not enter a member name,
Endevor assumes that the element name and member name are the
same.
■ You can enter a member name only if a full element name has
been coded in the UPDATE ELEMENT clause; that is, if you have
not used a name mask.
■ If you want to code a member name, you must do so in the
UPDATE statement; the SET FROM clause does not contain a
member name entry. If you do enter a member name, you cannot
enter a THROUGH clause.
■ If you are working with a sequential file, the MEMBER clause is
ignored.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-115

4.16 The Update Statement

PATH

The HFS directory where the element source file resides.

HFSFILE

The file in the HFS directory that you want to put under the control of
Endevor.

For more information see 1.6.1, “HFSFile Syntax Rules” on page 1-23.
the beginning of this chapter.
TO ENVIRONMENT env-name
SYSTEM sys-name
SUBSYSTEM subsys-name
TYPE type-name

The TO clause indicates where the element is being updated. Endevor

uses both the TO clause in an action and any preceding SET TO clause
to determine the "to" criteria for that action.
■ A TO clause in an action overrides values in a SET TO clause that
precedes the action.
■ If the SET TO clause contains values that are not included in the
TO clause, Endevor uses these values.

See the description of the SET TO statement, in Chapter 3, "Set Clear,

and EOF Statements," for more information.

You must specify an environment, system, subsystem, and type.

Remember that you cannot use a name mask with a TO field location.

4-116 SCL Reference Guide

 4.16 The Update Statement

OPTIONS

OPTIONS clauses allow you to further specify action requests.

CCID ccid/COMMENT comment—You can enter a 1- to 12-character

CCID and/or a 1- to 40-character comment.

CCIDs and/or comments may be required. If you do not provide a

required CCID and/or comment, the UPDATE action fails.

When you specify a CCID and/or comment in an UPDATE action for

an existing element, Endevor uses this CCID and/or comment to:
■ Set the source and source delta CCID and/or COMMENT fields if
the CCID and/or comment have changed.
■ Set the generate CCID and/or COMMENT fields if the generate
processor is run.
■ Set the component list delta CCID and/or COMMENT fields if
running the generate processor creates a change.
■ Set the last action CCID and/or COMMENT fields.

Endevor also clears the entry stage retrieve CCID and/or COMMENT
fields when you update an element. If you use the BYPASS
GENERATE PROCESSOR option, the UPDATE action will not set the
generate or component delta CCID and/or COMMENT fields.

DELETE INPUT SOURCE—After an element has been successfully

updated in Endevor, you can use this option to remove the member
from the library in which it originated.

If you input a sequential file, this option deletes that file.

OVERRIDE SIGNOUT—If the element has been signed out to a

person other than yourself, you must code this option in order to
perform this action. Use OVERRIDE SIGNOUT with caution to avoid
regressing changes made by another user.

BYPASS GENERATE PROCESSOR—Use this option if you do not

want the generate processor executed for the element. Otherwise,
Endevor looks for and executes the generate processor for the element
when it is updated.

PROCESSOR GROUP group name—Use this option to specify a

predefined named group of processors. If you do not specify a
processor group, Endevor defaults to the processor group last used for
this element.

Chapter 4. Element Action Statements 4-117

4.16 The Update Statement

4.16.3 Example of Update SCL

The following is an example of UPDATE SCL. This SCL modifies the
Payroll Reporting program "PAYRPT23." After the update is complete,
the source member will be deleted.
UPDATE ELEMENT 'PAYRPT23'
TO ENVIRONMENT 'PROD'
SYSTEM 'PAYROLL'
SUBSYSTEM 'REPORTS'
TYPE 'COBOL'
FROM DSNAME 'PAYROLL.SRCLIB'
OPTIONS DELETE INPUT SOURCE
CCID REQ#42976
COMMENT 'CHANGES FOR NEW REPORTING REQUIREMENTS' .

4-118 SCL Reference Guide

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL

This chapter describes the SCL needed to manage packages in batch.

It contains discussions of the Batch Package facility, execution of the
Batch Package facility, and the Batch Package actions.

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL 5-1

5.1 Batch Package Facility

5.1 Batch Package Facility

Endevor's Batch Package Facility provides you with the ability to
execute all package actions in batch mode. In addition, the Endevor
Batch Package Facility:
■ Supports all foreground package actions. See the Packages Guide
for information on package processing.
■ Provides the additional actions SUBMIT, ARCHIVE, and INSPECT.
■ Has the same package status requirements as those used in
foreground. See the Packages Guide for information on package
status requirements.
■ Supports before- and after-package exits.
■ Invokes the GENPKGID exit, if installed, to generate a new
package ID. See the Exits Guide for information on package exits.

5.1.1 Summary of Batch Package Actions

The following table summarizes Endevor batch package actions, their
required status and exits supported.

Action Description Required Status Exits Before Supported

After
Approve Approves a package for ■ In-approval. X X
Package execution.
■ Denied.
Archive Copies the package definitions ■ Execute if X X
Package to an external data set. backouts
exist.
■ Committed
if backout is
enabled.
Backin Backs a package in, reversing ■ Executed. X X
Package the BACKOUT PACKAGE
action.
Backout Backouts package changes. ■ Executed. X X
Package Restores output modules to
■ In-execution.
pre-execution state.
■ Exec-failed.

5-2 SCL Reference Guide

 5.1 Batch Package Facility

Action Description Required Status Exits Before Supported

After
Cast Casts a package, which freezes ■ In-Edit. X X
Package the data and prevents further
changes. For a list of Cast
validations, please see the
section titled "Validations for
Cast and Inspect" in the Packages
Guide.
Commit Commits a package removing all ■ Executed. X X
Package backout/backin data, but
retaining package event
information.
Define Creates a new or updates an ■ In-edit for X X
Package existing package. an existing
package.
Delete Deletes an entire package from ■ Any status. X X
Package Endevor.
Deny Denies execution of a package. ■ In-approval. X X
Package
Execute Executes a package. ■ Approved. X X
Package
■ Exec-failed.
Export Writes the SCL associated with a ■ Any status. X X
Package package to an external data set.
Inspect The Inspect action checks each ■ Approved.
element for security, signout,
■ In-execution.
and synchronization conflicts
and source changes and reports ■ Exec-failed.
on the changes in element status
that might effect the successful
execution of the package. For a
list of Inspect validations, please
see the section titled "Validations
for Cast and Inspect" in the
Packages Guide.
Reset Resets a package back to a status ■ Any status. X X
Package of In-edit.

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL 5-3

5.1 Batch Package Facility

Action Description Required Status Exits Before Supported

After
Submit Submits a JCL job stream to ■ Approved.
Package execute one or more packages.
■ Executed if
the WHERE
PACKAGE
STATUS IS
EXECFAILED
clause is
specified
and if the
package
execution
has
previously
failed.

5.1.2 Batch Package Actions and Wildcarding

You can use wildcard package IDs for the following package actions:
■ Archive
■ Cast
■ Commit
■ Delete
■ Execute
■ Submit

When you wildcard a package ID, Endevor selects packages against

which you are authorized to perform actions. It is possible that a
package ID matches the wildcard you specify but is not selected for
the following reasons:
■ The package is in the wrong state for the action selected.
■ The package is non-sharable and you are not the owner of the
package.
■ The package has one or more approvers associated with it of
which you are not member.

Note that SCL inside of packages may not contain any wildcards.

5-4 SCL Reference Guide

 5.2 Batch Package Facility Execution

5.2 Batch Package Facility Execution

5.2.1 Overview
The Batch Package Facility, program ENBP1000, performs package
actions by executing SCL statements specified in the ENPSCLIN DD
statement. See the chapter, "About the SCL Language," for information
on SCL coding conventions. The following general rules apply to
ENBP1000 execution:
■ There is no defined limit to the number of package actions the
facility can process.
■ There is no defined limit to the number of SCL statements that you
can specify.
■ Statements are executed in the sequence provided.
■ Statements are parsed before any package actions are executed.
■ If parse errors are detected, none of the actions are executed.
■ Actions are processed as long as the action return code is 12 or
less. If a return of greater than 12 is received, all remaining
actions are bypassed.
■ If the same clause is specified multiple times in a statement, the
last clause specified is the one used.

5.2.2 Execution JCL

Below is an example of the JCL you use to invoke the Batch Package
Facility.
//ENBP1 EXEC PGM=NDVRC1,PARM='ENBP1'
//STEPLIB DD DSN=iprfx.iqual.AUTHLIB,
// DISP=SHR
//CONLIB DD DSN=iprfx.iqual.CONLIB,
// DISP=SHR
//C1MSGS1 DD SYSOUT=
//
// Uncomment the C1MSGS2 DD Statement if you want 
// the Summary Report written to this location. By
// default the summary is written to C1MSGS1. 
//
//C1MSGS2 DD SYSOUT=
//SYSTERM DD SYSOUT=
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=
//SYSABEND DD SYSOUT=
//
// The following 2 DD statements are used only by 
// SUBMIT PACKAGE action. 

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL 5-5

5.2 Batch Package Facility Execution

//
//JCLIN DD DSN=iprfx.iqual.JCLLIB(JOBCARD),
// DISP=SHR
//JCLOUT DD SYSOUT=(A,INTRDR),
// DCB=(LRECL=8,RECFM=F,BLKSIZE=8)
//ENPSCLIN DD 

DD Statement Descriptions

DD Statement Description
ENPSCLIN Defines the Batch Package Facility control statements. The DD statement can
refer to instream data, a sequential data set, or a partitioned data set with an
explicit member.
Where a partitioned data set option is used, only one archive action
permitted. You may archive multiple packages, however it must be done in
the same command. If you use a separate archive action for each package
being archived, only the last package in the PDS member will appear. For
example:
Archive Package to DDN ddname
Options where older than N days will archive all eligible packages to a PDS
member. Whereas the SCL:
Archive Package A to DDN ddname
Archive Package B to DDN ddname
will result in only package B residing in the Archive file.
The archive package file must be defined with variable length records and
have a minimum record length of 4200. The data set blocksize must be 4 bytes
greater than the record length. We recommend that you define a blocksize of
0 and let the system default to the optium block size.
If any of the data set attributes are incorrect, an error message is written and
a return code 12 is set.
C1MSGS1 Defines the destination of the Batch Package Facility execution reports. You
can write the Batch Package Facility Summary report to a different location by
uncommenting the C1MSGS2 DD statement in the sample JCL.
JCLIN Identifies the default location of the JCL jobcard to be used by the SUBMIT
PACKAGE action. The data set can be a sequential data set or a partitioned
data set with an explicit member. The DD statement is used only with the
SUBMIT PACKAGE action.
JCLOUT Identifies the default output of the SUBMIT PACKAGE action. Generally, the
DD statement refers to an internal reader but it can also refer to a sequential
data set or a partitioned data set with a explicit member name. The DD
statement is used only with the SUBMIT PACKAGE action.

5-6 SCL Reference Guide

 5.2 Batch Package Facility Execution

5.2.3 Validating Input SCL

You can check the syntax of your SCL statements before submitting
them for execution by using an optional parameter of VALIDATE on
the JCL PARM statement. When you specify the VALIDATE
parameter, the statements in the ENPSCLIN DD statement are parsed.
The statements are not executed. To specify the VALIDATE
parameter, change the PARM= statement on the sample JCL to
PARM='ENBP1000VALIDATE'.

5.2.4 Return Codes

The Batch Package Facility passes one of the following return codes
after execution is complete:

Return Code Meaning

0 All actions were performed successfully.
4 One or more actions completed with a warning message.
8 One or more actions completed with a caution message.
12 One or more action completed with an error message. The action may not
have completed successfully.
16 An unrecoverable error occurred.
20 The C1MSGS1 DD statement was not allocated or the C1MSGS1 file could not
be initialized.

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL 5-7

5.3 Approve Package

5.3 Approve Package

5.3.1 Overview
The APPROVE PACKAGE action approves packages for execution.
Use the APPROVE PACKAGE action against a package only if the
package has a status of In-approval or Denied.

5.3.2 Syntax

──APPRove PACkage──package-id────────────────────────────────
──┬──────────────────────────────────────────┬──.────────────
│ ┌─,───────────┐ │
─'note text'─┴──)─┘
└─OPTions──NOTEs──=──(───

5.3.2.1 Syntax Rules

APPROVE PACKAGE package-id

The APPROVE PACKAGE clause identifies the package you are

approving. You must use a fully specified package ID. The package
ID can include imbedded spaces. If the package ID contains an
imbedded space or if the ID comprises only numeric characters (for
example, 12345), enclose the package ID in either single or double
quotation marks.

OPTIONS

OPTION clauses allow you to further specify package actions.

NOTES — Use the NOTES clause to add remarks to the package

definition. Enclose the note text in either single or double quotation
marks. If you use multiple text lines, enclose each text line in
quotation marks and separate by commas. You can specify up to 8
note text lines of up to 60 characters each. This text replaces any text
that is already associated with the package.

5-8 SCL Reference Guide

 5.3 Approve Package

5.3.3 Example of Approve Package SCL

The following is an example of APPROVE PACKAGE SCL. The SCL
approves the package called PAYROLLPKGO1.
APPROVE PACKAGE PAYROLLPKG1.

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL 5-9

5.4 Archive Package

5.4 Archive Package

5.4.1 Overview
The ARCHIVE PACKAGE action offloads a package definition to an
external data set. The ARCHIVE PACKAGE action can, optionally,
delete the package after it is successfully written to the external data
set.

You can use the ARCHIVE action against a package that has a status
of Executed or against a package that has a status of Committed.
Regardless of whether the status is Executed or Committed, you
cannot use the ARCHIVE action with the delete option against any
package that has backout members.

5.4.2 Syntax
──ARChive PACkage──package-id──TO────────────────────────────────────
──┬─DDName──ddname────────────────────────────────────────┬───────────
└─DSNname──dsname──┬──────────────────────────────────┬─┘
└─MEMber──member-name──┬─────────┬─┘
└─REPlace─┘
──┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──.────────────
└─OPTion──¤──┬─WHEre OLDer THAn──number──DAYs─┬──¤─┘
└─DELete──┬───────────────┬──────┘
└─AFTer ARChive─┘

5.4.2.1 Syntax Rules

ARCHIVE PACKAGE package-id

The ARCHIVE PACKAGE clause identifies the package you are

archiving. You can either fully specify, partially wildcard or fully
wildcard the package ID. If you wildcard the package ID and specify
the OPTIONS DELETE AFTER ARCHIVE clause, you must specify the
WHERE OLDER THAN clause. If you fully specify the package ID,
the WHERE OLDER THAN clause is ignored.

You can include imbedded spaces in the package ID. If the package
ID contains an imbedded space or comprises only numeric characters
(for example, 12345) then enclose the package ID in either single or
double quotation marks.
TO DDNAME ddname
DSNAME dsname
MEMBER member-name
REPLACE

5-10 SCL Reference Guide

 5.4 Archive Package

The TO clause identifies the data set to which you are archiving the
package. You must enter either a DDname or a data set name.
Specify only one of the two statements. The archive package file must
be defined with variable length records and have a minimum record
length of 4200. The data set blocksize must be 4 bytes greater than the
record length. We recommend that you define a blocksize of 0 and let
the system default to the optium block size

The TO DDNAME clause identifies the name of an allocated DD

statement. The DD statement must reference a sequential data set or a
partitioned data set with an explicit member.

The TO DSNAME clause identifies the name of an existing, catalogued

data set. If the data set is a partitioned data set, you can use the
member clause to specify a member name to be created. If you do no
specify a MEMBER clause, the member name created is TEMPNAME.
The REPLACE clause replaces an existing, like-named member. You
can use the REPLACE clause is only if the MEMBER clause is
specified.

OPTIONS

OPTION clauses allow you to further specify package actions.

WHERE OLDER THAN number DAYS — This clause allows you to

specify the minimum age of the package you are archiving. The
package must be older than the number of days you specify in order
for it to be archived. For example, if you specify WHERE OLDER
THAN 30 DAYS and the current date is January 31, only packages
executed successfully or committed on or before January 1 are
archived. There is no default value for the WHERE OLDER THAN
clause. You must specify the WHERE OLDER THAN clause if you
wildcard the package ID and specify the OPTIONS DELETE AFTER
ARCHIVE clause. If you fully specify the package ID, the WHERE
OLDER THAN clause is ignored. The WHERE OLDER THAN value
must be between 0 and 999, inclusive. You receive an error message if
you specify a value outside this range.

DELETE AFTER ARCHIVE— This option deletes the package after

the package definitions are successfully archived.

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL 5-11

5.4 Archive Package

5.4.3 Example of Archive Package SCL

The following is an example of ARCHIVE PACKAGE SCL. The SCL
archives all packages that begin with PAYROLLPKG and are older
than 30 days. The packages are deleted after they have been archived.
ARCHIVE PACKAGE PAYROLLPKG
TO DSNAME 'PAY.PACKAGE.ARCHIVE'
OPTIONS WHERE OLDER THAN 3 DAYS
DELETE AFTER ARCHIVE.

5-12 SCL Reference Guide

 5.5 Backin Package

5.5 Backin Package

5.5.1 Overview
The BACKIN action reverses the BACKOUT action and returns outputs
to a status of Executed. You can use the BACKIN action against a
package that has a status of Executed and has been backed-out.

5.5.2 Syntax

──BACKIn PACkage──package-id──.─────────────────────────────

5.5.2.1 Syntax Rules

BACKIN PACKAGE package-id

The BACKIN PACKAGE clause identifies the package you are

backing-in. You must use a fully specified package ID. You can
include imbedded spaces in the package ID. If the package ID
contains an imbedded space or if the ID comprises only numeric
characters (for example, 12345), then enclose the package ID in either
single or double quotation marks.

5.5.3 Example of Backin Package SCL

The following is an example of BACKIN PACKAGE SCL. The SCL
backs in the package called PAYROLLPKG01.
BACKIN PACKAGE PAYROLLPKG1.

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL 5-13

5.6 Backout Package

5.6 Backout Package

5.6.1 Overview
The BACKOUT action allows a package to be backed-out after it has
been executed. The BACKOUT action restores the executable and
output modules to the status they were in prior to execution. You can
use the BACKOUT action against a package only if the package has a
status of Executed, In-execution, or Exec-failed and was created with
the BACKOUT option enabled.

5.6.2 Syntax

──BACKOut PACkage──package-id──.────────────────────────────

5.6.2.1 Syntax Rules

BACKOUT PACKAGE package-id

The BACKOUT PACKAGE clause identifies the package you are

backing-out. You must use a fully specified package ID. You can
include imbedded spaces in the package ID. If the package ID
contains an imbedded space or if the ID comprises only numeric
characters (for example, 12345), then enclose the package ID in either
single or double quotation marks.

5.6.3 Example of Backout Package SCL

The following is an example of BACKOUT PACKAGE SCL. The SCL
backs out the package called PAYROLLPKG01.
BACKOUT PACKAGE PAYROLLPKG1.

5-14 SCL Reference Guide

 5.7 Cast Package

5.7 Cast Package

5.7.1 Overview
The CAST action prepares the package for review and subsequent
execution. Casting a package freezes the contents of the package and
prevents further changes to the package. You can use the CAST action
against a package that has a status of In-edit.

5.7.2 Syntax
──CASt PACkage──package-id───────────────────────────────────────────
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──.───────
└─OPTion──¤──┬─────────────────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─┬─BACKOut──┬────┬──ENAbled─┬────────┤
│ │ └─IS─┘ │ │
│ └─BACKOut──IS NOT──ENAbled─┘ │
│ ┌─VALidate COMPonent──────────────┐ │
├─┼─VALidate COMPonent WITh WARning─┼─┤
│ └─DO NOT VALidate COMPonent───────┘ │
├─EXECUTion WINdow──┤ FROM TO ├───────┤
│ ┌─,───────────┐ │
└─NOTE=──(─── ─'note-text'─┴──)────────┘
FROM TO:
├──FROm from-date from-time──┬─────────────────────┬───────────────────┤
└─ TO to-date to-time─┘

5.7.2.1 Syntax Rules

CAST PACKAGE package-id

The CAST PACKAGE clause identifies the package you are casting.
The package ID can be either fully specified, partially wildcarded or
fully wildcarded.

You can include imbedded spaces in the package ID. If the package
ID contains an imbedded space or if the ID is comprised of only
numeric digits (for example, 12345) then enclose the package ID in
either single or double quotation marks.

OPTIONS

Option clauses allow you to further specify package actions.

BACKOUT IS ENABLED/NOT ENABLED — The BACKOUT IS

ENABLED/NOT ENABLED option indicates whether the backout
facility will be available for this package.

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL 5-15

5.7 Cast Package

VALIDATE COMPONENTS — The VALIDATE COMPONENTS

option enables component validation within the package. You can
only use this clause if your site allows you to specify whether
component validation is to be performed.

The VALIDATE COMPONENTS clause causes the action to fail if

component validation fails. The VALIDATE COMPONENTS WITH
WARNING clause generates a warning if component validation fails.
For information on component validation see the Packages Guide.

EXECUTION WINDOW FROM from-date from-time TO to-date

to-time — The EXECUTION WINDOW clause allows you to change
the execution window of the package as part of cast processing. You
can use the EXECUTION WINDOW clause only if the package ID is
fully qualified. Specify date values in DDMMMYY format and the
time values in HH:MM format. If you specify the from-date, you must
also specify the from-time. If you specify the to-date, you must also
specify the to-time.

NOTES — Use the NOTES clause to add remarks to the package

definition. Enclose the note text in either single or double quotation
marks. If you use multiple text lines, enclose each text line in
quotation marks and separate by commas. You can specify a
maximum of 8 note text lines of up to 60 characters each. This text
replaces any text that is already associated with the package.

5.7.3 Example of Cast Package SCL

The following is an example of CAST PACKAGE SCL. The SCL casts
a package called PAYROLLPKG01.
CAST PACKAGE PAYROLLPKG1.

5-16 SCL Reference Guide

 5.8 Commit Package

5.8 Commit Package

5.8.1 Overview
The COMMIT PACKAGE action removes all backout/backin data
while retaining package event information. You can use the COMMIT
action against a package only if the package has a status of Executed
or Exec-failed.

5.8.2 Syntax

──COMMit PACkage──package-id─────────────────────────────────
──┬──────────────────────────────────────┬──.────────────────
└─OPTion──WHEre OLDer THAn number DAYs─┘

5.8.2.1 Syntax Rules

COMMIT PACKAGE package-id

The COMMIT PACKAGE clause identifies the package you are

committing. You can use a fully specified, partially wildcarded or
fully wildcarded package ID. If you wildcard the package ID, you
must specify the WHERE OLDER THAN clause. If you fully specify
the package ID, the WHERE OLDER THAN clause is ignored.

You can include imbedded spaces in the package ID. If the package
ID contains an imbedded space or comprises only numeric digits (for
example, 12345), enclose the package ID in either single or double
quotation marks.

OPTIONS

OPTION clauses allow you to further specify package actions.

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL 5-17

5.8 Commit Package

WHERE OLDER THAN number DAYS— This clause allows you to

specify the minimum age of the package you are committing. A
package must be older than the number of days you specify in order
to commit it. For example, if you specify WHERE OLDER THAN 30
DAYS and the current date is January 31, only packages executed
successfully on or before January 1 are committed. There is no default
value for the WHERE OLDER THAN clause. If you wildcard the
package ID you must specify the WHERE OLDER THAN clause. The
WHERE OLDER THAN value must be between 0 and 999, inclusive.
You receive an error message if you specify a value outside this range.

5.8.3 Example of Commit Package SCL

The following are two examples of SCL for the COMMIT PACKAGE
action. The first example commits a specific package called
PAYROLLPKG01. The second example commits all packages that
begin with PAYROLLPKG and are more than 30 days old.

Example One
COMMIT PACKAGE PAYROLLPKG1.

Example Two
COMMIT PACKAGE PAYROLLPKG
OPTIONS WHERE OLDER THAN 3 DAYS.

5-18 SCL Reference Guide

 5.9 Define Package

5.9 Define Package

5.9.1 Overview
The DEFINE PACKAGE action creates a new package or updates an
existing one. If you use the DEFINE PACKAGE action to update an
existing package, the package must be in In-edit status.

Note: If you are using the DEFINE PACKAGE action to update an

existing package and do not specify a DESCRIPTION, IMPORT SCL
FROM, COPY PACKAGE or any OPTIONS, you will receive a
caution-level message indicating that the update will not be performed
because no information was provided to update the package.

5.9.2 Syntax

──DEFine PACkage──package-id─────────────────────────────────────────
──┬─COPy──┬──────┬──PACkage──package-id──────────────────────────┬────
│ └─FROm─┘ │
└─IMPort SCL FROm──┬─DDName──ddname──────────────────────────┬─┘
└─DSName──dsname──┬─────────────────────┬─┘
└─MEMber──member-name─┘
┌─DO NOT APPEnd─┐
──┼───────────────┼───────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─APPEnd────────┘
──DEScription──description-text──┬─────────────────────┬──.──────────
└─OPTion──┤ OPTIONS ├─┘
OPTIONS:
├──¤──┬──────────────────────────────────┬──¤──────────────────────────┤
│ ┌─STANdard──┐ │
├─┴─EMErgency─┴──┬─────────┬───────┤
│ └─PACkage─┘ │
│ ┌─NONsharable─┐ │
├─┴─SHArable────┴──┬─────────┬─────┤
│ └─PACkage─┘ │
│ ┌─BACKOut──┬────┬──ENAbled─────┐ │
│ │ └─IS─┘ │ │
├─┴─BACKout──┬────┬──NOT ENAbled─┴─┤
│ └─IS─┘ │
├─EXECUTion WINdow──┤ FROM TO ├────┤
│ ┌─,───────────┐ │
└─NOTEs──=──(─── ─'note text'─┴──)──┘
FROM TO:
├──FROm──from-date──from-time──┬──────────────────────┬────────────────┤
└─TO──to-date──to-time─┘

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL 5-19

5.9 Define Package

5.9.2.1 Syntax Rules

DEFINE PACKAGE package-id

The DEFINE PACKAGE clause identifies the package you are creating
or updating. An update occurs if the package ID exists and a create
occurs if it does not exist.

You must use a fully specified non-blank package ID. If you specify a
blank package ID and have the GENPKGID exit defined, the
GENPKGID exit invokes to generate a new package ID. If you do not
have the GENPKGID exit installed or if the GENPKGID exit does not
supply a package ID, an error message generates and the DEFINE
PACKAGE action fails.

To specify a blank package ID place one or more blanks in single or

double quotation marks as the DEFINE PACKAGE package-id
statement. A blank package ID implies that the package is to be
created.

See the Exits Guide for information on the GENPKID exit function.

COPY FROM PACKAGE package-id

The COPY FROM PACKAGE clause directs the DEFINE action to copy
the SCL from the package you specify into the package you are
creating or updating. You must use a fully specified package ID.

If you are creating a new package you must specify either the COPY
FROM PACKAGE or the IMPORT SCL FROM clause. If you are
updating an existing package, the clauses are optional.

IMPORT SCL FROM

The IMPORT SCL FROM clause directs the DEFINE action to copy the
SCL from the DD statement or data set name you specify into the
package you are creating or updating.

If you are creating a new package you must specify either the COPY
FROM PACKAGE or the IMPORT SCL FROM clause. If you are
updating an existing package, the clauses are optional.

APPEND/DO NOT APPEND

The APPEND clause indicates whether to append the SCL you are
adding to the existing package SCL or to replace it. You can only use
the clause if you specify the COPY PACKAGE or IMPORT SCL FROM
clauses. The default is DO NOT APPEND.

5-20 SCL Reference Guide

 5.9 Define Package

DESCRIPTION

The DESCRIPTION clause allows you to associate a 50-character

description with the package. You must specify this clause if you are
creating a new package. If you are updating an existing package the
clause is optional. If the description text contains imbedded spaces
enclose it in single quotation marks. The description text you enter is
not converted to uppercase. Lowercase characters remain in lowercase.

OPTIONS

OPTION clauses allow you to further specify package actions.

STANDARD/EMERGENCY PACKAGE — This option allows you to

specify the package type. If you do not specify the
STANDARD/EMERGENCY PACKAGE clause and you are creating a
new package, the package defaults to a STANDARD package.

SHARABLE/NONSHARABLE PACKAGE — This option allows you

to specify whether this package can be edited by more than one person
when in In-edit status. If the package is sharable it can be edited by
someone other than the package creator. If the package is
non-sharable it can only be edited by its creator. If you do not specify
the SHARABLE/NONSHARABLE PACKAGE clause and you are
creating a new package, the package defaults to a NONSHARABLE
package.

BACKOUT IS ENABLED/NOT ENABLED — The BACKOUT IS

ENABLED/NOT ENABLED option indicates whether you wish to
have the backout facility available for this package. Use this clause
when creating a new package only. The default is BACKOUT IS
ENABLED.

EXECUTION WINDOW FROM from-date from-time TO to-date

to-time— This option allows you to specify the time frame within
which to execute the package. Specify date values in DDMMMYY
format and the time values in HH:MM format.

If you specify the from-date, you must also specify the from-time. If
you specify neither the from-date nor the from-time and you are
creating a new package, the from-date and the from-time default to the
current date and time, respectively.

If you specify the to-date, you must also specify the to-time. If you
specify neither the to-date nor the to-time and you are creating a new
package, the to-date and the to-time default to 31DEC99 and 00:00,
respectively.

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL 5-21

5.9 Define Package

NOTES — Use the NOTES clause to add remarks to the package

definition. Enclose the note text in either single or double quotation
marks. If you use multiple text lines, enclose all the lines in
parentheses () and enclose each text line in single quotation marks,
separated with a comma. You can specify up to 8 text lines of up to
60 characters each. A note line cannot be split across syntax lines (that
is, the beginning and ending quote must be on the same line). The
text including the last quote cannot exceed column 72. The text
replaces any text which is already associated with the package.

5.9.3 Example of Define Package SCL

The following is an example of DEFINE PACKAGE SCL. The SCL
defines a new package called PAYROLLPKG01, to be used to
implement a new payroll system. The SCL is copied from the data set
specified by the IMPORT SCL FROM DSNAME clause.
DEFINE PACKAGE PAYROLLPKG1
DESCRIPTION 'PACKAGE TO IMPLEMENT THE NEW PAYROLL SYSTEM'
IMPORT SCL FROM DSNAME 'PAY.PACKAGE.SCL' MEMBER 'ADDSCL1'
OPTIONS EXECUTION WINDOW FROM 1JAN93 :1 TO 31DEC93 23:59
BACKOUT IS ENABLED
SHARABLE PACKAGE
STANDARD PACKAGE
NOTES=('THIS PACKAGE IMPLEMENTS THE NEW PAYROLL SYSTEM.',
'THE SCL FOR THIS PACKAGE WAS IMPORTED','FROM SERVICE PACK SP1.',
'THE PACKAGE MUST BE CAST AND APPROVED BY JUNE 3.').

5-22 SCL Reference Guide

 5.10 Delete Package

5.10 Delete Package

5.10.1 Overview
The DELETE PACKAGE action allows you to delete packages. You
can use the DELETE PACKAGE action to delete packages of any status
type.

5.10.2 Syntax
──DELEte PACkage──package-id──────────────────────────────────────────────────
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──.────────────────────
└─OPTions──¤──┬────────────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
├─WHEre OLDer THAn──number──DAYS─┤
└─┤ WHERE PACKAGE STATUS ├───────┘
WHERE PACKAGE STATUS:
┌──
────────┐
├──WHEre PACkage STATus──┬────┬──ALLstate─── ─┬────┬─┴──┬─INEdit──────┬──────────┤
└─IS─┘ └─OR─┘ ├─INApproval──┤
├─DENied──────┤
├─APProved────┤
├─INEXecution─┤
├─EXECUTED────┤
├─EXECFailed──┤
└─COMMITTEd───┘

5.10.2.1 Syntax Rules

DELETE PACKAGE package-id

The DELETE PACKAGE clause identifies the package you are deleting.
You can use a fully specified, partially wildcarded or fully wildcarded
package ID. If you wildcard the package ID, you must specify the
WHERE PACKAGE STATUS IS clause. If you use a fully specified
package ID, the WHERE PACKAGE STATUS IS and the WHERE
OLDER THAN clauses are ignored.

OPTIONS

OPTION clauses allow you to further specify package actions.

WHERE OLDER THAN number DAYS— Use this clause to specify

the minimum age of the packages you are deleting. A package must
be older than the number of days you specify in order to delete it.

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL 5-23

5.10 Delete Package

WHERE PACKAGE STATUS — This clause specifies the statuses of

the packages you are deleting. You can only use this clause when you
wildcard the package ID. If you do not specify the WHERE
PACKAGE STATUS clause, the DELETE PACKAGE action deletes
packages of any status type.

5.10.3 Example of Delete Package SCL

The following is an example of DELETE PACKAGE SCL. The SCL
deletes all packages that begin with PAYROLLPKG, are older than 30
days, and are in the In-edit status.
DELETE PACKAGE PAYROLLPKG
OPTIONS WHERE OLDER THAN 3 DAYS
WHERE PACKAGE STATUS IS INEDIT.

5-24 SCL Reference Guide

 5.11 Deny Package

5.11 Deny Package

5.11.1 Overview
The DENY PACKAGE action changes the status of a package to
Denied. You can use the DENY action against a package that has a
status of In-approval.

5.11.2 Syntax
──DENY PACkage──package-id──┬──────────────────────────────────┬─────
└─OPTion──┬──────────────────────┬─┘
│ ┌─,────────────────┐ │
└── NOTE=('note-text')┴─┘
──.──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

5.11.2.1 Syntax Rules

DENY PACKAGE package-id

The DENY PACKAGE clause identifies the package you wish to deny.
You must use a fully specified package ID.

OPTIONS

OPTION clauses allow you to further specify package actions.

NOTES — You can use the NOTES clause to add remarks to the
package definition. Enclose the note text in either single or double
quotation marks. If you use multiple text lines, enclose each text line
in quotation marks, and separate by commas. You can specify up to 8
text lines of up to 60 characters each. The text replaces any text that is
already associated with the package.

5.11.3 Example of Deny Package SCL

The following is an example of DENY PACKAGE SCL. The SCL
denies the package called PAYROLLPKG01 and replaces any package
notes associated with the package.
DENY PACKAGE PAYROLLPKG1
OPTIONS NOTES=('THE PACKAGE WAS DENIED BECAUSE ALL OF THE DOC- ',
'UMENTATION WAS NOT INCLUDED IN THE PACKAGE.',
'NOTE: THESE NOTES WILL REPLACE ANY EXISTING',
'PACKAGE NOTES.').

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL 5-25

5.12 Execute Package

5.12 Execute Package

5.12.1 Overview
The EXECUTE PACKAGE action executes a package. You can use the
EXECUTE PACKAGE action against packages that have a status of
Approved or Execfailed. The default is to only execute approved
packages.

5.12.2 Syntax
──EXEcute PACkage──package-id────────────────────────────────────────
──┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──.────────
│ ┌─WHEre PACkage STATus─┬────┬─APPROVED─┐ │
│ │ └─IS─┘ │ │
└─OPTions──¤──┼──────────────────────────────────────┼─┘
├─EXECUTIon WINdow──┤ FROM TO ├────────┤
├─┬────┬──EXECFailed───────────────────┤
│ └─OR─┘ │
└─¤────────────────────────────────────┘
FROM TO:
├──FROm from-date from-time TO to-date to-time─────────────────────────┤

5.12.2.1 Syntax Rules

EXECUTE PACKAGE package-id

The EXECUTE PACKAGE clause identifies the package you wish to

execute. You can use a fully specified, partially wildcarded, or fully
wildcarded package ID. When the package-id is fully or partially
wildcarded and a "where status" clause is specified, the "where status"
clause will be ignored and the parser will issue a warning message.

OPTIONS

OPTION clauses allow you to further specify action requests.

EXECUTION WINDOW FROM from-date from-time TO to-date

to-time— Use this option to specify the time frame within which to
execute the package. Specify date values in DDMMMYY format and
the time values in HH:MM format. If you specify the from-date, you
must also specify the from-time. If you specify the to-date, you must
also specify the to-time. You can only use the EXECUTION WINDOW
clause if the package is fully qualified and the existing execution
window is closed.

5-26 SCL Reference Guide

 5.12 Execute Package

WHERE PACKAGE STATUS—Use the WHERE PACKAGE STATUS

clause to identify the statuses of the packages you are executing. The
default is to execute packages that have a status of Approved.

If you specify the WHERE PACKAGE STATUS IS APPROVED clause,

the package must have a status of Approved. You can only use this
clause when you wildcard the package-id.

Use the WHERE PACKAGE STATUS IS EXECFAILED clause to

re-execute packages that have previously failed. You can only use this
clause if the package has a status of Executed and the package
execution failed.

Use the OR clause to indicate that packages of either status can be

executed.

5.12.3 Example of Execute Package SCL

The following is an example of EXECUTE PACKAGE SCL. The SCL
executes the package called PAYROLLPKG01.
EXECUTE PACKAGE PAYROLLPKG1.

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL 5-27

5.13 Export Package

5.13 Export Package

5.13.1 Overview
The EXPORT PACKAGE action writes the SCL associated with a
package to an external data set. You can use the EXPORT PACKAGE
action against a package of any status type.

5.13.2 Syntax
──EXPort PACkage──package-id──TO─────────────────────────────────────
──┬─DDName──ddname────────────────────────────────────────┬──.───────
└─DSNname──dsname──┬──────────────────────────────────┬─┘
└─MEMber──member-name──┬─────────┬─┘
└─REPlace─┘

5.13.2.1 Syntax Rules

EXPORT PACKAGE package-id

The EXPORT PACKAGE clause identifies the package you are

exporting. You must use a fully specified package ID.
TO DDNAME ddname
DSNAME dsname
MEMBER member-name
REPLACE

The TO clause identifies where to write the package SCL. Enter either
a DDname or a data set name, not both. The data set defined by the
TO DDNAME/DSNAME clause must be allocated with either fixed or
variable length records. If fixed, the record length must be 80. If
variable, the record length must be at least 84.

The TO DDNAME clause identifies the name of an allocated DD

statement. The DD statement must reference a sequential data set or a
partitioned data set with an explicit member.

The TO DSNAME clause identifies the name of an existing catalogued

data set. If the data set is a partitioned data set, you can use the
member clause to specify a member name to be created. If you do no
specify a MEMBER clause, the member name created is TEMPNAME.
The REPLACE clause replaces an existing like-named member. You
can only use the REPLACE clause if the MEMBER clause is specified.

5-28 SCL Reference Guide

 5.13 Export Package

5.13.3 Example of Export Package SCL

The following is an example of EXPORT PACKAGE SCL. The SCL
exports the package SCL to the data set called PAY.PACKAGE.SCL.
The MEMBER clause specifies a member to be created called
PAYPKGO1. It replaces any like-named member.
EXPORT PACKAGE PAYROLLPKG1
TO DSNAME 'PAY.PACKAGE.SCL' MEMBER 'PAYPKG1' REPLACE.

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL 5-29

5.14 Inspect Package

5.14 Inspect Package

5.14.1 Overview
The Inspect Package action checks the elements contained within a
package for conflicts that would effect its successful execution. The
Inspect action checks for security, signout, and synchronization
conflicts as well as changes in source. You can use the Inspect
Package action to inspect packages that have the following status:
■ In-approval
■ Approved
■ Exec-failed

5.14.2 Syntax

──INSpect PACkage──package-id──.────────────────────────────

5.14.2.1 Syntax Rules

INSPECT PACKAGE package-id

The INSPECT PACKAGE clause identifies the package you are

inspecting. You can use a fully specified, partially wildcarded, or fully
wildcarded package ID. If you partially or fully wildcard the package
ID, Endevor only inspects packages that have a status of in-approval,
approved, or execution failed.

5-30 SCL Reference Guide

 5.15 Reset Package

5.15 Reset Package

5.15.1 Overview
The RESET PACKAGE action allows you to set the status of a package
back to In-edit so you can modify it. You can use the RESET action
against a package of any status type.

5.15.2 Syntax

──RESet PACkage──package-id──.──────────────────────────────

5.15.2.1 Syntax Rules

RESET PACKAGE package-id

The RESET PACKAGE clause identifies the package you are resetting.
You must use a fully specified package ID. The RESET PACKAGE
action resets a package of any status type.

5.15.3 Example of Reset Package SCL

The following is an example of RESET PACKAGE SCL. The SCL
resets the package called PAYROLLPKGO1 back to the status of
In-edit.
RESET PACKAGE PAYROLLPKG1.

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL 5-31

5.16 Submit Package

5.16 Submit Package

5.16.1 Overview
Use the SUBMIT PACKAGE action to submit a JCL job stream to
execute one or more packages. The SUBMIT PACKAGE action is a
replacement for the existing Batch Package Submission Utility
C1BM6000. Users of C1BM6000 must migrate from C1BM6000 to
ENBP1000. For more information on ENBP1000 and SUBMIT
PACKAGE action see the Packages Guide.

5.16.2 Syntax
──SUBmit PACkage──package-id──────────────────────────────────────────────────
──┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬─────────────────────
│ ┌─JCLIN──┐ │
└─JOBCard──┬─DDName──┴─ddname─┴──────────────────────┬─┘
└─DSName──dsname──┬─────────────────────┬─┘
└─MEMber──member-name─┘
──┬──────────────────────────────────────────────┬─────────────────────────────
└─TO──┬──────────────────────────────────────┬─┘
│ ┌─JCLOUT─┐ │
├─INTernal──REAder──DDName──┴─ddname─┴─┤
└─CA7──────────────────────────────────┘
──┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬─────────
└─OPTion──¤──┬────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──¤─┘
│ ┌─WHEre PACkage STATus─┐ ┌─APPROVED─┐ │
├─┴──────────────────────┴──┬────┬──┴──────────┴─┤
│ └─IS─┘ │
├─┬────┬──EXECFailed─────────────────────────────┤
│ └─OR─┘ │
├─MULtiple JOBStreams────────────────────────────┤
│ ┌─INCrement JOBName────────┐ │
├─┴─DO NOT INCrement JOBName─┴───────────────────┤
└─JCL PROcedure──┬──────┬──┬────┬──procname──────┘
└─NAMe─┘ └─IS─┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────┬──.────────────────────────────
└─CA7──OPTIONS──┬─────────────────────────┬─┘
└─DEPEndent──JOB──jobname─┘

5.16.2.1 Syntax Rules

SUBMIT PACKAGE package-id

The SUBMIT PACKAGE clause identifies the package you are

submitting for execution. You can use a fully specified, partially
wildcarded, or fully wildcarded package ID. When the package-id is
fully or partially wildcarded and a "where status" clause is specified,
the "where status" clause will be ignored and the parser will issue a
warning message.
JOBCARD DDNAME JCLIN
DDNAME ddname
DSNAME dsname
MEMBER member-name

5-32 SCL Reference Guide

 5.16 Submit Package

The JOBCARD clause identifies the location of the data set that
contains the JCL jobcard. The location be either a DDname or data set
name. If you do not specify the JOBCARD clause, the JCLIN DD
statement is used by default as the JCL jobcard location. If you specify
this clause, the clause must identify either a sequential or a partitioned
data set with an explicitly specified member name. The data set must
have fixed length records and the record length (LRECL) must be
exactly 80.

INTERNAL READER DDNAME

The INTERNAL READER DDNAME clause identifies the name of a

preallocated DD statement to which the JCL is written. Generally, this
is allocated as DD SYSOUT=(class,INTRDR). The DD statement can
also reference any sequential or partitioned data set with an explicit
member that has a record length (LRECL) of 80. If you do not specify
the INTERNAL READER DDNAME clause, the SUBMIT PACKAGE
action writes the JCL to the JCLOUT DD statement.

CA7

If the TO CA7 clause is specified, neither the MULTIPLE

JOBSTREAMS nor the INCREMENT JOBNAME parameters may be
specified.

If the TO CA7 clause is not specified, any specifications for CA7

options will be ignored.

OPTIONS

OPTION clauses allow you to further specify package actions.

WHERE PACKAGE STATUS —Use the WHERE PACKAGE STATUS

clause to identify the statuses of the packages you are submitting. You
can submit packages that are in the Approved status or the Execfailed
status or both. Use the OR clause to execute packages of either status.
If do not use the OR clause, you can only specify one package status.
If you do not specify the WHERE PACKAGE STATUS clause, any
package that has a status of Approved is submitted.

MULTIPLE JOBSTREAMS — Use the MULTIPLE JOBSTREAMS

clause to submit a separate, unique job for each package. This clause
is equivalent to the C1BM6000 MULTJOBS JCL parameter. If you do
not specify this clause a single job that has a unique job step for each
package is submitted. A maximum of 200 packages can be processed
in a single job stream. If more than 200 packages meet the selection
criteria, the SUBMIT action submits additional jobs, each with up to
200 steps, until all of the eligible packages have been submitted.

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL 5-33

5.16 Submit Package

Note: C1BM6000 has been replaced by the Batch Facility (ENBP1000).

Users of C1BM6000 must migrate from C1BM6000 to ENBP1000. for
more information on ENBP1000 please see SCL Reference Guide

INCREMENT JOBNAME — The INCREMENT JOBNAME clause

directs the Batch Package Facility to increment the last character in the
jobcard you provide. In general, use the INCREMENT JOBNAME
clause with the MULTIPLE JOBSTREAM clause to increment the last
character in the JCL jobcard for each job stream you submit.

You can also use the INCREMENT JOBNAME clause when you submit
a single job stream and more than 200 eligible packages are found. If
an additional job stream is created, the INCREMENT JOBNAME clause
controls whether the additional job names are incremented. The
SUBMIT action uses the following rules when incrementing the last
character in the job name:
■ If the character is numeric, the next number is selected with
wrap-around to '0'.
■ If the character is alphabetic, the next letter is selected with
wrap-around to 'A'.
■ If the character is neither numeric nor alphabetic, it is not
incremented.

JCL PROCEDURE NAME — The JCL PROCEDURE NAME clause

identifies the name of the JCL procedure you wish to invoke in the
SUBMIT PACKAGE action JCL. The name must be one to eight
characters long and constructed to accept the package ID as the only
parm. The symbolic to pass the package ID is PKGID. For example:
//ENDEVOR PROC PKGID=
//PSO1 EXEC PGM=NDVRC1,PARM=(C1BM3,,&PKGID)

If you do not specify the JCL procedure name the SUBMIT PACKAGE
action creates JCL to invoke the Endevor procedure.

CA7 OPTIONS DEPENDENT JOB jobname

DEPENDENT JOB Specifies a single predecessor job which must

complete while demanded job is waiting.

5-34 SCL Reference Guide

 5.16 Submit Package

For example: ca7 options dependent job cicsdown—This means that

package ENDEVOR will not run until jobname cicsdown is
successfully completed.
SCL Example:
SUBMIT PACKAGE 'ENDEVOR'
JOBCARD DSNAME 'BST.ENDEVOR.JCLLIB'
MEMBER 'JOBCARD'
TO CA7
OPTIONS WHERE PACKAGE STATUS IS APPROVED
JCL PROCEDURE NAME IS ENDEVOR
CA7 OPTIONS DEPENDENT JOB CICSDOWN.

CA7 Translate the above SCL into CA7 syntax similar to this:
DEMAND,JOB=PILRO1C,DEPJOB=CICSDOWN,
SET=NDB,JCLLIB=&ENDEVOR
For more information on CA-7 DEMAND, please refer to the CA7
commands manual or contact you local CA7 Support.

5.16.3 Example of Submit Package SCL

The following is an example of SUBMIT PACKAGE SCL. The SCL
submits for execution all packages that begin with PAYROLLPKG.
Each package will have a unique job, the jobname will not be
incremented.
SUBMIT PACKAGE PAYROLLPKG
OPTIONS DO NOT INCREMENT JOBNAME.

Chapter 5. Batch Package SCL 5-35

5-36 SCL Reference Guide
Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-1

6.1 Batch Environment Administration Facility

6.1 Batch Environment Administration Facility

Endevor's Batch Environment Administration Facility provides you
with the ability to perform administrative functions in batch,
eliminating the need to navigate multiple screens to create or change
environment definitions.

The facility is controlled through SCL statements that provide the

following functions:

Statement Function
Build Creates DEFINE SCL statements from an existing environment structure.
Define Creates a new or updates an existing environment definition.
Delete Deletes an existing environment definition.

The BUILD, DEFINE, and DELETE statements manage the following

environment definitions:
■ Approver group
■ Approver group relationships
■ Element types
■ Package shipment data set mapping rules
■ Package shipment destination
■ Processor groups
■ Processor symbols
■ Subsystem
■ Systems
■ Type sequence

6-2 SCL Reference Guide

 6.1 Batch Environment Administration Facility

6.2 Batch Environment Administration Facility Execution

6.2.1 Overview
The Batch Environment Administration Facility, ENBE1000, allows you
to administer environment definitions in batch mode by executing SCL
statements specified in the ENESCLIN DD statement. The following
general rules apply to ENBE1000 execution:
■ You can specify statements in any order after the action name.
■ There is no defined limit to the number of statements you can
specify and process in a single execution.
■ Statements are executed in the sequence you provide.
■ Statements are parsed before execution.
■ If any syntax errors are found, none of the statements are
processed.
■ Statements are processed as long as the action return code is less
than or equal to 12. If a return of greater than 12 is received all
remaining statements are bypassed.

6.2.2 Execution JCL

An example of the JCL used to invoke the Batch Environment
Administration Facility is shown below.

//ENBE1 EXEC PGM=NDVRC1,PARM='ENBE1'

//ENBE1 EXEC PGM=NDVRC1,PARM='ENBE1VALIDATE'
//STEPLIB DD DSN=iprfx.iqual.AUTHLIB,
// DISP=SHR
//CONLIB DD DSN=iprfx.iqual.CONLIB,
// DISP=SHR
//C1MSGS1 DD SYSOUT=
//
// Uncomment the C1MSGS2 DD Statement if you want 
// the Summary Report written to this location. By
// default the summary is written to C1MSGS1. 
//
//C1MSGS2 DD SYSOUT=
//SYSTERM DD SYSOUT=
//SYSABEND DD SYSOUT=
//ENESCLIN DD ,
control statements
/

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-3

6.2 Batch Environment Administration Facility Execution

6.2.3 DD Statement Descriptions

The following table shows the DD statement descriptions:

DD Statement Description
ENESCLIN Defines the Batch Environment Administration Facility SCL statements.
The DD statement can refer to instream data, a sequential data set or a
partitioned data set with an explicit member.
If the ENESCLIN DD statement refers to a data set, the data set must
have either fixed length or variable length records. If the records are
fixed length, the record length must be exactly 80. If the records are
variable length, the record length must be at least 84.
If any of the data set attributes are incorrect, an error message is written
and a return code of 12 is set.
C1MSGS1 Defines the destination of the Batch Environment Administration Facility
Execution report. By default, the report is written to this destination.
You can write the report to a different location by uncommenting the
C1MSGS2 DD statement in the sample JCL.

6.2.4 Validating Input SCL

You can check the syntax of your SCL statements before submitting
them for execution by using an optional parameter of VALIDATE on
the JCL PARM statement. When you specify the VALIDATE
parameter, the statements specified in the ENESCLIN DD statement
are parsed. The statements are not executed. To specify the
VALIDATE parameter, change the PARM= statement on the sample
JCL to PARM='ENBE1000VALIDATE'.

6-4 SCL Reference Guide

 6.2 Batch Environment Administration Facility Execution

6.2.5 Return Codes

The Batch Environment Administration Facility passes one of the
following return codes after execution is complete:

Return Code Meaning

0 All actions were performed successfully.
4 One or more actions completed with a warning message.
8 One or more actions completed with a caution message.
12 One or more action completed with an error message. The action may
not have completed successfully.
16 An unrecoverable error occurred.
20 The C1MSGS1 DD statement was not allocated or the C1MSGS1 file
could not be initialized.

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-5

6.2 Batch Environment Administration Facility Execution

6.2.6 Execution Reports

As the Batch Environment Administration Facility is processing,
Endevor writes a report to the C1MSGS1 DD statement. The report is
divided into the following three sections:
■ The Statement Summary Report
■ The Action Execution Report
■ The Action Summary Report

The Statement Summary Report

When you submit batch environment definition actions, Endevor

validates the SCL syntax and assigns a statement number to each SCL
statement. The Statement Summary Report lists your SCL statements
and error messages. If no errors are detected, processing continues
and the Action Execution Report and the Action Summary Report are
produced. If any errors do exist, processing terminates. Refer to the
Error Codes and Messagesan explanation of any messages.

6-6 SCL Reference Guide

 6.2 Batch Environment Administration Facility Execution

Below is an example of the Syntax Summary report.

COPYRIGHT (C) Computer Associates, INC., 22 6APR 7:25:14 PAGE 1

Batch Environment Administration Facility Control Statement Summary Report RELEASE X.XX
7:25:18 ENBE9I Control statement parsing is beginning SERIAL XXXXXX
7:25:18 ENBE2I Statement 1
DEFINE SYSTEM 'MJFSYSB1'
TO ENVIRONMENT 'BATCHENV'
DESCRIPTION 'MJFSYSB1 - TEST SYSTEM '
CCID NOT REQUIRED
COMMENT REQUIRED
ELEMENT JUMP ACKNOWLEDGEMENT REQUIRED
NEXT SYSTEM 'MJFSYSB2'
SIGNOUT IS ACTIVE
SIGNOUT DATASET VALIDATION IS ACTIVE
STAGE ONE LOAD LIBRARY 'BST.BATCHENV.S2LOAD'
STAGE ONE LIST LIBRARY 'BST.BATCHENV.S2LIST'
STAGE TWO LOAD LIBRARY 'BST.BATCHENV.S1LOAD'
STAGE TWO LIST LIBRARY 'BST.BATCHENV.S1LIST'
.
7:25:18 ENBE2I Statement 2
BUILD SCL FOR SYSTEM MJFSYSB1
FROM ENV BATCHENV
TO DSNAME 'DA1MF45.BUILD.SCL' MEMBER 'DEFTP16A' REPLACE
.
7:25:18 ENBE2I Statement 3
DEFINE TYPE MJFTYPB1
TO ENV BATCHENV
SYS MJFSYSB1
STAGE NUMBER 1
DESCRIPTION 'MJF TEST TYPE'
BASE LIBRARY IS 'BST.DEV361S1.SRCLIB'
DELTA LIBRARY IS 'BST.DEV.DELTA'
SOURCE ELEMENT LENGTH 8
COMPARE COLUMN 1 TO 72
LANGUAGE 'ASM'
PANVALET LANGUAGE 'BAL'
ELEMENT DELTA FORMAT IS FORWARD
COMPRESS BASE
CONSOLIDATE ELEMENT LEVELS
NUMBER OF ELEMENT LEVELS TO CONSOLIDATE 4
CONSOLIDATE ELEMENT AT LEVEL 55
CONSOLIDATE COMPONENT LEVELS
NUMBER OF COMPONENT LEVELS TO CONSOLIDATE 4
CONSOLIDATE COMPONENT AT LEVEL 55
.
7:25:18 ENBE2I Statement 4
BUILD SCL FOR TYPE MJFTYPB1
FROM ENV BATCHENV
SYS MJFSYSB1
STAGE NUMBER 1
TO DSNAME 'DA1MF45.BUILD.SCL' MEMBER 'DEFTP16B' REPLACE
.
7:25:18 ENBE91I Control statement parsing has completed with no errors

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-7

6.2 Batch Environment Administration Facility Execution

The Action Execution Report

This section of the execution report,the Action Execution Report,

contains the messages generated by each action during its processing.

Below is an example of the Action Execution Report.

Batch Environment Administration Facility Action Execution Report RELEASE X.XX SERIAL XXXXXX
7:25:22 ENBE1I Statement 1 Object 1
DEFINE SYSTEM 'MJFSYSB1'
TO ENVIRONMENT 'BATCHENV'
DESCRIPTION 'MJFSYSB1 - TEST SYSTEM '
NEXT SYSTEM 'MJFSYSB2'
COMMENTS REQUIRED
CCID NOT REQUIRED
ELEMENT JUMP ACKNOWLEDGEMENT REQUIRED
SIGNOUT IS ACTIVE
SIGNOUT DATASET VALIDATION IS ACTIVE
STAGE ONE LOAD LIBRARY IS
'BST.BATCHENV.S2LOAD'
STAGE ONE LIST LIBRARY
'BST.BATCHENV.S2LIST'
STAGE TWO LOAD LIBRARY IS
'BST.BATCHENV.S1LOAD'
STAGE TWO LIST LIBRARY IS
'BST.BATCHENV.S1LIST'
.
7:25:23 ENBE111I System MJFSYSB1 in Environment BATCHENV created
7:25:23 ENBE11I The DEFINE SYSTEM action has completed. Return Code is 
7:25:24 ENBE1I Statement 2 Object 1
BUILD SCL FOR SYSTEM 'MJFSYSB1'
FROM ENVIRONMENT 'BATCHENV'
TO DSNAME 'DA1MF45.BUILD.SCL' MEMBER 'DEFTP16A' REPLACE
.
7:25:25 ENBE115I DEFINE SCL created for System MJFSYSB1 in Environment BATCHENV
7:25:25 ENBE11I The BUILD SYSTEM action has completed. Return Code is 
7:25:26 ENBE1I Statement 3 Object 1
DEFINE TYPE 'MJFTYPB1'
TO ENVIRONMENT 'BATCHENV'
SYSTEM 'MJFSYSB1'
STAGE NUMBER 1
DESCRIPTION 'MJF TEST TYPE'
BASE LIBRARY IS
'BST.DEV361S1.SRCLIB'
DELTA LIBRARY IS
'BST.DEV.DELTA'
ELEMENT DELTA FORMAT IS FORWARD
COMPRESS BASE
SOURCE ELEMENT LENGTH IS 8
COMPARE FROM COLUMN 1 TO 72
CONSOLIDATE ELEMENT LEVELS
CONSOLIDATE ELEMENT AT LEVEL 55
NUMBER OF ELEMENT LEVELS TO CONSOLIDATE 4
LANGUAGE IS 'ASM'
PANVALET LANGUAGE IS 'BAL'
CONSOLIDATE COMPONENT LEVELS
CONSOLIDATE COMPONENT AT LEVEL 55
NUMBER OF COMPONENT LEVELS TO CONSOLIDATE 4
.
7:25:27 ENBE113I Type MJFTYPB1 in Environment BATCHENV, System MJFSYSB1, Stage 1 created
7:25:27 ENBE11I The DEFINE TYPE action has completed. Return Code is 

6-8 SCL Reference Guide

 6.2 Batch Environment Administration Facility Execution

The Action Summary Report

The Action Summary report summarizes the actions performed by the

Batch Environment Administration Facility. The report contains one
line for each environment object processed by each action. The report
line identifies the action, the environment object, and the action return
code. The Stmt Number refers to the number this statement is
assigned in the Action Summary Report. The Action Number refers to
the action number assigned to this request in the Execution Report.

An example of the Action Summary report is shown below.

Batch Environment Administration Facility Action Summary Report RELEASE X.XX SERIAL XXXXXX
Stmt Action
Number Number Action Object RC Location
------ ------ ------------------- ------------- -- ------------------------------------
1 1 DEFINE SYSTEM MJFSYSB1  To Env BATCHENV
2 1 BUILD SYSTEM MJFSYSB1  From Env BATCHENV
3 1 DEFINE TYPE MJFTYPB1  To Env BATCHENV Sys MJFSYSB1 Stage 1
4 1 BUILD TYPE MJFTYPB1  From Env BATCHENV Sys MJFSYSB1 Stage 1

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-9

6.2 Batch Environment Administration Facility Execution

6.3 Edit Commands

6.3.1 Overview
The Batch Environment Administration Facility provides commands,
implemented as ISPF/PDF edit macros, that assist you in creating SCL
by providing model SCL statements. The edit macros are written in
REXX. Therefore, they are only available on TSO/E Version 2 or
higher and ISPF/PDF Version 2.3 or higher.

6.3.2 Invoking Edit Commands

You invoke the edit commands while in an ISPF/PDF edit session.
The syntax for invoking the edit commands is:

──COMMAND NAME──object_type──┬─────────────┬──.─────────────────────
└─object_name─┘

Command Name

The command name identifies the SCL action you are creating and
places model SCL statements at the current cursor location of the data
set you are editing. The following list identifies the command names
and the functions that each perform.

Command Name Function

ENDEFINE Generates model SCL statements for the DEFINE action.
ENDELETE Generates model SCL statements for the DELETE action.
ENBUILD Generates model SCL statements for the BUILD action.

6-10 SCL Reference Guide

 6.3 Edit Commands

Object Type

The object_type parameter specifies the kind of environment definition

that you are creating. The following table provides a list of
object_types, valid abbreviations, and the corresponding environment
definition created.

Object_types Object_type Environment Definition Created

Abbreviations
System Sys System
Subsystem Sub Subsystem
Type Typ Element Type
Approver App Approver Group
Relation Rel Approver Group Relation
Group Gro Processor Group
Symbol Sym Processor Symbol
Destination Des Package Shipment Destination

Object Name

The object_name is optional and refers to the name of the environment

definition for which you are creating SCL. If you provide the
object_name, the macro substitutes the object_name into the SCL
generated.

6.3.3 Edit Command Rules

The following general rules apply to the SCL created by the edit
commands:
■ The ENDEFINE command assumes you are creating an
environment definition.
■ The ENDEFINE command generates the TO STAGE NUMBER
clause.
■ SCL actions that contain optional clauses with default values are
generated using the default value. For example, the DEFINE
SYSTEM action includes the optional clause COMMENTS NOT
REQUIRED.
■ SCL actions that contain required clauses are generated with a
place holder in which you can enter the appropriate information.
The place holder is a string of question marks ('?'). For example,
the ENBUILD command generates the following TO DSNAME
clause: TO DSNAME ????????? .

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-11

6.3 Edit Commands

■ There is one SCL clause on each data record. If necessary, an SCL

clause can span multiple lines.

6-12 SCL Reference Guide

 6.4 The Build Statements

6.4 The Build Statements

6.4.1 Overview
Use BUILD statements to create DEFINE SCL statements from an
existing environment definition or structure. You can create DEFINE
SCL statements for a single environment definition (for example
system, subsystem, or type) or for an entire environment structure (for
example the Production environment). The SCL statements are written
to either a sequential data set or a partitioned data set member. You
can modify the data set that the BUILD action creates or transmit it to
a remote Endevor location for execution.

The following general conventions apply to all BUILD statements:

■ The environment names you specify in the BUILD clause can have
a maximum of 8 characters with the exception of SHIPMENT
DESTINATION, which can be no longer than 7 characters, and
APPROVER GROUP, which can be no longer than 16 characters.
■ The environment names you specify in the BUILD clause cannot
include imbedded spaces, non-alphabetical, non-numeric, or
non-national characters.
■ If you specify an environment name that contains only numeric
characters then you must enclose it in single or double quotation
marks.
■ You can use partially or fully wildcarded names in the BUILD
clause.
■ You can use wildcards for non-environment inventory locations.
■ Environment names you specify in the FROM clause must all be
fully specified.
■ If the data set name you specify in the TO DSNAME clause
contains imbedded periods you must enclose it in quotation marks.

6.4.2 Build SCL for Approver Group

Use the BUILD SCL FOR APPROVER GROUP action to build DEFINE
SCL statements for approver group definitions.

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-13

6.4 The Build Statements

6.4.3 Syntax
──BUIld SCL──┬─────┬──APProver GROup──group-name─────────────────────
└─FOR─┘
──FROm──ENVironment──environment-name─────────────────────────────────
──TO──┬─DDName──ddname───────────────────────────────────────┬──.────
└─DSName──dsname──┬──────────────────────────────────┬─┘
└─MEMber──member-name──┬─────────┬─┘
└─REPlace─┘

6.4.3.1 Syntax Rules

BUILD SCL FOR APPROVER GROUP group-name

The BUILD SCL FOR APPROVER GROUP clause identifies the 1- to

8-character name of the approver group from which you are building
the DEFINE statement. You can specify a partially or fully wildcarded
approver group name.

FROM ENVIRONMENT environment-name

The FROM ENVIRONMENT clause identifies the environment location

of the approver group. You must use a fully specified,
non-wildcarded environment name.
TO DDNAME ddname
DSNAME dsname
MEMBER member-name
REPLACE

The TO clause indicates where you wish to have the BUILD SCL
written. Enter either a DDname or a data set name, not both. The
data set you specify in the TO DDNAME/DSNAME clause must be
allocated with either fixed or variable length records. If fixed, the
record length must be 80. If variable, the record length must be at
least 84.

6-14 SCL Reference Guide

 6.4 The Build Statements

The TO DDNAME clause identifies the name of an allocated DD

statement. The DD statement you specify must be a sequential data
set or a partitioned data set with an explicit member.

The TO DSNAME clause identifies the name of an existing catalogued

data set. If the data set name contains imbedded periods, enclose it in
quotation marks. If the data set is a partitioned data set, you can use
the member clause to define a member name to be created. If the data
set is a partitioned data set and you do not specify the MEMBER
clause, the member name created is TEMPNAME. The REPLACE
clause replaces an existing like-named member. You can only use the
REPLACE clause if you specify the MEMBER clause.

Example of Build SCL for Approver Group SCL

The following is an example of BUILD SCL FOR APPROVER GROUP

SCL. The example builds DEFINE SCL using the approver group
called ACCTPAY1. The SCL is written to the data set named
ENDEVOR.SCLOUT. The member ACCTSPAY replaces any existing
like-named member.
BUILD SCL FOR APPROVER GROUP "ACCTPAY1"
FROM ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
TO DSNAME "ENDEVOR.SCLOUT"
MEMBER "ACCTSPAY"
REPLACE .

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-15

6.4 The Build Statements

6.4.4 Build SCL for Approver Relation

Use the BUILD SCL FOR APPROVER RELATION action to build
DEFINE SCL to relate a approver group to a particular inventory area.

6.4.5 Syntax
──BUIld SCL──┬─────┬──APProver RELation──────────────────────────────
└─FOR─┘
──FROm──ENVironment──environment-name──APProver GROup──group-name─────
──TO──┬─DDName──ddname───────────────────────────────────────┬──.────
└─DSName──dsname──┬──────────────────────────────────┬─┘
└─MEMber──member-name──┬─────────┬─┘
└─REPlace─┘

6.4.5.1 Syntax Rules

BUILD SCL FOR APPROVER RELATION

The BUILD SCL FOR APPROVER RELATION clause indicates that

you are building DEFINE SCL to relate a approver group to a
particular inventory area. You must specify this clause.

FROM ENVIRONMENT environment-name APPROVER GROUP

group-name

The FROM ENVIRONMENT clause identifies the environment location

of the approver group from which you are building DEFINE SCL.
You must use a fully specified, non-wildcarded environment name.

The APPROVER GROUP clause identifies the approver group

associated with the environment.
TO DDNAME ddname
DSNAME dsname
MEMBER member-name
REPLACE

The TO clause indicates where you wish to have the BUILD SCL
written. Enter either a DDname or a data set name, not both. The
data set you specify in the TO DDNAME/DSNAME clause must be
allocated with either fixed or variable length records. If fixed, the
record length must be 80. If variable, the record length must be at
least 84.

The TO DDNAME clause identifies the name of an allocated DD

statement. The DD statement you specify must be a sequential data
set or a partitioned data set with an explicit member.

6-16 SCL Reference Guide

 6.4 The Build Statements

The TO DSNAME clause identifies the name of an existing catalogued

data set. If the data set name contains imbedded periods, enclose it in
quotation marks. If the data set is a partitioned data set, you can use
the member clause to define a member name to be created. If the data
set is a partitioned data set and you do not specify the MEMBER
clause, the member name created is TEMPNAME. The REPLACE
clause replaces an existing like-named member. You can only use the
REPLACE clause if you specify the MEMBER clause.

Example of Build SCL for Approver Relation SCL

The following is an example of the BUILD SCL FOR APPROVER

RELATION SCL. The example builds DEFINE SCL that relates the
ACCTPAY1 approver group to environment DEVEL. The SCL is
written to DD statement SCLOUT.
BUILD SCL FOR APPROVER RELATION
FROM ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
APPROVER GROUP "ACCTPAY1"
TO DDNAME "SCLOUT" .

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-17

6.4 The Build Statements

6.4.6 Build SCL for Environment

Use the BUILD SCL FOR ENVIRONMENT action to build DEFINE
SCL statements for environment definitions. The BUILD SCL FOR
ENVIRONMENT action builds DEFINE SCL statements for all
inventory definitions (system, subsystem, type, and so on) associated
with the environment you specify. However, if the Global Type
Sequencing option is enabled at your site, type sequence statements
will not be built.

6.4.7 Syntax
──BUIld SCL──┬─────┬──ENVironment──environment-name──────────────────
└─FOR─┘
──TO──┬─DDName──ddname───────────────────────────────────────┬──.────
└─DSName──dsname──┬──────────────────────────────────┬─┘
└─MEMber──member-name──┬─────────┬─┘
└─REPlace─┘

6.4.7.1 Syntax Rules

BUILD SCL FOR ENVIRONMENT environment-name

The BUILD SCL FOR ENVIRONMENT clause identifies the

environment from which you are building DEFINE SCL. You must
specify a fully qualified environment name.
TO DDNAME ddname
DSNAME dsname
MEMBER member-name
REPLACE

The TO clause indicates where you wish to have the BUILD SCL
written. Enter either a DDname or a data set name, not both. The
data set you specify in the TO DDNAME/DSNAME clause must be
allocated with either fixed or variable length records. If fixed, the
record length must be 80. If variable, the record length must be at
least 84.

The TO DDNAME clause identifies the name of an allocated DD

statement. The DD statement you specify must be a sequential data
set or a partitioned data set with an explicit member.

6-18 SCL Reference Guide

 6.4 The Build Statements

The TO DSNAME clause identifies the name of an existing catalogued

data set. If the data set name contains imbedded periods, enclose it in
quotation marks. If the data set is a partitioned data set, you can use
the member clause to define a member name to be created. If the data
set is partitioned data set and you do not specify the MEMBER clause,
the member name created is TEMPNAME. The REPLACE clause
replaces an existing like-named member. You can only use the
REPLACE clause if you specify the MEMBER clause.

Example of Build SCL for Environment SCL

The following is an example of the BUILD SCL FOR ENVIRONMENT

SCL. The example builds DEFINE SCL for an environment called
DEVEL. The SCL is written to the data set named
ENDEVOR.SCLOUT. The member DEVEL replaces any existing
like-named member.
BUILD SCL FOR ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
TO DSNAME "ENDEVOR.SCLOUT"
MEMBER "DEVEL"
REPLACE .

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-19

6.4 The Build Statements

6.4.8 Build SCL for Processor Group

Use the BUILD SCL FOR PROCESSOR GROUP action to build
DEFINE SCL to set up processor groups.

6.4.9 Syntax
──BUIld SCL──┬─────┬──PROcessor GROup──group-name────────────────────
└─FOR─┘
──FROm──ENVironment──environment-name──SYStem──system-name────────────
──TYPe──type-name──┬─STAge ID──stage-id─────┬─────────────────────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘
──┬─────────────────────┬─────────────────────────────────────────────
└─INCLUDE SUBOrdinate─┘
──TO──┬─DDName──ddname───────────────────────────────────────┬──.────
└─DSName──dsname──┬──────────────────────────────────┬─┘
└─MEMber──member-name──┬─────────┬─┘
└─REPlace─┘

6.4.9.1 Syntax Rules

BUILD SCL FOR PROCESSOR GROUP group-name

The BUILD SCL FOR PROCESSOR GROUP clause identifies the 1- to

8-character name of the processor group from which are building
DEFINE SCL. You can specify a partially or fully wildcarded name.
FROM ENVIRONMENT environment-name
SYSTEM system-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE ID stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no
INCLUDE SUBORDINATES

The FROM clause identifies the inventory location of the processor

group from which you are building DEFINE SCL. You must specify a
fully qualified environment name. The system, and type names can
be partially or fully wildcarded. Enter either the stage ID or stage
number associated with the processor group.

6-20 SCL Reference Guide

 6.4 The Build Statements

Specify the INCLUDE SUBORDINATES clause if you wish to create

DEFINE SCL for the processor symbols associated with the processor
group.
TO DDNAME ddname
DSNAME dsname
MEMBER member-name
REPLACE

The TO clause indicates where you wish to have the BUILD SCL
written. Enter either a DDname or a data set name, not both. The
data set you specify in the TO DDNAME/DSNAME clause must be
allocated with either fixed or variable length records. If fixed, the
record length must be 80. If variable, the record length must be at
least 84.

The TO DDNAME clause identifies the name of an allocated DD

statement. The DD statement you specify must be a sequential data
set or a partitioned data set with an explicit member.

The TO DSNAME clause identifies the name of an existing catalogued

data set. If the data set name contains imbedded periods, enclose it in
quotation marks. If the data set is a partitioned data set, you can use
the member clause to define a member name to be created. If the data
set is partitioned data set and you do not specify the MEMBER clause,
the member name created is TEMPNAME. The REPLACE clause
replaces an existing like-named member. You can only use the
REPLACE clause if you specify the MEMBER clause.

Example of Build SCL for Processor Group SCL

The following is an example of the BUILD SCL FOR PROCESSOR

GROUP SCL. The example builds DEFINE SCL for the processor
group called COBNBL1. The optional clause INCLUDE
SUBORDINATES is specified, therefore, DEFINE SCL is built for all
the processor symbols associated with the processor group. The SCL is
written to the data set named ENDEVOR.SCLOUT. The member
PROCGR1 replaces any existing like-named member.
BUILD SCL FOR PROCESSOR GROUP "COBNBL1"
FROM ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
SYSTEM "ACCT"
TYPE "COBOL"
STAGE ID "U"
INCLUDE SUBORDINATES
TO DSNAME "ENDEVOR.SCLOUT"
MEMBER "PROCGR1"
REPLACE .

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-21

6.4 The Build Statements

6.4.10 Build SCL for Processor Symbol

Use the BUILD SCL FOR PROCESSOR SYMBOL action to build
DEFINE SCL to define the processor symbol overrides associated with
a processor group.

6.4.11 Syntax

──BUIld SCL──┬─────┬──PROcessor SYMbol───────────────────────────────

└─FOR─┘
──FROm──ENVironment──environment-name──SYStem──system-name────────────
──TYPe──type-name──┬─STAge ID──stage-id─────┬─────────────────────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘
──PROcessor GROup──group-name─────────────────────────────────────────
──TO──┬─DDName──ddname───────────────────────────────────────┬──.────
└─DSName──dsname──┬──────────────────────────────────┬─┘
└─MEMber──member-name──┬─────────┬─┘
└─REPlace─┘

6.4.11.1 Syntax Rules

BUILD SCL FOR PROCESSOR SYMBOL

The BUILD SCL FOR PROCESSOR SYMBOL clause indicates that you
are to build DEFINE SCL for processor symbols. You must specify
this clause.
FROM ENVIRONMENT environment-name
SYSTEM system-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE ID stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no
PROCESSOR GROUP group-name

The FROM clause identifies inventory location of the processor

symbols from which you are building DEFINE SCL. You must specify
a fully qualified environment name The system, type, and processor
group names can be partially or fully wildcarded. Enter either the
stage ID or stage number associated with the processor symbols.
TO DDNAME ddname
DSNAME dsname
MEMBER member-name
REPLACE

6-22 SCL Reference Guide

 6.4 The Build Statements

The TO clause indicates where you wish to have the BUILD SCL
written. Enter either a DDname or a data set name, not both. The
data set defined by the TO DDNAME/DSNAME clause must be
allocated with either fixed or variable length records. If fixed, the
record length must be 80. If variable, the record length must be at
least 84.

The TO DDNAME clause identifies the name of an allocated DD

statement. The DD statement you specify must be a sequential data
set or a partitioned data set with an explicit member.

The TO DSNAME clause identifies the name of an existing catalogued

data set. If the data set name contains imbedded periods, enclose it in
quotation marks. If the data set is a partitioned data set, you can use
the member clause to define a member name to be created. If the data
set is partitioned data set and you do not specify the MEMBER clause,
the member name created is TEMPNAME. The REPLACE clause
replaces an existing like-named member. You can only use the
REPLACE clause if you specify the MEMBER clause.

Example of Build SCL for Processor Symbol SCL

The following is an example of the BUILD SCL FOR PROCESSOR

SYMBOL SCL. The example builds DEFINE SCL for processor
symbols using the processor group COBNBL1. DEFINE SCL for all
symbols associated with the processors in processor group COBNBL1
is built. The SCL is written to the data set named
ENDEVOR.SCLOUT. The member PROCSYM1 replaces any existing
like-named member.
BUILD SCL FOR PROCESSOR SYMBOL
FROM ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
SYSTEM "ACCT"
TYPE "COBOL"
STAGE ID "U"
PROCESSOR GROUP "COBNBL1"
TO DSNAME "ENDEVOR.SCLOUT"
MEMBER "PROCSYM1"
REPLACE .

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-23

6.4 The Build Statements

6.4.12 Build SCL for Shipment Destination

Use the BUILD SCL FOR SHIPMENT DESTINATION action to build
SCL to define a package shipment destination and to define all data
set mapping rules associated with a package shipment destination. It
is not possible to build SCL to define an individual data set mapping
rule.

6.4.13 Syntax

──BUIld SCL──┬─────┬──SHIPMent──DESTination──destination-name────────
└─FOR─┘
──TO──┬─DDName──ddname───────────────────────────────────────┬──.────
└─DSName──dsname──┬──────────────────────────────────┬─┘
└─MEMber──member-name──┬─────────┬─┘
└─REPlace─┘

6.4.13.1 Syntax Rules

BUILD SCL FOR SHIPMENT DESTINATION destination-name

The BUILD SCL FOR SHIPMENT DESTINATION clause identifies the

1- to 7-character name of the shipment destination from which you are
building DEFINE SCL. You can specify a partially or fully wildcarded
destination name.
TO DDNAME ddname
DSNAME dsname
MEMBER member-name
REPLACE

The TO clause indicates where you wish to have the BUILD SCL
written. Enter either a DDname or a data set name, not both. The
data set defined by the TO DDNAME/DSNAME clause must be
allocated with either fixed or variable length records. If fixed, the
record length must be 80. If variable, the record length must be at
least 84.

The TO DDNAME clause identifies the name of an allocated DD

statement. The DD statement must define a sequential data set or a
partitioned data set with an explicit member.

6-24 SCL Reference Guide

 6.4 The Build Statements

The TO DSNAME clause identifies the name of an existing catalogued

data set. If the data set name contains imbedded periods, enclose it in
quotation marks. If the data set is a partitioned data set, you can use
the member clause to define a member name to be created. If the data
set is partitioned data set and you do not specify the MEMBER clause,
the member name created is TEMPNAME. The REPLACE clause
replaces an existing like-named member. You can only use the
REPLACE clause if you specify the MEMBER clause.

Example of Build SCL for Shipment Destination SCL

The following is an example of the BUILD SCL FOR SHIPMENT

DESTINATION SCL. The example builds DEFINE SCL for a shipment
destination called DEST001. The SCL is written to the DD statement
SCLOUT.
BUILD SCL FOR SHIPMENT DESTINATION "DEST1"
TO DDNAME "SCLOUT" .

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-25

6.4 The Build Statements

6.4.14 Build SCL for Subsystem

Use the BUILD SCL FOR SUBSYSTEM action to build DEFINE SCL
statements for subsystem definitions.

6.4.15 Syntax

──BUIld SCL──┬─────┬──SUBSystem──subsystem-name──────────────────────
└─FOR─┘
──FROm──ENVironment──environment-name──SYStem──system-name────────────
──TO──┬─DDName──ddname───────────────────────────────────────┬──.────
└─DSName──dsname──┬──────────────────────────────────┬─┘
└─MEMber──member-name──┬─────────┬─┘
└─REPlace─┘

6.4.15.1 Syntax Rules

BUILD SCL FOR SUBSYSTEM subsystem-name

The BUILD SCL FOR SUBSYSTEM identifies the 1- to 8-character name

of the subsystem from which you are building DEFINE SCL. You can
specify a partially or fully wildcarded subsystem name.
FROM ENVIRONMENT environment-name
SYSTEM system-name

The FROM clause identifies the inventory location of the subsystem

from which you are building DEFINE SCL. You must specify a fully
qualified, non-wild carded environment name. You must also enter
the name of the system to which the subsystem is defined. You can
use a partially or fully wildcarded system name.
TO DDNAME ddname
DSNAME dsname
MEMBER member-name
REPLACE

The TO clause indicates where you wish to have the BUILD SCL
written. Enter either a DDname or a data set name, not both. The
data set defined by the TO DDNAME/DSNAME clause must be
allocated with either fixed or variable length records. If fixed, the
record length must be 80. If variable, the record length must be at
least 84.

The TO DDNAME clause identifies the name of an allocated DD

statement to which the SCL is written. The DD statement must define
a sequential data set or a partitioned data set with an explicit member.

6-26 SCL Reference Guide

 6.4 The Build Statements

The TO DSNAME clause identifies the name of an existing catalogued

data set to which the SCL is written. If the data set name contains
imbedded periods, enclose it in quotation marks. If the data set is a
partitioned data set, you can use the MEMBER clause to define a
member name to be created. If the data set is partitioned data set and
you do not specify the MEMBER clause, the member name created is
TEMPNAME. The REPLACE clause replaces an existing like-named
member. You can only use the REPLACE clause if you specify the
MEMBER clause.

Example of Build SCL for Subsystem SCL

The following is an example of the BUILD SCL FOR SUBSYSTEM SCL.

The example builds DEFINE SCL for all subsystems using environment
DEVEL and system ACCT. The SCL is written to the DD statement
SCLOUT.
BUILD SCL FOR SUBSYSTEM ""
FROM ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
SYSTEM "ACCT"
TO DDNAME "SCLOUT" .

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-27

6.4 The Build Statements

6.4.16 Build SCL for System

Use the BUILD SCL FOR SYSTEM action to build DEFINE SCL
statements for system definitions. However, if the Global Type
Sequencing option is enabled at your site, type sequence statements
will not be built.

6.4.17 Syntax
──BUIld SCL──┬─────┬──SYStem──system-name────────────────────────────
└─FOR─┘
──FROm──ENVironment──environment-name──┬─────────────────────┬────────
└─INCLUDE SUBOrdinate─┘
──TO──┬─DDName──ddname───────────────────────────────────────┬──.────
└─DSName──dsname──┬──────────────────────────────────┬─┘
└─MEMber──member-name──┬─────────┬─┘
└─REPlace─┘

6.4.17.1 Syntax Rules

BUILD SCL FOR SYSTEM system-name

The BUILD SCL FOR SYSTEM clause identifies the 1- to 8-character

name of the system from which you wish to build DEFINE SCL. You
can specify a partially or fully wildcarded system name.
FROM ENVIRONMENT environment-name
INCLUDE SUBORDINATES

The FROM clause identifies environment location of the system from

which you are building DEFINE SCL. You must use a fully specified
and non-wildcarded environment name.

Specify the INCLUDE SUBORDINATES clause if you wish to create

DEFINE SCL for the subsystem, type, type sequence, processor group,
and processor group symbolic definitions associated with this system.
TO DDNAME ddname
DSNAME dsname
MEMBER member-name
REPLACE

The TO clause indicates where you wish to have the BUILD SCL
written. Enter either a DDname or a data set name, not both. The
data set defined by the TO DDNAME/DSNAME clause must be
allocated with either fixed or variable length records. If fixed, the
record length must be 80. If variable, the record length must be at
least 84.

6-28 SCL Reference Guide

 6.4 The Build Statements

The TO DDNAME clause identifies the name of an allocated DD

statement. The DD statement must define a sequential data set or a
partitioned data set with an explicit member.

The TO DSNAME clause identifies the name of an existing catalogued

data set. If the data set name contains imbedded periods, enclose it in
quotation marks. If the data set is a partitioned data set, you can use
the member clause to define a member name to be created. If the data
set is partitioned data set and you do not specify the MEMBER clause,
the member name created is TEMPNAME. The REPLACE clause
replaces an existing like-named member. You can only use the
REPLACE clause if you specify the MEMBER clause.

Example of Build SCL for System SCL

The following is an example of the BUILD SCL FOR SYSTEM SCL.

The example builds DEFINE SCL for the system ACCT using
environment DEVEL. The optional clause INCLUDE SUBORDINATES
is specified, therefore, DEFINE SCL is built for all inventory definitions
associated with system ACCT. The SCL is written to the data set
named ENDEVOR.SCLOUT. The member SYSACCT replaces any
existing like-named member.
BUILD SCL FOR SYSTEM "ACCT"
FROM ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
INCLUDE SUBORDINATES
TO DSNAME "ENDEVOR.SCLOUT"
MEMBER "SYSACCT"
REPLACE .

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-29

6.4 The Build Statements

6.4.18 Build SCL for Type

Use the BUILD SCL FOR TYPE action to build DEFINE SCL
statements for type definitions.

6.4.19 Syntax

──BUIld SCL──┬─────┬──TYPe──type-name────────────────────────────────
└─FOR─┘
──FROm──ENVironment──environment-name──SYStem──system-name────────────
──┬─STAge ID──stage-id─────┬──┬─────────────────────┬─────────────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘ └─INCLUDE SUBOrdinate─┘
──TO──┬─DDName──ddname───────────────────────────────────────┬──.────
└─DSName──dsname──┬──────────────────────────────────┬─┘
└─MEMber──member-name──┬─────────┬─┘
└─REPlace─┘

6.4.19.1 Syntax Rules

BUILD SCL FOR TYPE type-name

The BUILD SCL FOR TYPE clause identifies the 1- to 8-character name
of the type from which you are building DEFINE SCL. You can
specify a partially or fully wildcarded type name.
FROM ENVIRONMENT environment-name
SYSTEM system-name
STAGE ID stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no
INCLUDE SUBORDINATES

The FROM clause identifies inventory location of the type from which
you wish to build DEFINE SCL. You must use a fully specified and
non-wildcarded environment name. The system name can be partially
or fully wildcarded. Specify either the stage ID or stage number to
which the type is defined.

6-30 SCL Reference Guide

 6.4 The Build Statements

Specify the INCLUDE SUBORDINATES clause if you wish to create

DEFINE SCL for the processor group and processor group symbol
definitions associated with the type.
TO DDNAME ddname
DSNAME dsname
MEMBER member-name
REPLACE

The TO clause indicates where you wish to have the BUILD SCL
written. Enter either a DDname or a data set name, not both. The
data set defined by the TO DDNAME/DSNAME clause must be
allocated with either fixed or variable length records. If fixed, the
record length must be 80. If variable, the record length must be at
least 84.

The TO DDNAME clause identifies the name of an allocated DD

statement. The DD statement must define a sequential data set or a
partitioned data set with an explicit member.

The TO DSNAME clause identifies the name of an existing catalogued

data set to which the SCL is written. If the data set name contains
imbedded periods, enclose it in quotation marks. If the data set is a
partitioned data set, you can use the member clause to define a
member name to be created. If the data set is partitioned data set and
you do not specify the MEMBER clause, the member name created is
TEMPNAME. The REPLACE clause replaces an existing like-named
member. You can only use the REPLACE clause if you specify the
MEMBER clause.

Example of Build SCL for Type SCL

The following is an example of the BUILD SCL FOR TYPE SCL. The
example builds DEFINE SCL for all types using environment DEVEL,
system ACCT, and stage number 1. The SCL is written to the DD
statement SCLOUT.
BUILD SCL FOR TYPE ""
FROM ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
SYSTEM "ACCT"
STAGE NUMBER 1
TO DDNAME "SCLOUT" .

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-31

6.4 The Build Statements

6.4.20 Build SCL for Type Sequence

Use the BUILD SCL FOR TYPE SEQUENCE action to build DEFINE
SCL for type sequence definitions. The BUILD SCL FOR TYPE
SEQUENCE action assigns sequence numbers beginning with 5 and
incremented by 10 for each type. If the Global Type Sequencing option
is enabled at your site, the statement will be rejected as an error.

6.4.21 Syntax
──BUIld SCL──┬─────┬──TYPe SEQuence──────────────────────────────────
└─FOR─┘
──FROm──ENVironment──environment-name──SYStem──system-name────────────
──┬─STAge ID──stage-id─────┬──────────────────────────────────────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘
──TO──┬─DDName──ddname───────────────────────────────────────┬──.────
└─DSName──dsname──┬──────────────────────────────────┬─┘
└─MEMber──member-name──┬─────────┬─┘
└─REPlace─┘

6.4.21.1 Syntax Rules

BUILD SCL FOR TYPE SEQUENCE

The BUILD SCL FOR TYPE SEQUENCE indicates that you are to
create DEFINE SCL from an existing type sequence definition. You
must specify this clause.
FROM ENVIRONMENT environment-name
SYSTEM system-name
STAGE ID stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

The FROM clause identifies the inventory location of the type sequence
from which you are building DEFINE SCL. The environment name
you specify in the FROM clause must be fully specified and
non-wildcarded. The system name can be partially or fully wild
carded. Specify either the stage ID for stage number to which the type
sequence is defined.
TO DDNAME ddname
DSNAME dsname
MEMBER member-name
REPLACE

The TO clause indicates where you wish to have the BUILD SCL
written. Enter either a DDname or a data set name, not both. The
data set defined by the TO DDNAME/DSNAME clause must be
allocated with either fixed or variable length records. If fixed, the
record length must be 80. If variable, the record length must be at
least 84.

6-32 SCL Reference Guide

 6.4 The Build Statements

The TO DDNAME clause identifies the name of an allocated DD

statement. The DD statement must define a sequential data set or a
partitioned data set with an explicit member.

The TO DSNAME clause identifies the name of an existing catalogued

data set. If the data set name contains imbedded periods, enclose it in
quotation marks. If the data set is a partitioned data set, you can use
the member clause to define a member name to be created. If the data
set is partitioned data set and you do not specify the MEMBER clause,
the member name created is TEMPNAME. The REPLACE clause
replaces an existing like-named member. You can only use the
REPLACE clause if you specify the MEMBER clause.

Example of Build SCL for Type Sequence SCL

The following is an example of the BUILD SCL FOR TYPE SEQUENCE

SCL. The example builds DEFINE SCL for a type sequence using
environment DEVEL, system ACCT, and stage ID U. The SCL is
written to the data set named ENDEVOR.SCLOUT. The member
ACCTSEQ1 replaces any existing like-named member.
BUILD SCL FOR TYPE SEQUENCE
FROM ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
SYSTEM "ACCT"
STAGE ID "U"
TO DSNAME "ENDEVOR.SCLOUT"
MEMBER "ACCTSEQ1"
REPLACE .

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-33

6.4 The Build Statements

6.5 The Define Statements

6.5.1 Overview
Use DEFINE statements to create or update environment definitions.
An environment definition is created if it does not exist. An update
occurs if the environment definition exists.

The following general conventions apply to all DEFINE statements:

■ Names you specify in the DEFINE clause can have a maximum of
8 characters with the exception of SHIPMENT DESTINATION,
which can be no longer than 7 characters, and APPROVER
GROUP, which can be no longer than 16 characters.
■ You can use partially or fully wildcarded names in DEFINE
clauses. Wildcarded names indicate that an update is to be
performed on existing environment definitions that match the
name you specify.
■ If you specify a name that contains only numeric characters you
must enclose it in single or double quotation marks.
■ You cannot specify names that include imbedded spaces,
non-alphabetical, non-numeric, or non-national characters.

6-34 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

6.5.2 Define Approver Group

Use the DEFINE APPROVER GROUP action to create or update
approver group definitions.

6.5.3 Syntax

──DEFine APProver GROup──group-name──────────────────────────────────

──TO──ENVironment──environment-name──TITle──title-text────────────────
──┬────────────────────────────────┬──────────────────────────────────
│ ┌──────┐ │
└─QUOrum SIZe──┬────┬──┴─value─┴─┘
└─IS─┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──.───
│ ┌─,─────────────────────────────┐ │
└─APProver──┬─EQ─┬──(─── ─(──id──,──┬─REQuired─────┬──)─┴──)─┘
└─=──┘ └─NOT REQuired─┘

6.5.3.1 Syntax Rules

DEFINE APPROVER GROUP group-name

The DEFINE APPROVER GROUP clause identifies the 1- to 8-character

name of the approver group you are creating or updating. You can
specify a partially or fully wildcarded approver group name. A
wildcarded approver group name updates all matching approver
group definitions.

TO ENVIRONMENT environment-name

The TO ENVIRONMENT clause identifies the environment to which

you are defining the approver group. You must use a fully specified
and non-wildcarded environment name.

TITLE title-text

The TITLE clause identifies a 1- to 50-character description of the

approver group you are creating or updating. You must specify the
TITLE clause if are creating an approver group. The clause is optional
if you are updating an approver group. If the text contains imbedded
spaces, enclose it in single or double quotation marks.

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-35

6.5 The Define Statements

QUORUM SIZE IS value

The QUORUM SIZE CLAUSE IS clause specifies the minimum number

of approvers who must approve a package before it can be executed.
The quorum size is optional when both creating and updating an
approver group definition. If you specify this clause, the value must
between 0 and 16. If you do not specify this clause, the default is 0.

APPROVER EQ = id, REQUIRED/NOT REQUIRED

The APPROVER clause specifies whether the approver ID is required

to approve the package. The clause contains two fields, the approver
ID field and the REQUIRED or NOT REQUIRED field. If you specify
more than one approver ID, enclose the fields in parentheses and
separate by commas. For example, to define IDs USER01 and USER02
as required approvers, the APPROVER clause would be specified as:
APPROVER=((USER1,REQUIRED),(USER2,REQUIRED))

When creating or updating an Approver Group definition, the

APPROVER clause is optional. If an Approver Group has no
approvers, Endevor uses external approvers and uses the approver
group name as the external security group or profile name.

Example of Define Approver Group SCL

The following is an example of the DEFINE APPROVER GROUP SCL.

The example creates an Approver Group named ACCTPAY. This
group contains five User IDs. Two of the five User IDs are required
for approval. There is a quorum size of three which means that one of
the not required users must also approve the package.
DEFINE APPROVER GROUP "ACCTPAY1"
TO ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
TITLE "Accounts Payable Approver Group"
QUORUM SIZE IS 3
APPROVER EQ ( (USER1, REQUIRED),
(USER2, NOT REQUIRED),
(USER3, NOT REQUIRED),
(USER4, REQUIRED),
(USER5, NOT REQUIRED) ) .

6-36 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

6.5.4 Define Approver Relation

Use the DEFINE APPROVER RELATION action to create a new
approver relation definition. It is not possible to update an existing
approver relation definition.

6.5.5 Syntax

──DEFine APProver RELation──FOR──APProver GROup──group-name──────────

──TO──ENVironment──environment-name──SYStem──system-name──────────────
──SUBSystem──subsystem-name──TYPe──type-name──────────────────────────
──┬─STAge ID──stage-id─────┬──┬─────────────────────────────┬──.─────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘ │ ┌─STANdard──┐ │
└─TYPe──┬────┬──┴─EMErgency─┴─┘
└─IS─┘

6.5.5.1 Syntax Rules

DEFINE APPROVER RELATION

The DEFINE APPROVER RELATION clause indicates that you are

creating a new approver relation definition. You must specify this
clause.

FOR APPROVER GROUP group-name

The FOR APPROVER GROUP clause identifies the 1- to 16-character

name of the approver group for which an inventory relationship is
being built. You must use a fully specified and non-wildcarded
approver group name.
TO ENVIRONMENT environment-name
SYSTEM system-name
SUBSYSTEM subsystem-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE ID stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

The TO clause identifies the inventory location to which you are

defining the approver relation. You must specify a fully qualified
environment name.

The TO SYSTEM, SUBSYSTEM, TYPE, and STAGE clauses you specify

can be either fully qualified or fully wildcarded. You cannot use
partially wildcarded names.

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-37

6.5 The Define Statements

You must use the STAGE ID clause if you wild card the stage. Values
specified in a wildcarded STAGE clause are not expanded. The
approver group relationship is built with the wildcarded values.

TYPE IS STANDARD/EMERGENCY

The TYPE IS STANDARD/EMERGENCY clause specifies the approver

type for this approver group. You must specify this clause when
creating an approver group relation definition.

Example of Define Approver Relation SCL

The following is an example of the DEFINE APPROVER RELATION

SCL. The example creates an Approver Relation for Approver Group
ACCTPAY. This Approver Relation is for the environment DEVEL,
system ACCT, subsystem ACCTPAY, type COBOL, stage number 1.
DEFINE APPROVER RELATION
FOR APPROVER GROUP "ACCTPAY"
TO ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
SYSTEM "ACCT"
SUBSYSTEM "ACCTPAY1"
TYPE "COBOL"
STAGE NUMBER 1
TYPE IS STANDARD .

6-38 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

6.5.6 Define Processor Group

Use the DEFINE PROCESSOR GROUP action to create a new or
update an existing processor group definition.

6.5.7 Syntax

──DEFine PROcessor GROup──group-name─────────────────────────────────

──TO ENVironment──environment-name──SYStem──system-name───────────────
──TYPe──type-name──┬─STAge ID──stage-id─────┬─────────────────────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘
──DESCription──description────────────────────────────────────────────
──¤──┬─────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──¤──.───
├─NEXt PROcessor GROup──group-name────────────────────┤
├─PROcessor OUTput TYPe──┬──────┬──┬────┬──┤ Option ├─┤
│ └─NAMe─┘ └─IS─┘ │
├─GENerate PROcessor──┬──────┬──┬────┬──┤ Option ├────┤
│ └─NAMe─┘ └─IS─┘ │
├─DELete PROcessor──┬──────┬──┬────┬──┤ Option ├──────┤
│ └─NAMe─┘ └─IS─┘ │
├─MOVe PROcessor──┬──────┬──┬────┬──┤ Option ├────────┤
│ └─NAMe─┘ └─IS─┘ │
│ ┌─MOVe─────┐ │
├─MOVe ACTion USE──┴─GENerate─┴──┬───────────┬────────┤
│ └─PROcessor─┘ │
│ ┌─GENerate─┐ │
└─TRANSFer ACTIOn USE──┴─MOVe─────┴──┬───────────┬────┘
└─PROcessor─┘
Option:
┌─ALLow FOREground EXEcution────────┐
├──processor-name──┼───────────────────────────────────┼───────────────┤
└─DO NOT ALLow FOREground EXEcution─┘

6.5.7.1 Syntax Rules

DEFINE PROCESSOR GROUP group-name

The DEFINE PROCESSOR GROUP clause identifies the 1- to

8-character name of the processor group you are creating or updating.
The can specify a partially or fully wildcarded processor group name.
A wildcarded processor group name updates all matching processor
group definitions.
TO ENVIRONMENT environment-name
SYSTEM system-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE ID stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-39

6.5 The Define Statements

The TO clause identifies the inventory location to which the processor

group is defined or is to be defined. Names you specify in the TO
clause must all be fully specified.

DESCRIPTION description

Use the DESCRIPTION clause to enter text of up to 50 characters in

length describing the processor group. If the text contains imbedded
spaces, enclose it in either single or double quotation marks. The
description clause is required when creating a processor group
definition and optional when updating a processor group definition.

NEXT PROCESSOR GROUP group-name

The NEXT PROCESSOR GROUP clause identifies the name of the

processor group at the next map location. If you do not specify the
NEXT PROCESSOR GROUP clause, the clause defaults to the name of
the processor group that you are defining.

PROCESSOR OUTPUT TYPE

The PROCESSOR OUTPUT TYPE designates the kind of output in this

processor group. The character default of 16 is concatenation of type
names and processor group names. This is used with the element
registration feature of 4.0 and can be user defined.

GENERATE/DELETE/MOVE PROCESSOR NAME processor-name

The GENERATE/DELETE/MOVE PROCESSOR NAME clauses

identifies a one- to-eight character alpha-numeric name of the
processors that make up the processor group. The
GENERATE/MOVE/DELETE PROCESSOR NAME clauses are
optional when creating or updating a processor group definition. If
you do not specify the clause, the processor name defaults to
*NOPROC*. If the processor name identifies one of Endevor's
reserved processor names (GPPROCSS, DPPROCSS, BASICGEN or
BASICDEL), the processor name converts to *NOPROC*.

6-40 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

MOVE ACTION USES GENERATE/MOVE PROCESSOR

The MOVE ACTION USES GENERATE/MOVE PROCESSOR clause

indicates whether Endevor is to execute the generate or the move
processor as part of the MOVE action.

TRANSFER ACTION USES GENERATE/MOVE PROCESSOR

The TRANSFER ACTION USES GENERATE/MOVE PROCESSOR

clause indicates whether Endevor is to execute the generate or the
move processor as part of the TRANSFER action.

Example of Define Processor Group SCL

The following is an example of the DEFINE PROCESSOR GROUP SCL.

The example updates processor group COBNBL1. It updates the
transfer action so that the TRANSFER action uses the move processor
instead of the generate processor.
DEFINE PROCESSOR GROUP "COBNBL1"
TO ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
SYSTEM "ACCT"
TYPE "COBOL"
STAGE ID "U"
TRANSFER ACTION USES MOVE PROCESSOR .

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-41

6.5 The Define Statements

6.5.8 Define Processor Symbol

Use the DEFINE PROCESSOR SYMBOL action to define or update
symbols in processors.

6.5.9 Syntax

──DEFine PROcessor SYMbol────────────────────────────────────────────

──TO──ENVironment──environment-name──SYStem──system-name──────────────
──TYPe──type-name──┬─STAge ID──stage-id─────┬─────────────────────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘
──PROcessor GROup──group-name─────────────────────────────────────────
──PROcessor TYPe──┬─EQ─┬──┬─GENerate─┬────────────────────────────────
└─=──┘ ├─MOVe─────┤
└─DELete───┘
┌─,───────────────────────────────────────────┐
─── ─SYMbol──symbol-name──┬─EQ─┬──override-value─┴──.─────────────────
└─=──┘

6.5.9.1 Syntax Rules

DEFINE PROCESSOR SYMBOL

The DEFINE PROCESSOR SYMBOL clause indicates that you are to

define or update symbols in processors. You must specify this clause.
TO ENVIRONMENT environment-name
SYSTEM system-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE ID stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no
PROCESSOR GROUP group-name
PROCESSOR TYPE EQ/= GENERATE/MOVE/DELETE

The TO clause identifies the inventory location of the processor group

to which the processor symbols are defined or are to be defined, the
processor group, and a processor type within the group.

6-42 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

You must fully specify the environment name, system name, and type
name.

You can fully specify, partially wildcard or fully wildcard the

processor group name. A wildcarded processor group name updates
matching processor symbolic definitions. The processor group name
cannot be '*NOPROC*'. Specify either a generate, move, or delete
processor type.

SYMBOL symbol-name EQ/= override-value

The SYMBOL clause identifies the one- to eight-character name of the

processor symbol you are modifying. The symbol must be defined in
the processor.

The override value identifies the up to 65-character override value to

be associated with the symbol. If the override value contains
imbedded single quotation marks enclose the field in double quotation
marks. Likewise, if it contains imbedded double quotation marks
enclose it in single quotation marks. The override value cannot
contain both single and double quotation marks. You can specify
multiple symbolic values by repeating the SYMBOL clause as many
times as needed.

Example of Define Processor Symbol SCL

The following is an example of the DEFINE PROCESSOR SYMBOL

SCL. The example updates processor symbols for processor group
COBNBL1. The symbols for the generate processor are updated.
DEFINE PROCESSOR SYMBOL
TO ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
SYSTEM "ACCT"
TYPE "COBOL"
STAGE ID "U"
PROCESSOR GROUP "COBNBL1"
PROCESSOR TYPE EQ GENERATE
SYMBOL SYSOUT EQ "A"
SYMBOL PARMCOB EQ "NOLIB, LANGLVL(1)"
SYMBOL WRKUNIT EQ "SYSDA"
SYMBOL EXPINC EQ "N" .

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-43

6.5 The Define Statements

6.5.10 Define Shipment Destination

Use the DEFINE SHIPMENT DESTINATION action to define or
update destinations to which you ship package outputs.

6.5.11 Syntax
──DEFine SHIPMent DESTination──destination-name──DESCription──description─────
──TRANSMission METhod──method-name──REMote NODename──node-name─────────────────
──┬────────────────────────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────────
│ ┌─DO NOT SHIp─┐ │
└─┴─SHIp────────┴──COMPLementary DATaset─┘
──HOSt DATaset PREfix──value──¤──┬──────────────────────────────┬──¤───────────
│ ┌─DELete─┐ │
├─HOSt DISposition──┴─KEEp───┴─┤
│ ┌─SYSDA─┐ │
├─HOSt UNIt──┴─value─┴─────────┤
└─HOSt VOLume SERial──value────┘
──REMote DATaset PREfix──value──¤──┬────────────────────────────────┬──¤───────
│ ┌─DELete─┐ │
├─REMote DISposition──┴─KEEp───┴─┤
│ ┌─SYSDA─┐ │
├─REMote UNIt──┴─value─┴─────────┤
└─REMote VOLume SERial──value────┘
──REMote JOBcard──┬─EQ─┬──┤ JOBCARD ├──.──────────────────────────────────────
└─=──┘
JOBCARD:
├──(──'jobcard1'──┬───────────────────────────────────────────────┬──)──────────┤
└─,'jobcard2'──┬──────────────────────────────┬─┘
└─,'jobcard3'──┬─────────────┬─┘
└─,'jobcard4'─┘

6.5.11.1 Syntax Rules

DEFINE SHIPMENT DESTINATION destination-name

The DEFINE SHIPMENT DESTINATION clause identifies the 1- to

7-character name of the destination you are creating or updating. The
destination name you specify must be a fully qualified value.

DESCRIPTION description

Use the DESCRIPTION clause to enter text of up to 30 characters in

length describing the destination. If the text contains imbedded
spaces, enclose it in either single or double quotation marks. You must
specify the DESCRIPTION clause when creating a shipment
destination. The clause is optional when updating a shipment
destination.

6-44 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

TRANSMISSION METHOD method-name

The TRANSMISSION METHOD clause defines the transmission utility

that is to be used to ship the package to the remote destination. The
following is a list of transmission methods you can use along with the
transmission utility associated with each method:

Transmission Method Transmission Utility

BDT Bulk Data Transfer, Version 2 or greater
BDTNJE Bulk Data Transfer, Version 1 (NJE)
LOCAL IEBCOPY
NDM Network DataMover
NETVIEWFTP NetView File Transfer Program
XCOM XCOM

You must specify the TRANSMISSION METHOD clause when creating

a package shipment destination. The clause is optional when updating
a package shipment destination.

REMOTE NODENAME node-name

The REMOTE NODENAME clause identifies the site to which package

outputs are to be shipped. You must specify the REMOTE
NODENAME clause when creating a shipment destination. The clause
is optional when updating a shipment destination.

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-45

6.5 The Define Statements

SHIP/DO NOT SHIP COMPLEMENTARY DATASET

The SHIP/DO NOT SHIP COMPLEMENTARY DATASET clause

indicates whether or not data sets can be shipped along with package
shipments. The default is DO NOT SHIP COMPLEMENTARY
DATASET.

HOST DATASET PREFIX value

The HOST DATASET PREFIX clause defines the 1- to-14 character

prefix to be assigned to the staging data sets that are created at the
host node. You must specify the HOST DATASET PREFIX clause
when creating a package shipment destination. The clause is optional
when updating a package shipment destination.

HOST DISPOSITION DELETE/KEEP

The HOST DISPOSITION clause specifies the disposition of the host

staging data sets after the package shipment utility is complete. The
default disposition is DELETE.

HOST UNIT SYSDA/value

The HOST UNIT clause specifies the 1- to-8 character alpha-numeric

unit type on which the staging data set is allocated. The default value
is SYSDA. The utility does not verify that the value you specify is
defined to the system.

HOST VOLUME SERIAL value

The HOST VOLUME SERIAL clause identifies the 1- to 6-character

volume on which the host staging data sets will be allocated. The
utility does not verify that the volume serial you specify is defined to
the system.

REMOTE DATASET PREFIX value

The REMOTE DATASET PREFIX clause defines the prefix to be

assigned to the staging data sets that are created at the remote node.
It can be any number of data set name qualifiers of up to 14 characters
in length. The clause is required when creating a package shipment
destination and optional when updating a package shipment
destination.

REMOTE DISPOSITION DELETE/KEEP

The REMOTE DISPOSITION clause specifies the disposition of the

remote staging data sets after the package shipment utility is complete.
The default disposition is DELETE.

6-46 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

REMOTE UNIT SYSDA/value

The REMOTE UNIT clause specifies the unit type on which the staging
data set will be allocated. The default value is SYSDA. You can use
any string of up to eight alphanumeric characters. The utility does not
verify that the value you enter is defined to the system.

REMOTE VOLUME SERIAL value

The REMOTE VOLUME SERIAL clause identifies the volume on which

the remote staging data sets will be allocated. You can use any
alphanumeric string of up to six characters in length. The utility does
not verify that the volume serial you enter is defined to the system.

REMOTE JOBCARD EQ/= jobcard

The REMOTE JOBCARD clause specifies the JCL jobcard to be used at

the remote site. If the jobcard statement contains a single quotation
mark enclose the entire jobcard in double quotation marks. Each
jobcard can be no longer than 65 characters, excluding the delimiting
quotation marks. The REMOTE JOBCARD clause is required when
creating a package shipment destination and is optional when
updating a package shipment destination.

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-47

6.5 The Define Statements

Example of Define Shipment Destination SCL

The following is an example of the DEFINE SHIPMENT

DESTINATION SCL. The example creates a shipment destination
named BOSTNDM. The transmission method is Network DataMover
(NDM).

CREATE a Shipment Destination named BOSTNDM. The Transmission

Method will be NDM (Network DataMover).
DEFINE SHIPMENT DESTINATION 'BOSTNDM'
DESCRIPTION 'BOSTON DATA MOVER NODE'
TRANSMISSION METHOD 'NDM'
REMOTE NODENAME 'CHINNDM'
DO NOT SHIP COMPLEMENTARY DATASET
HOST DATASET PREFIX 'USER1.NDVR'
HOST DISPOSITION DELETE
HOST UNIT SYSDA
REMOTE DATASET PREFIX 'USER1.NDVR'
REMOTE DISPOSITION DELETE
REMOTE UNIT SYSDA
REMOTE JOBCARD =
("//JOBNAME JOB (ACCOUNT),'JOHN DOE'") ,
"//" ,
"//" ,
"//" )

6-48 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

6.5.12 Define Shipment Mapping Rule

Use the DEFINE SHIPMENT MAPPING RULE action to create or
update mapping rules between a host data set name and a remote data
set name.

6.5.13 Syntax
──DEFine SHIpment MAPping RULe───────────────────────────────────────
──TO──DESTination──destination-name──DESCription──description─────────
──HOSt DATaset──dataset-name──────────────────────────────────────────
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────┬──┬─────────┬──.──────
└─MAPS TO──┬──────────────────────────────┬─┘ └─EXClude─┘
└─REMote DATaset──dataset-name─┘

6.5.13.1 Syntax Rules

DEFINE SHIPMENT MAPPING RULE

The DEFINE SHIPMENT MAPPING RULE indicates that you are

creating or updating a mapping rule between a host data set name and
a remote data set name. You must specify this clause.

TO DESTINATION destination-name

The TO DESTINATION clause identifies the 1- to 16-character name of

an existing package shipment destination. You must specify a fully
specified value.

DESCRIPTION description

Use the DESCRIPTION clause to enter text of up to 40 characters in

length describing this data set map. If the text you enter contains
imbedded spaces enclose it in either single or double quotation marks.
You must specify the DESCRIPTION clause when creating a shipment
mapping rule. You cannot specify this clause when you are updating a
shipment mapping rule. If you specify the DESCRIPTION clause
when updating a shipment mapping rule, a caution message is issued
and the DESCRIPTION clause is ignored.

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-49

6.5 The Define Statements

HOST DATASET dataset-name MAPS TO REMOTE DATASET

dataset-name

The HOST DATASET clause identifies the 1- to 44-character name or

mask of the host data set name and the 1- to 44-character name or
mask of the remote data set name. If you do not specify the MAPS TO
REMOTE DATASET clause, the EXCLUDE clause is the default
mapping rule. You must use the HOST DATASET clause when
creating a shipment mapping rule. The clause is optional when
updating a shipment mapping rule.

EXCLUDE

Use the EXCLUDE clause if you do not want to transmit the package
outputs of a data set. You can only use the EXCLUDE clause if you
do not specify the MAPS TO REMOTE DATASET clause. The two
clauses are mutually exclusive.

Example of Define Shipment Mapping Rule SCL

The following is an example of the DEFINE SHIPMENT MAPPING

RULE SCL. The example creates a shipment rule for the shipment
destination named BOSTNDM.
DEFINE SHIPMENT MAPPING RULE
TO DESTINATION 'BOSTNDM'
DESCRIPTION "MOVE OBJECTS"
HOST DATASET 'ENDEVOR.QAFIN.OBJLIB'
MAPS TO REMOTE DATASET 'ENDEVOR.RMTFIN.OBJLIB' .

6-50 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

6.5.14 Define Subsystem

Use the DEFINE SUBSYSTEM action to create or update a subsystem
definition.

6.5.15 Syntax
──DEFine SUBSystem──subsystem-name───────────────────────────────────
──TO──ENVironment──environment-name──SYStem──system-name──────────────
──DESCription──description──┬────────────────────────────────┬──.────
└─NEXt SUBSystem──subsystem-name─┘

6.5.15.1 Syntax Rules

DEFINE SUBSYSTEM subsystem-name

The DEFINE SUBSYSTEM clause identifies the 1- to 8-character name

of the subsystem you are creating or updating. You can partially or
fully wildcard the subsystem name. A wildcarded subsystem name
updates all matching subsystem definitions.
TO ENVIRONMENT environment name
SYSTEM system-name

The TO clause identifies the inventory location to which you are

defining the subsystem. The environment name and system name you
use in the TO clause must be fully specified.

DESCRIPTION description

Use the DESCRIPTION clause to enter text of up to 50 characters in

length. If the text contains imbedded spaces enclose it in either single
or double quotation marks. If you are creating a subsystem definition
you must specify the DESCRIPTION clause. The clause is optional if
you are updating the subsystem definition.

NEXT SUBSYSTEM subsystem-name

The NEXT SUBSYSTEM clause identifies the name of the subsystem in

the next environment. If you do not specify the NEXT SUBSYSTEM
clause, it defaults to the name of the subsystem that you are creating.

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-51

6.5 The Define Statements

Example of Define Subsystem SCL

The following is an example of the DEFINE SUBSYSTEM SCL. The

example creates a subsystem named GENLEDG for system ACCT.
DEFINE SUBSYSTEM "GENLEDG"
TO ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
SYSTEM "ACCT"
DESCRIPTION "The General Ledger Subsystem"
NEXT SUBSYSTEM "GENLEDG" .

6-52 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

6.5.16 Define System

Use the DEFINE SYSTEM clause to create or update system
definitions.

6.5.17 Syntax
──DEFine SYStem──system-name──TO ENVironment──environment-name────────────────
──DESCription──description─────────────────────────────────────────────────────
──¤──┬────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──¤─────────────────────
├─NEXt SYStem──system-name───────────────────────┤
│ ┌─NOT REQuired─┐ │
├─COMMent──┴─REQuired─────┴──────────────────────┤
│ ┌─NOT REQuired─┐ │
├─CCId──┴─REQuired─────┴─────────────────────────┤
├─┬─┤ DUPlicate ELEment ├───┬────────────────────┤
│ └─┤ DUPlicate PROcessor ├─┘ │
│ ┌─REQuired─────┐ │
├─ELEment JUMp ACKnowledgement──┴─NOT REQuired─┴─┤
│ ┌─IS NOT ACTIVe─┐ │
├─SIGnout──┴─IS ACTIVe─────┴─────────────────────┤
│ ┌─IS NOT ACTIVe─┐ │
└─SIGnout DATaset VALidation──┴─IS ACTIVe─────┴──┘
──STAge ONE LOAd LIBRARY──┬────┬──dataset-name─────────────────────────────────
└─IS─┘
──┬──────────────────────────────────────────────┬─────────────────────────────
└─STAge ONE LISt LIBRARY──┬────┬──dataset-name─┘
└─IS─┘
──STAge TWO LOAd LIBRARY──┬────┬──dataset-name─────────────────────────────────
└─IS─┘
──┬──────────────────────────────────────────────┬──.─────────────────────────
└─STAge TWO LISt LIBRARY──┬────┬──dataset-name─┘
└─IS─┘

DUPlicate ELEment:
├──┬─DUPlicate ELEment──name──CHEck IS ACTIVe──┬───────────┬─┬──────────────────┤
│ └─┤ error ├─┘ │
└─DUPlicate ELEment──name──CHEck IS NOT ACTIVe────────────┘
DUPlicate PROcessor OUTput:
├──┬─DUPlicate PROcessor OUTput──type──CHEck IS ACTIVe──┬───────────┬─┬─────────┤
│ └─┤ error ├─┘ │
└─DUPlicate PROcessor OUTput──type──CHEck IS NOT ACTIVe────────────┘
error:
├──┬──────────────────────────────────────┬─────────────────────────────────────┤
└─error──SEVerity LEVel──is──┬───────┬─┘
└─W|E|C─┘

6.5.17.1 Syntax Rules

DEFINE SYSTEM system-name

The DEFINE SYSTEM clause identifies the 1- to 8-character name of

the system you are creating or updating. You can partially or fully
wildcard the system name. A wildcarded system name updates all
matching system definitions.

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-53

6.5 The Define Statements

TO ENVIRONMENT environment-name

The TO ENVIRONMENT clause identifies the environment to which

you are defining the system. The environment name you specify must
be fully qualified and non-wildcarded.

DESCRIPTION description

Use the DESCRIPTION clause to enter text of up to 50 characters in

length describing this system. If the text contains imbedded spaces
enclose it in either single or double quotation marks. You must
specify the DESCRIPTION clause when creating a system definition.
The clause is optional if you are updating the system definition.

NEXT SYSTEM system-name

The NEXT SYSTEM clause identifies the name of the system in the
next environment. If you do not specify the NEXT SYSTEM clause, it
defaults to the name of the system you are creating or updating.
COMMENTS REQUIRED/NOT REQUIRED

The COMMENTS REQUIRED/NOT REQUIRED clause indicates

whether comments are required for actions against elements in this
system. The default is COMMENTS NOT REQUIRED.

CCID REQUIRED/NOT REQUIRED

The CCID REQUIRED/NOT REQUIRED clause indicates whether

CCIDs are required for actions against elements in this system. The
default is CCID NOT REQUIRED.

DUPLICATE ELEMENT name CHEck

The DUPLICATE ELEMENT name CHEck clause is an element name

registration checking feature.

Acceptable values are:

■ Y
■ N - Default value
Note: If neither clause is specified then the "DUPLICATE ELEMENT
name CHEck IS NOT ACTIVe" option will be in effect. The severity
clause is only valid after the "CHEck IS ACTIVe" clause. This clause is
optional and if ommitted the default value is set to E.

error SEVERITY LEVEL

The error SEVERITY LEVEL clause is available with DUPLICATE

ELEMENT and is a registration check for message severity levels.

6-54 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

Acceptable values are:

■ W - Warning
■ C - Caution
■ E - Error

DUPLICATE PROCESSOR OUTPUT TYPE

The duplicate processor output type clause is a processor registration

checking feature.

Acceptable values are:

■ Y
■ N - Default value
Note: If neither clause is specified then the "DUPlicate PROCessor
OUTput type CHEck IS NOT ACTive" option will be in effect. The
severity clause is only valid after the "CHEck IS ACTive" clause. This
clause is optional and if omitted the default value is set to E.

error SEVERITY LEVEL

The error severity level clause is available as a PROcessor OUTput

registration check for message severity levels.

Acceptable values are:

■ W - Warning
■ C - Caution
■ E - Error

ELEMENT JUMP ACKNOWLEDGMENT REQUIRED/NOT

REQUIRED

The ELEMENT JUMP ACKNOWLEDGMENT REQUIRED/NOT

REQUIRED clause indicates whether users must use ACKNOWLEDGE
ELM JUMP=Y when moving elements. Endevor uses this field when it
finds an element being moved at a non-mapped stage between the
from and to locations of the move. The default is ELEMENT JUMP
ACKNOWLEDGMENT REQUIRED. For information on moving
elements and element jump acknowledgment see the User's Guide

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-55

6.5 The Define Statements

SIGNOUT IS ACTIVE/NOT ACTIVE

The SIGNOUT IS ACTIVE/NOT ACTIVE clause indicates whether the

signin/signout facility is in use for this system. The default is
SIGNOUT IS NOT ACTIVE. Refer to the User's Guide for more
information on this facility.

SIGNOUT DATASET VALIDATION IS ACTIVE/NOT ACTIVE

The SIGNOUT DATASET VALIDATION IS ACTIVE/NOT ACTIVE

clause indicates whether data set validation is in use for this system.
The default is SIGNOUT DATASET VALIDATION IS NOT ACTIVE.
STAGE ONE/TWO LOAD LIBRARY

The STAGE LOAD LIBRARY clauses indicate the data set names of the
processor load libraries for the system. The data set name must:
■ Be fully qualified and no longer than 44 characters in length.
■ Be predefined and catalogued in the system catalogue.
■ Be a partitioned data set.
■ Have an undefined record format (DCB=RECFM=U).

You must specify the STAGE LOAD LIBRARY clauses when creating
the system definition. The clauses are optional when updating a
system definition.

STAGE ONE/TWO LIST LIBRARY

The STAGE ONE LIST LIBRARY and the STAGE TWO LIST LIBRARY
identifies the processor listing library for this system.

Example of Define System SCL

The following is an example of the DEFINE SYSTEM SCL. The

example creates a system named ACCT. It uses the optional clauses
COMMENTS REQUIRED, SIGNOUT DATASET VALIDATION IS
ACTIVE, and SIGNOUT IS ACTIVE. It also specifies the location of
the optional Stage One and Stage Two List libraries.
DEFINE SYSTEM "ACCT"
TO ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
DESCRIPTION "The Accounting System"
COMMENTS REQUIRED
SIGNOUT DATASET VALIDATION IS ACTIVE
SIGNOUT IS ACTIVE
STAGE ONE LOAD LIBRARY IS "ENDEVOR.LOAD1.ACCT"
STAGE ONE LIST LIBRARY IS "ENDEVOR.LIST1.ACCT"
STAGE TWO LOAD LIBRARY IS "ENDEVOR.LOAD2.ACCT"
STAGE TWO LIST LIBRARY IS "ENDEVOR.LIST2.ACCT" .

6-56 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

6.5.18 Define Type

Use the DEFINE TYPE action to create or update type definitions.

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-57

6.5 The Define Statements

6.5.19 Syntax
──DEFine TYPe──type-name──TO ENVironment──environment-name──SYStem──system-name──────────
──┬─STAge ID──stage-id─────┬──DESCription──description──┬──────────────────────┬──────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘ └─NEXt TYPe──type-name─┘
──BASe LIBRARY──┬────┬──dataset-name──DELta LIBRARY──┬────┬──dataset-name─────────────────
└─IS─┘ └─IS─┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────┬──┬────────────────────────────┬───────────────
└─INCLUDE LIBRARY──┬────┬──dataset-name─┘ │ ┌─DO NOT EXPand INCLUDES─┐ │
└─IS─┘ └─┴─EXPand INCLUDES────────┴─┘
──┬─────────────────────────────────────────────┬─────────────────────────────────────────
└─SOUrce OUTput LIBRARY──┬────┬──dataset-name─┘
└─IS─┘
┌─NOPROC───┐
──DEFAult PROcessor GROup──┬────┬──┴─group-name─┴─────────────────────────────────────────
└─IS─┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────┬──┬──────────────────────────┬─────────────
│ ┌─FORWard─┐ │ │ ┌─COMPRess BASe────────┐ │
└─ELEment DELta FORMat──┬────┬──┴─REVerse─┴─┘ └─┴─DO NOT COMPRess BASe─┴─┘
└─IS─┘
──┬─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬─────────────────────────────
│ ┌─5────┐ │
└─REGression PERcentage──┬───────────┬──┬────┬──┴─value─┴─┘
└─THReshold─┘ └─IS─┘
──┬──────────────────────────────────────────────┬────────────────────────────────────────
│ ┌─CAUtion─────┐ │
└─REGression SEVerity──┬────┬──┼─INFormation─┼─┘
└─IS─┘ ├─WARning─────┤
└─ERRor───────┘
──SOUrce ELEment LENgth──┬────┬──value────────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─IS─┘
──COMPAre──┬──────┬──COLumn──value──┬────┬──value─────────────────────────────────────────
└─FROm─┘ └─TO─┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────────────────────
│ ┌─CONsolidate ELEment──┬────────┬───┐ │
│ │ └─LEVELS─┘ │ │
└─┴─DO NOT CONsolidate ELEment LEVELS─┴─┘
──┬─────────────────────────────────────────┬─────────────────────────────────────────────
│ ┌─97────┐ │
└─CONsolidate ELEment AT LEVel──┴─value─┴─┘
──┬────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──────────────────────────────────
│ ┌─5────┐ │
└─NUMber OF ELEment LEVELS TO CONsolidate──┴─value─┴─┘
──LANguage──┬────┬──language-name──┬─PANvalet──┬──LANguage──┬────┬──language-name─────────
└─IS─┘ └─LIBRARian─┘ └─IS─┘
──┬─────────────────────────────────┬──┬────────────────────────────────────────┬─────────
└─DATA FORMAT──┬────┬──┬─BINary─┬─┘ └─FILe EXTension──┬────┬──file-extension─┘
└─IS─┘ └─TEXt───┘ └─IS─┘
──┬─────────────────────────────────────────┬─────────────────────────────────────────────
│ ┌─CONsolidate COMPOnent──┬────────┬───┐ │
│ │ └─LEVELS─┘ │ │
└─┴─DO NOT CONsolidate COMPOnent LEVELS─┴─┘
──┬─────────────────────────────────────────────┬─────────────────────────────────────────
│ ┌─FORWard─┐ │
└─COMPOnent DELTa FORMat──┬────┬──┴─REVerse─┴─┘
└─IS─┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────────┬───────────────────────────────────────────
│ ┌─99────┐ │
└─CONsolidate COMPOnent AT LEVel──┴─value─┴─┘
──┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬────────────────────────────────
│ ┌─5────┐ │
└─NUMber OF COMPOnent LEVELS TO CONsolidate──┴─value─┴─┘
──┬─────────────────────────────┬──.─────────────────────────────────────────────────────
└─HFS RECFM──┬────┬──┬─COMP─┬─┘
└─IS─┘ ├─F────┤
├─CR───┤
├─CRLF─┤
├─LF───┤
├─NL───┤
└─V────┘

6-58 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

6.5.19.1 Syntax Rules

DEFINE TYPE type-name

The DEFINE TYPE clause identifies the 1- to 8-character name of the

type you are defining or updating. You can partially or fully wildcard
the type name. A wildcarded type name updates all matching type
definitions.

If you specify PROCESS as the type name you must specify the
language name in the LANGUAGE clause as CNTLPROC. If you use
the PANVALET/LIBRARIAN LANGUAGE clause, the language name
you specify cannot be CNTLPROC. Likewise, if the type name you
specify in the DEFINE TYPE clause is not PROCESS, then the language
name you specify in the LANGUAGE clause and the
PANVALET/LIBRARIAN cannot be CNTLPROC.
TO ENVIRONMENT environment-name
SYSTEM system-name
STAGE ID stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

The TO clause identifies the inventory location to which you are

defining or updating the type. Names you specify in the TO clause
must be fully specified and non-wildcarded. Enter the system name
and either a stage ID or stage number to which the type is defined.

DESCRIPTION description

Use the DESCRIPTION clause to enter text of up to 50 characters in

length describing this type. If the text contains imbedded spaces
enclose it in either single or double quotation marks. You must use
the DESCRIPTION clause when creating a type definition. The clause
is optional when updating a type definition.

NEXT TYPE type-name

The NEXT TYPE clause identifies the name of the type at the next map
location. If you do not specify the NEXT TYPE clause, it defaults to
the name of the type you are defining.

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-59

6.5 The Define Statements

BASE LIBRARY IS dataset-name

The BASE LIBRARY clause identifies the base library for this type.
You must use a fully qualified data set name of no longer than 44
characters in length. The data set can include the &C1 symbolic
variables. If the data set name does not contain a &C1 symbolic, the
data set must be catalogued. If the data set name does not contain any
&C1 symbolic values and the data set organization is partitioned, the
data set record length must be greater than or equal to the SOURCE
ELEMENT LENGTH. You must specify the BASE LIBRARY clause
when creating a new type definition. The clause is optional when
updating a type definition.

DELTA LIBRARY IS dataset-name

The DELTA LIBRARY clause identifies the name of the delta library
for the type. You must use a fully qualified data set name of no
longer than 44 characters in length. the data set can include the &C1
symbolic variables. If the data set name does not contain a &C1
symbolic, the data set must be catalogued. If the data set name does
not contain any &C1 symbolic values and the data set organization is
partitioned, the data set record length must be greater than or equal to
the SOURCE ELEMENT LENGTH. You must specify the DELTA
LIBRARY clause when creating a new type definition. The clause is
optional when updating a type definition.
INCLUDE LIBRARY IS dataset-name
EXPAND/DO NOT EXPAND INCLUDES

The INCLUDE LIBRARY clause identifies the name of the partitioned

data set, CA-Panvalet, CA-Librarian, or Endevor LIB for the type. You
must use a fully qualified data set name of no longer than 44
characters in length. If the data set name does not contain a &C1
symbolic, the data set must be catalogued. If the data set name does
not contain any &C1 symbolic values and the data set organization is
partitioned, the data set record length must be greater than or equal to
the SOURCE ELEMENT LENGTH.

6-60 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

You can specify if members can be expanded from this library. The
default is DO NOT EXPAND INCLUDES. You can only specify the
EXPAND INCLUDES clause if you specify the INCLUDE LIBRARY
clause.

SOURCE OUTPUT LIBRARY IS dataset-name

The SOURCE OUTPUT LIBRARY clause identifies the data set name of
the source output library. If the data set name does not contain a &C1
symbolic, the data set must be catalogued. If the data set name does
not contain any &C1 symbolic values and the data set organization is
partitioned, the data set record length must be greater than or equal to
the SOURCE ELEMENT LENGTH.

DEFAULT PROCESSOR GROUP IS *NOPROC*/group-name

The DEFAULT PROCESSOR GROUP clause identifies the processor

group for this type. The processor group name you use must be fully
specified and not contain imbedded blanks. The default is *NOPROC*.

If you are creating a type definition and you do not specify the
DEFAULT PROCESSOR GROUP clause and the type name you specify
on the DEFINE TYPE action is 'PROCESS', the default value is set to
PROCESS. If you are creating a type definition and you do not specify
the DEFAULT PROCESSOR GROUP clause and the type name you
specify in the DEFINE TYPE action is not 'PROCESS', the default value
is set to *NOPROC*.

ELEMENT DELTA FORMAT IS

FORWARD/REVERSE/FULL-IMAGE

The ELEMENT DELTA FORMAT clause specifies the delta storage

format for elements of this type. If you do not specify the ELEMENT
DELTA FORMAT clause and you are creating a type definition, the
delta format defaults to FORWARD.

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-61

6.5 The Define Statements

COMPRESS/DO NOT COMPRESS BASE

The COMPRESS BASE clause indicates whether to compress the base

form of elements stored in reverse delta format. The default is
COMPRESS BASE.

REGRESSION PERCENTAGE THRESHOLD IS 50/value

The REGRESSION PERCENTAGE clause specifies the maximum

regression percent for this type. You must specify a numeric value
between 1 and 99, inclusive. If you are creating a type definition and
do not specify this clause, the value defaults to 50.

REGRESSION SEVERITY IS
INFORMATION/WARNING/CAUTION/ERROR/

The REGRESSION SEVERITY IS clause identifies the severity of the

error message that issues when Endevor detects regression. The
default is CAUTION.

SOURCE ELEMENT LENGTH IS value

The SOURCE ELEMENT LENGTH identifies the logical record length

in source statements. The maximum allowable value is 32,000. If the
type is PROCESS, the source element must be exactly 80. You must
specify the SOURCE ELEMENT LENGTH clause when creating a type
definition. The clause is optional when updating a type definition.

COMPARE FROM COLUMN value TO value

The COMPARE FROM COLUMN clause identifies the position within

each statement at which Endevor begins comparing to identify
changed statements. The values you specify must be between one and
the SOURCE ELEMENT LENGTH. The value you specify in the
COMPARE FROM clause must be less than or equal to the value you
specify in the COMPARE TO clause. You must specify the COMPARE
FROM COLUMN clause when creating a type definition. The clause is
optional when updating a type definition.

6-62 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

CONSOLIDATE/DO NOT CONSOLIDATE ELEMENT LEVELS

The CONSOLIDATE ELEMENT LEVEL clause identifies whether or

not Endevor is to consolidate element change levels. The default is to
consolidate change levels.

If you specify the DO NOT CONSOLIDATE ELEMENT LEVELS clause

you must set the corresponding NUMBER OF ELEMENT LEVELS TO
CONSOLIDATE clause to zero. If you are updating a type definition,
and specify the DO NOT CONSOLIDATE ELEMENT LEVELS clause
but do not specify the NUMBER OF ELEMENT LEVELS TO
CONSOLIDATE clause, the NUMBER OF LEVELS TO CONSOLIDATE
clause is set to zero and you receive a warning message.

If you specify the CONSOLIDATE ELEMENT LEVELS clause, the

value you specify in the corresponding NUMBER OF ELEMENT
LEVELS TO CONSOLIDATE clause must be greater than zero.

CONSOLIDATE ELEMENT AT LEVEL 99/value

The CONSOLIDATE ELEMENT AT LEVEL clause specifies the level

number at which Endevor consolidates change levels. The default is
99.

NUMBER OF ELEMENT LEVELS TO CONSOLIDATE 50/value

The NUMBER OF LEVELS TO CONSOLIDATE clause indicates the

number of deltas to consolidate when the number of levels reaches the
figure in the CONSOLIDATE ELEMENT AT LEVEL clause. You can
specify a value between 1 and 99. The default is 50.

HFS RECFM

Identifies the record delimiter used in a HFS file. A record delimiter is

necessary due to the nature of HFSfiles. HFS files contain one large
data stream; therefore, a delimiter is used to identify individual
records within that data stream. If a delimiter is not specified, the
system defaults to NL.

Acceptable delimiter values are:

■ COMP—Variable length records compressed by Endevor
■ CR—Carriage return. ASCII and EBCDIC value "CR". The hex
value is '0D'.
■ CRLF—EBCDIC Carriage return\line feed. The hex value is '0D25'.
■ F—Fixed Length
■ LF—EBCDIC line feed. The hex value is '25'.

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-63

6.5 The Define Statements

■ NL—Default. EBCDIC new line character. This is the delimiter is

used by the OEDIT and OBROWS Eeditor.
■ V—Variable. The first two bytes of the record contain the RDW
(record descriptor word). The RDW contains the length of the
entire record, including the RDW.
LANGUAGE IS language-name

The LANGUAGE clause defines the source language of the type. You
can use any alphanumeric string of up to eight characters in length.
You must specify the LANGUAGE clause when creating a type
definition. The clause is optional when updating a type definition.

If the language you specify in the LANGUAGE IS clause is one of the

languages in the following table, the values you specify in the
COMPARE FROM clause are compared to determine if they fall within
the following ranges.

Language Compare From Compare To

ANSCOBOL 7 72
ASM 1 72
ASSEMBLR 1 72
BAL 1 72
COBOL 7 72
COBOL-72 7 72
COBOL-74 7 72
COBOLF 7 72
COBOLVS 7 72
DATA 1 8
FORTRAN 1 72
FORT 1 72
JCL 1 72
LNKCARD 1 72
PL1 1 72
PLI 1 72
PL/1 1 72
PL/I 1 72
RPG 6 74

6-64 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

PANVALET/LIBRARIAN LANGUAGE IS language-name

The PANVALET/LIBRARIAN LANGUAGE clause identifies the

CA-Panvalet or CA-Librarian source language for this type. You must
specify this clause when creating a type definition and if CA-Panvalet
or CA-Librarian support is not active. The clause is optional when
updating a type definition. If you do not specify the
PANVALET/LIBRARIAN LANGUAGE clause but specify a
LANGUAGE clause, Endevor uses the language name in the
LANGUAGE clause for the PANVALET/LIBRARIAN LANGUAGE.

The following table lists acceptable names for CA-Panvalet as well as

values within which the names must fall for the COMPARE FROM
clause.

CA-Panvalet Language Compare From Compare To

ALC 1 72
ANSCOBOL 7 72
AUTOCODE 6 75
BAL 1 72
COBOL 7 72
COBOL-72 7 72
DATA 1 8
EZPLUS 7 8
FORTRAN 1 72
JCL 1 72
OBJECT 1 72
OTHER 1 72
PL/1 1 72
PL/I 1 72
RPG 6 74
TELON 7 8
USER180 7 8
USER780 7 8

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-65

6.5 The Define Statements

The following table lists acceptable names for CA-Librarian as well as

values within which the names must fall for the COMPARE FROM
clause.

CA-Librarian Language Compare From Compare To

ASM 1 72
COB 7 72
DAT 1 80
FOR 1 72
FRG 0 0
FRH 0 0
GIS 0 0
GOF 0 0
JCL 1 72
PLF 0 0
PLI 1 72
RPG 6 74
TXT 1 80
VSB 0 0

6-66 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

DATA FORMAT IS BINary/TEXt

The DATA FORMAT clause indicates whether the element is in binary

or text format.

FILE EXTENTION IS file-extension

The FILE EXTENTION clause identifies the 8-character file extension

for this element. Valid values are a-z, A-Z, 0-9, or all blanks. Trailing
blanks are supported, but embedded blanks are not.

CONSOLIDATE/DO NOT CONSOLIDATE COMPONENT LEVELS

The CONSOLIDATE COMPONENT LEVEL clause identifies whether

or not Endevor is to consolidate component change levels. The default
is to consolidate change levels.

If you specify the DO NOT CONSOLIDATE COMPONENT LEVELS

clause you must set the corresponding NUMBER OF COMPONENT
LEVELS TO CONSOLIDATE clause to zero. If you are updating a
type definition and specify the DO NOT CONSOLIDATE
COMPONENT LEVELS clause but do not specify the NUMBER OF
COMPONENT LEVELS TO CONSOLIDATE clause, the NUMBER OF
COMPONENTS LEVELS TO CONSOLIDATE clause is set to zero and
you receive a warning message.

If you specify the CONSOLIDATE COMPONENT LEVELS clause, the

value you specify in the corresponding NUMBER OF COMPONENTS
LEVELS TO CONSOLIDATE clause must be greater than zero.

COMPONENT DELTA FORMAT IS FORWARD/REVERSE

The COMPONENT DELTA FORMAT clause specifies the delta storage

format for component list information. If you do not specify this
clause and you are creating a type definition, the delta format defaults
to FORWARD.

CONSOLIDATE COMPONENT AT LEVEL 99/value

The CONSOLIDATE COMPONENT AT LEVEL clause specifies the

level number at which Endevor consolidates change levels. You can
specify a value between 1 and 99. The default is 99.

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-67

6.5 The Define Statements

NUMBER OF COMPONENT LEVELS TO CONSOLIDATE 50/value

The NUMBER OF COMPONENT LEVELS TO CONSOLIDATE clause

indicates the number of deltas to consolidate when the number of
levels reaches the figure in the CONSOLIDATE COMPONENTS AT
LEVEL clause. You can specify a value between 1 and 99. The default
is 50.

Example of Define Type SCL

The following is an example of the DEFINE TYPE SCL. The example

creates a type named COBOL. It also uses the optional bolded clauses.
DEFINE TYPE "COBOL"
TO ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
SYSTEM "ACCT"
STAGE NUMBER 1
DESCRIPTION "The TYPE COBOL"
BASE LIBRARY IS "ENDEVOR.BASE1.SOURCE"
DELTA LIBRARY IS "ENDEVOR.DELTA1.SOURCE"
INCLUDE LIBRARY IS "ENDEVOR.INCLLIB.COPYBOOK"
DEFAULT PROCESSOR GROUP IS "COBNBL1"
ELEMENT DELTA FORMAT IS REVERSE
SOURCE ELEMENT LENGTH IS 8
COMPARE FROM COLUMN 7 TO 72
CONSOLIDATE ELEMENT AT LEVEL 8
NUMBER OF ELEMENT LEVELS TO CONSOLIDATE 3
LANGUAGE IS "COBOL"
PANVALET LANGUAGE IS "COBOL" .

6-68 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

6.5.20 Define Type Sequence

Use the DEFINE TYPE SEQUENCE action to update the relative
sequence of processing for the various element types defined within a
system. The DEFINE TYPE SEQUENCE action merges the existing
type sequence information with the sequence information you specify
in the DEFINE TYPE SEQUENCE action. If the option Global Type
Sequencing is in effect at your site, a DEFINE TYPE SEQUENCE action
generates a warning message, however the SCL statement is still
executed.

Note: It is not possible to create a type sequence using the DEFINE

TYPE SEQUENCE action. The type sequence definition is
automatically created when you define a new system.

6.5.21 Syntax

──DEFine TYPe SEQuence──TO──ENVironment──environment-name────────────

──SYStem──system-name──┬─STAge ID──stage-id─────┬─────────────────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘
┌─,───────────────────────────┐
──SEQuence──┬─EQ─┬──(─── ─(type-name,sequence number)─┴──)──.─────────
└─=──┘

6.5.21.1 Syntax Rules

DEFINE TYPE SEQUENCE

The DEFINE TYPE SEQUENCE clause indicates that you are updating
the relative sequence of processing for the various element types
defined within a system. You must specify this clause.
TO ENVIRONMENT environment-name
SYSTEM system-name
STAGE ID stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

The TO clause identifies the inventory location to which you are

defining the type sequence. Names you specify on the TO clause must
be fully qualified.

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-69

6.5 The Define Statements

SEQUENCE EQ/= type-name,sequence number

The SEQUENCE clause defines the processing sequence for processors

for the types you indicate. The SEQUENCE clause contains a list of
type name and sequence number pairs. The type name represents an
existing element type name that must be defined to the system and
stage you specify. The sequence number is a number between 0 and
9999 that is not a multiple of 10. You can specify type names and
sequence numbers more than once. You must specify at least one type
name and sequence number pair. Enclose multiple pairs in
parentheses and separate by commas. For example, to define the type
sequence for types COBOL and COPYBOOK, the SEQUENCE clause
would be specified as:
SEQUENCE=((COBOL,15),(COPYBOOK,25))

The DEFINE TYPE SEQUENCE action merges the existing type

sequence information with the sequence information you specify in the
DEFINE TYPE SEQUENCE action. The merged information is used to
create the new type sequence record. The existing type sequence
numbers are assigned 10 and are incremented by 10. For example,
assume the type sequence record for system Payroll is defined as
follows:
COPYBOOK, MACRO, COBOLPGM, ASSEMPGM, JCL.

The COPYBOOK type is assigned sequence number 10, MACRO is

assigned 20, COBOLPGM is assigned 30 and so on. Further, assume
that the DEFINE TYPE SEQUENCE action specified the following
SEQUENCE clause:
SEQUENCE=((COBOLPGM,35),(ASSEMPGM,25)).

The updated TYPE SEQUENCE record would be defined as follows:

COPYBOOK, MACRO, ASSEMPGM, COBOLPGM,JCL

6-70 SCL Reference Guide

 6.5 The Define Statements

Example of Define Type Sequence SCL

The following is an example of the DEFINE TYPE SEQUENCE SCL.

The example updates the type sequence for system ACCT.
DEFINE TYPE SEQUENCE
TO ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
SYSTEM "ACCT"
STAGE ID "U"
SEQUENCE = ( (LINK, 5),
(COBOL, 15),
(ASM, 25),
(JCL, 35) ) .

Before the update the sequence numbers are:

LINK = 5
COBOL = 15
ASM = 25
JCL = 35

After the update the sequence numbers assigned are:

LINK = 1
COBOL = 2
ASM = 3
JCL = 4

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-71

6.5 The Define Statements

6.6 The Delete Statements

6.6.1 Overview
Use DELETE statements to delete existing environment definitions.
The DELETE action will not delete an environment definition if any
elements are defined to the environment definition. For example, you
cannot delete a system if any subsystems or types are defined to that
system. You must delete the subsystems and types before you can
delete the system.

Note: There is no action to delete a type sequence definition. The

DELETE SYSTEM action deletes the type sequence definitions.

The following general conventions apply to all DELETE statements:

■ Names you specify in the DELETE clause can have a maximum of
8 characters with the exception of SHIPMENT DESTINATION,
which can be no longer than 7 characters, and APPROVER
GROUP, which can be no longer than 16 characters.
■ The DELETE action allows wildcarded names in all
non-environment inventory location fields.
■ Environment names you specify in the FROM clause must all be
fully specified.
■ You must enclose names that contain only numeric characters in
single or double quotation marks.
■ Names cannot include imbedded spaces, non-alphabetical,
non-numeric, or non-national characters.

6-72 SCL Reference Guide

 6.6 The Delete Statements

6.6.2 Delete Approver Group

Use the DELETE APPROVER GROUP action to delete approver group
definitions.

6.6.3 Syntax

──DELete APProver GROup──group-name──────────────────────────────────

──FROm──ENVironment──environment-name─────────────────────────────────
──┬─────────────────────────────────────┬──.─────────────────────────
│ ┌─,───────┐ │
└─APProver──┬─EQ─┬──(─── ─user-id─┴──)─┘
└─=──┘

6.6.3.1 Syntax Rules

DELETE APPROVER GROUP group-name

The DELETE APPROVER GROUP clause identifies the 1- to 8-character

name of the approver group you are deleting. You can use a partially
or fully wildcarded approver group name.

FROM ENVIRONMENT environment-name

The FROM clause identifies the environment location of the approver

group you are deleting. You must specify a fully qualified
environment name.

APPROVER EQ/= user-id

The APPROVER clause identifies one or more approver user IDs to be

deleted from the Approver Group definition. If you specify more than
one user ID, enclose the IDs in parentheses and separate by commas.
If you do not specify the APPROVER clause, Endevor deletes the
entire Approver Group definition.

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-73

6.6 The Delete Statements

Example of Delete Approver Group SCL

The following is an example of the DELETE APPROVER GROUP SCL.

The example deletes certain approvers from the approver group
named ACCTPAY1. Using the DELETE statement in this way acts like
an update. The list of users that are currently in approver group
ACCTPAY1 are (USER001, USER002, USER003, USER004, USER005).
This example removes USER001 and USER004 from the Approver
Group.
DELETE APPROVER GROUP "ACCTPAY1"
FROM ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
APPROVER EQ ( USER1,
USER4 ).

6-74 SCL Reference Guide

 6.6 The Delete Statements

6.6.4 Delete Approver Relation

Use the DELETE APPROVER RELATION action to delete an approver
relation definition.

6.6.5 Syntax

──DELete APProver RELation──FOR APProver GROup──group-name───────────

──FROm──ENVironment──environment-name──SYStem──system-name────────────
──SUBSystem──subsystem-name──TYPe──type-name──────────────────────────
──┬─STAge ID──stage-id─────┬──┬─────────────────────────────┬──.─────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘ │ ┌─STANdard──┐ │
└─TYPe──┬────┬──┴─EMErgency─┴─┘
└─IS─┘

6.6.5.1 Syntax Rules

DELETE APPROVER RELATION

The DELETE APPROVER RELATION clause indicates that you are

deleting a approver relation definition. You must specify this clause.

FOR APPROVER GROUP group-name

The FOR APPROVER GROUP clause identifies the name of the

approver group to which the approver relationship exists. You can use
a partially or fully wildcarded approver group name. If you wildcard
the approver group name it will not be expanded.
FROM ENVIRONMENT environment-name
SYSTEM system-name
SUBSYSTEM subsystem-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE ID stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

The FROM clause identifies the inventory location to which the

approver group is related. You must use a must be fully specified
environment name. You can fully specify or fully wildcard the system
name, subsystem name, and type name. They cannot be partially
wildcarded.

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-75

6.6 The Delete Statements

TYPE IS STANDARD/EMERGENCY

The TYPE IS clause identifies the approver type for this approver
group. An approver group designated as standard can only approve
standard packages. Likewise, an approver group designated as
emergency can only approve emergency packages. The default is
TYPE IS STANDARD.

Example of Delete Approver Relation SCL

The following is an example of the DELETE APPROVER RELATION

SCL. The example deletes an approver relation for approver group
ACCTPAY1.
DELETE APPROVER RELATION
FOR APPROVER GROUP "ACCTPAY1"
FROM ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
SYSTEM "ACCT"
SUBSYSTEM "GENLEDG"
TYPE "COBOL"
STAGE NUMBER 1
TYPE IS STANDARD .

6-76 SCL Reference Guide

 6.6 The Delete Statements

6.6.6 Delete Processor Group

Use the DELETE PROCESSOR GROUP action to delete processor
group definitions. The DELETE PROCESSOR GROUP action also
deletes all processor group symbols associated with the processor
group.

Note: You cannot delete a processor group if the processor group is

associated with an element at that stage.

6.6.7 Syntax

──DELete PROcessor GROup──group-name─────────────────────────────────

──FROm──ENVironment──environment-name──SYStem──system-name────────────
──TYPe──type-name──┬─STAge ID──stage-id─────┬──.─────────────────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘

6.6.7.1 Syntax Rules

DELETE PROCESSOR GROUP group-name

The DELETE PROCESSOR GROUP clause identifies the 1- to

8-character name of the processor group you are deleting. You can
partially or fully wildcard the processor group name.
FROM ENVIRONMENT environment-name
SYSTEM system-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE ID stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

The FROM clause identifies the inventory location to which the

processor group you are deleting is defined. Names you use in the
FROM clause must be fully specified.

Example of Delete Processor Group SCL

The following is an example of the DELETE PROCESSOR GROUP

SCL. The example deletes all processor groups in environment
DEVEL, system ACCT, type COBOL, and stage ID "U".
DELETE PROCESSOR GROUP ""
FROM ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
SYSTEM "ACCT"
TYPE "COBOL"
STAGE ID "U".

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-77

6.6 The Delete Statements

6.6.8 Delete Processor Symbol

Use the DELETE PROCESSOR SYMBOL action to delete processor
symbol overrides.

6.6.9 Syntax

──DELete PROcessor SYMbol──FROm──ENVironment──environment-name───────

──SYStem──system-name──TYPe──type-name──┬─STAge ID──stage-id─────┬────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘
──PROcessor GROup──group-name─────────────────────────────────────────
──PROcessor TYPe──┬─EQ─┬──┬─GENerate─┬────────────────────────────────
└─=──┘ ├─MOVe─────┤
└─DELete───┘
──┬───────────────────────────────────────┬──.───────────────────────
│ ┌─,───────────┐ │
└─SYMbol──┬─EQ─┬──(─── ─symbol-name─┴──)─┘
└─=──┘

6.6.9.1 Syntax Rules

DELETE PROCESSOR SYMBOL

The DELETE PROCESSOR SYMBOL clause indicates that you are

deleting symbols in processors. You must specify this clause.
FROM ENVIRONMENT environment-name
SYSTEM system-name
TYPE type-name
STAGE ID stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no
PROCESSOR GROUP group-name
PROCESSOR TYPE EQ/=GENERATE/MOVE/DELETE

The FROM clause identifies the inventory location of the processor

group to which the processor symbols are defined, the processor group
name, and a processor type within the group. The environment name,
system name, and type name you specify in the FROM clause must all
be fully specified.

You can fully specify, partially wildcard or fully wildcard the

processor group name. The processor group must exist in the
processor load library. The processor group name cannot be
'*NOPROC*. Specify either a generate, move, or delete processor type
for this processor symbol.

6-78 SCL Reference Guide

 6.6 The Delete Statements

SYMBOL EQ/= symbol-name

The SYMBOL clause identifies one or more symbol names that are to
be deleted from the symbol override. If you specify more than one
name, enclose the symbol names in parentheses and separate by
commas. Deleted symbols revert to the defaults specified in the
processor definition. If you omit the SYMBOL clause, all the symbols
associated with the processor group are deleted.

Example of Delete Processor Symbol SCL

The following is an example of the DELETE PROCESSOR SYMBOL

SCL. The example deletes all generate processor symbols from
processor group COBNBL1 in environment DEVEL, system ACCT, and
stage ID U.
DELETE PROCESSOR SYMBOL
FROM ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
SYSTEM "ACCT"
TYPE "COBOL"
STAGE ID "U"
PROCESSOR GROUP "COBNBL1"
PROCESSOR TYPE GENERATE.
SYMBOL EQ SYMBOL1
SYMBOL EQ SYMBOL2.

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-79

6.6 The Delete Statements

6.6.10 Delete Shipment Destination

Use the DELETE SHIPMENT DESTINATION clause to delete
destinations to which you ship package outputs.

Note: The DELETE SHIPMENT DESTINATION clause also deletes all

the data set mapping rules associated with the destination.

6.6.11 Syntax

──DELete SHIPMent DESTination──destination-name──.──────────────────

6.6.11.1 Syntax Rules

DELETE SHIPMENT DESTINATION destination-name

The DELETE SHIPMENT DESTINATION clause identifies the 1- to

7-character name of the destination you are deleting. You can partially
or fully wildcard the destination name.

Example of Delete Shipment Destination SCL

The following is an example of the DELETE SHIPMENT

DESTINATION SCL. The example deletes the shipment destination
named "BOSTNDM".
DELETE SHIPMENT DESTINATION "BOSTNDM" .

6-80 SCL Reference Guide

 6.6 The Delete Statements

6.6.12 Delete Shipment Mapping Rule

Use the DELETE SHIPMENT MAPPING RULE action to delete
mapping rules between a host data set name and a remote data set
name.

6.6.13 Syntax

──DELete SHIPMent MAPping RULe───────────────────────────────────────

──FROm──DESTination──destination-name──HOSt DATaset──dsname──.───────

6.6.13.1 Syntax Rules

FROM DESTINATION destination-name

The FROM DESTINATION clause identifies the 1- to 7-character name

of an existing package shipment destination from which you are
deleting a mapping rule. You must use a fully specified value.

HOST DATASET dsname

This clause identifies the 1- to 44-character name or mask of the host

data set name.

Example of Delete Shipment Mapping Rule SCL

The following is an example of the DELETE SHIPMENT MAPPING

RULE SCL. The example deletes a shipment mapping rule from
shipment destination named "BOSTNDM".
DELETE SHIPMENT MAPPING RULE
FROM SHIPMENT DESTINATION "BOSTNDM"
HOST DATASET "ENDEVOR.QAFIN.SRCOUT" .

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-81

6.6 The Delete Statements

6.6.14 Delete Subsystem

Use the DELETE SUBSYSTEM action to delete a subsystem definition.
The DELETE SUBSYSTEM action also removes approver group
junction definitions associated with the subsystem.

Note: You cannot delete a subsystem if any elements are associated

with the subsystem at either Stage 1 or Stage 2.

6.6.15 Syntax

──DELete SUBSystem──subsystem-name───────────────────────────────────
──FROm──ENVironment──environment-name──SYStem──system-name──.────────

6.6.15.1 Syntax Rules

DELETE SUBSYSTEM subsystem-name

The DELETE SUBSYSTEM clause identifies the 1- to 8-character name

of the subsystem you are deleting. You can partially or fully wildcard
subsystem name.
FROM ENVIRONMENT environment-name
SYSTEM system-name

The FROM clause identifies the inventory location to which the

subsystem is defined. Names you use in the FROM clause must be
fully specified.

Example of Delete Subsystem SCL

The following is an example of the DELETE SUBSYSTEM SCL. The

example deletes all subsystems using environment DEVEL, and system
ACCT.
DELETE SUBSYSTEM ""
FROM ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
SYSTEM "ACCT" .

6-82 SCL Reference Guide

 6.6 The Delete Statements

6.6.16 Delete System

Use the DELETE SYSTEM action to delete a system definition. The
DELETE SYSTEM action also deletes the type sequence definition at
both Stage 1 and Stage 2.

Note: You cannot delete a system if any subsystems or types are

associated with it at either Stage 1 or Stage 2.

6.6.17 Syntax

──DELete SYStem──system-name──FROm──ENVironment──environment-name────
──.──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────

6.6.17.1 Syntax Rules

DELETE SYSTEM system-name

The DELETE SYSTEM clause identifies the 1- to 8-character name of

the system you are deleting. You can partially or fully wildcard the
system name.

FROM ENVIRONMENT environment-clause

The FROM ENVIRONMENT clause identifies the environment to

which the system is defined. You must use fully specified
environment name.

Example of Delete System SCL

The following is an example of the DELETE SYSTEM SCL. The

example deletes a system named ACCT from environment DEVEL.
DELETE SYSTEM "ACCT"
FROM ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL" .

Chapter 6. Environment Definition SCL 6-83

6.6 The Delete Statements

6.6.18 Delete Type

Use the DELETE TYPE action to delete a type definition. The DELETE
TYPE action also removes any processor group and processor group
symbol records associated with the element type.

Note: You cannot delete a type definition if there are any elements
associated with it at the stage specified.

6.6.19 Syntax

──DELete──TYPe──type-name──FROm──ENVironment──environment-name───────
──SYStem──system-name──┬─STAge ID──stage-id─────┬──.─────────────────
└─STAge NUMber──stage-no─┘

6.6.19.1 Syntax Rules

DELETE TYPE type-name

The DELETE TYPE clause indicates that you are deleting a type
definition. You must specify this clause.
FROM ENVIRONMENT environment-name
SYSTEM system-name
STAGE ID stage-id
STAGE NUMBER stage-no

The FROM clause identifies the inventory location to which the type is
defined. Names you use in the FROM clause must be fully specified.

Example of Delete Type SCL

The following is an example of the DELETE TYPE SCL. The example

deletes all types using environment DEVEL, system ACCT, and stage
ID U.
DELETE TYPE ""
FROM ENVIRONMENT "DEVEL"
SYSTEM "ACCT"
STAGE ID "U" .

6-84 SCL Reference Guide

Appendix A. SCL Reserved Words

Within Endevor's Software Control Language, there are several reserved

parameters or keywords (for example, type or system). This appendix provides
a list of these words.

Appendix A. SCL Reserved Words A-1

A.1 A Rule for Working with Reserved Words

A.1 A Rule for Working with Reserved Words

Reserved words should not be used as qualifiers or identifiers within the
syntax. If you need to use such a word, however, you must enclose it in
quotes. You can use either single or double quotes.

For example, you want to add an element called "ADD." If you code the
following line, you receive an error message:
ADD ELEMENT ADD.

ADD is a reserved word and must be typed with quotes. If you type the
statement below, the system accepts the entry:
ADD ELEMENT 'ADD'.

Similarly, a clause such as the one below would be accepted by Endevor:

WHERE CCID = 'CCID'.

A-2 SCL Reference Guide

 A.1 A Rule for Working with Reserved Words

A.2 The SCL Reserved Words

The list below contains the fully-spelled reserved words. Any partial spelling
of a particular word (three characters or more) is also considered reserved.
For example, "CCIDS," "CCID," and "CCI" are variations of the word CCIDS
and so are reserved within SCL.

&&ACTION DSNAMES MEMBERS SET

ACTION ELEMENTS MOVE SHOW
ACTUAL END NAME SIGNIN
ADD ENVIRONMENT NEW SIGNOUT
ALL EOF NEWNAME SITES
ARCHIVE EOJ NO SOURCE
BROWSE = NOCC STAGES
BUILD EQ NONE STOPRC
BYPASS EQUAL NOSEARCH SUBSYSTEMS
CCIDS EXPAND NOT SUMMARY
CHANGES FAILED NUMBER SYNCHRONIZE
CLEAR FILES OF SYSTEMS
COLUMNS FROM ONLY SYSOUT
COMMENT GENERATE OPTIONS TEXT
COMPONENTS GROUP OUTPUT THROUGH
COPY HISTORY OVERRIDE THRU
COPYBACK IF PRESENT TIME
CURRENT IGNORE PRINT TO
C1PRINT INCLUDES PROCESSOR TRANSFER
DATE INPUT REPLACE TYPES
DDNAME JUMP REPORT UPDATE
DEFINE LEVELS RESTORE VERSION
DELETE LIKE RETAIN WHERE
DETAIL LIST RETRIEVE WITH
DOES MASTER SEARCH

Appendix A. SCL Reserved Words A-3

A.2 The SCL Reserved Words

A-4 SCL Reference Guide